Lexus GS350, GS F, GS300 Owner's manual

Lexus GS350, GS F, GS300 Owner's manual
Pictorial index
Search by illustration
1
For safety
and security
Make sure to read through them
2
Instrument cluster
How to read the gauges and meters, the variety of
warning lights and indicators, etc.
3
Operation of
each component
Opening and closing the doors and windows,
adjustment before driving, etc.
4
Driving
Operations and advice which are necessary for driving
5
Interior features
Usage of the interior features, etc.
6
Maintenance
and care
Caring for your vehicle and maintenance procedures
7
When trouble
arises
What to do in case of malfunction or emergency
8
Vehicle
specifications
Vehicle specifications, customizable features, etc.
9
For owners
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners, and seat belt,
SRS airbag and headlight aim instructions for Canadian
owners
Index
Search by symptom
Search alphabetically
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
For your information................................... 8
Reading this manual...................................12
How to search..............................................13
Pictorial index...............................................14
1
2
2.
For safety and security
1-1. For safe use
Before driving ................................ 32
For safe driving .............................. 34
Seat belts.......................................... 36
SRS airbags.......................................41
Front passenger occupant
classification system ................. 52
Safety information
for children ...................................58
Child restraint systems............... 59
Installing child restraints............. 63
Exhaust gas precautions..............71
1-2. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system........72
Alarm ..................................................74
3
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
Warning lights
and indicators.............................. 78
Gauges and meters
(GS350/GS300) ................... 86
Gauges and meters (GS F)...... 92
Multi-information display
(GS350/GS300) ................. 100
Multi-information display
(GS F)........................................... 108
Head-up display...........................120
Fuel consumption
information ..................................127
Operation of
each component
3-1. Key information
Keys...................................................132
3-2. Opening, closing and locking
the doors and trunk
Doors................................................137
Trunk.................................................143
Smart access system
with push-button start............ 150
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Front seats ..................................... 158
Driving position memory......... 160
Head restraints .............................165
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
3
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel
and mirrors
Steering wheel ............................. 168
Inside rear view mirror ..............169
Outside rear view mirrors ........ 171
3-5. Opening, closing the windows
and moon roof
Power windows ............................175
Moon roof.......................................178
4
Driving
4-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle ..................... 182
Cargo and luggage .....................191
Vehicle load limits .......................194
Trailer towing ............................... 195
Dinghy towing...............................196
4-2. Driving procedures
Engine (ignition) switch.............197
Automatic transmission .......... 202
Turn signal lever.......................... 210
Parking brake................................. 211
Brake Hold .....................................213
ASC (Active Sound Control)
(GS F)............................................215
4-3. Operating the lights
and wipers
Headlight switch ..........................216
Automatic High Beam...............219
Windshield wipers
and washer ................................ 223
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap ..... 228
4-5. Using the driving support
systems
Lexus Safety System+.............. 232
PCS (Pre-Collision
System) .......................................238
LKA (Lane-Keeping
Assist) .......................................... 249
Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range.............258
Cruise control............................. 270
Driving mode select
switch........................................... 273
BSM
(Blind Spot Monitor) ............. 278
• The Blind Spot Monitor
function ..................................... 281
• The Rear Cross Traffic
Alert function.........................283
TVD (Torque Vectoring
Differential) (GS F) ................286
Driving assist systems ..............288
4-6. Driving tips
Winter driving tips..................... 296
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
4
5
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Interior features
5-1. Remote Touch screen
Remote Touch/12.3-inch
display..........................................302
5-2. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Front automatic
air conditioning system ........308
Rear air conditioning
system............................................319
Heated steering wheel/
seat heaters/seat
ventilators................................... 322
5-3. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list ......................... 327
• Interior lights..........................328
• Personal lights.......................328
5-4. Using the storage features
List of storage features ............330
• Glove box.................................331
• Console box ............................331
• Cup holders ........................... 332
• Auxiliary boxes.....................333
Trunk features ............................. 334
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
5-5. Using the other interior
features
Other interior features............338
• Sun visors................................338
• Vanity mirrors .......................338
• Clock ........................................339
• Ashtrays...................................339
• Power outlets ........................340
• Armrest....................................340
• Rear sunshade/
rear door sunshades ............341
• Trunk storage
extension................................. 343
• Coat hooks............................. 344
• Assist grips ............................. 344
Garage door opener ............... 345
LEXUS Enform Safety
Connect...................................... 352
6
Maintenance and care
6-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior ................358
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior.................. 362
6-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements...365
General maintenance.............. 367
Emission inspection
and maintenance (I/M)
programs.................................... 370
5
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions..................................371
Hood............................................... 373
Positioning a floor jack ............ 374
Engine compartment ............... 376
Tires.................................................393
Tire inflation pressure ..............403
Wheels ...........................................406
Air conditioning filter ...............408
Electronic key battery............... 410
Checking and replacing
fuses................................................412
Headlight aim (vehicles with
single-beam headlights) ........416
Light bulbs ..................................... 418
7
When trouble arises
7-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers .................. 424
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an
emergency ................................ 425
7-2. Steps to take in an
emergency
If your vehicle needs
to be towed ............................... 426
If you think
something is wrong................ 432
Fuel pump shut off system...... 433
If a warning light turns on or
a warning buzzer
sounds ......................................... 434
If a warning message is
displayed ......................................441
If you have a flat tire (vehicles
with spare tire) ..........................472
If you have a flat tire (vehicles
without spare tire) ..................483
If the engine will not start........ 497
If the parking brake cannot
be released................................ 499
If the electronic key does not
operate properly...................... 501
If the vehicle battery is
discharged.................................504
If your vehicle overheats.........509
If the vehicle becomes
stuck .............................................. 515
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
6
8
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Vehicle specifications
8-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.) ................... 518
Fuel information ......................... 532
Tire information ..........................535
Index
What to do if...
(Troubleshooting)............................... 576
Alphabetical index ................................580
8-2. Customization
Customizable features ............545
8-3. Initialization
Items to initialize.........................560
9
For owners
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners .................................... 562
Seat belt instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French)..............................................563
SRS airbag instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French)..............................................565
Headlight aim instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French) (vehicles with
single-beam headlights)................... 573
For information regarding the equipment listed below, refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
• Audio system
• Intuitive parking assist
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
• Navigation system
• Lexus parking assist monitor
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
8
For your information
Main Owner’s Manual
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including
options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your
vehicle.
All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. However,
because of the Lexus policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to
make changes at any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ from your
vehicle in terms of color and equipment.
Noise from under vehicle after turning off the engine
Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound coming from
under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel evaporation leakage
check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.
Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Lexus
A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Lexus vehicles are currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any
damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your Lexus vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Lexus products. Modification with
non-genuine Lexus products could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may
even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems
resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.
Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
The installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic
systems such as:
● Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
● Lexus Safety System+
● Cruise control system
● Anti-lock brake system
● Vehicle dynamics integrated management
● SRS airbag system
● Seat belt pretensioner system
Be sure to check with your Lexus dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation of a mobile two-way radio system.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
9
Vehicle data recordings
Your Lexus is equipped with several sophisticated computers that will record certain
data, such as:
• Engine speed
• Accelerator status
• Brake status
• Vehicle speed
• Shift position
The recorded data varies according to the vehicle grade level and options with which it is
equipped. These computers do not record conversations or sounds, and only record
images outside of the vehicle in certain situations.
● Data transmission
Your vehicle may transmit the data recorded in these computers to Lexus without notification to you.
● Data usage
Lexus may use the data recorded in these computers to diagnose malfunctions, conduct research and development, and improve quality.
Lexus will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:
• With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if the vehicle
is leased
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government
agency
• For use by Lexus in a lawsuit
• For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle
owner
● Usage of data collected through Lexus Enform (U.S. mainland only)
If your Lexus has Lexus Enform and if you have subscribed to those services, please
refer to the Lexus Enform Telematics Subscription Service Agreement for information
on data collected and its usage.
● To learn more about the vehicle data collected, used and shared by Lexus, please visit
www.lexus.com/privacyvts/.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
10
Event data recorder
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment
or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety
systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs;
no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such
as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
● Disclosure of the EDR data
Lexus will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when:
• An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the lessee for a leased vehicle) is
obtained
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government
agency
• For use by Lexus in a lawsuit
However, if necessary, Lexus may:
• Use the data for research on vehicle safety performance
• Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing information about the specific vehicle or vehicle owner
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
11
Scrapping of your Lexus
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Lexus contain explosive
chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as
they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of the SRS
airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or
by your Lexus dealer before you scrap your vehicle.
Perchlorate Material
Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may
include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries.
WARNING
■ General precautions while driving
Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of
alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol and
certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination, which
could lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers or
pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts the
driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can result in a
collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or others.
■ General precaution regarding children’s safety
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use
the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a
danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows, the moon
roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
12
Reading this manual
WARNING:
Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause death or serious injury
to people.
NOTICE:
Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause damage to or a malfunction in the vehicle or its equipment.
Indicates operating or working procedures. Follow the steps in
numerical order.
Indicates the action (pushing,
turning, etc.) used to operate
switches and other devices.
Indicates the outcome of an
operation (e.g. a lid opens).
Indicates the component or position being explained.
Means “Do not”, “Do not do this”,
or “Do not let this happen”.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
13
How to search
■ Searching by name
• Alphabetical index...............P. 580
■ Searching by installation position
• Pictorial index............................. P. 14
■ Searching by symptom or sound
• What to do if...
(Troubleshooting).................P. 576
■ Searching by title
• Table of contents.........................P. 2
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
14
Pictorial index
Pictorial index
■ Exterior (front)

GS350/GS300

GS F
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Pictorial index
1
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 137
2
Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 223
15
Locking/unlocking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 137
Opening/closing the door glasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 175
Locking/unlocking by using the mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 501
Warning lights/warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 436, 443
Precautions against winter season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 296
To prevent freezing (windshield wiper de-icer)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 314
Precautions against car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 360
3 Fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 228
Refueling method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 228
Fuel type/fuel tank capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 521
4 Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 393
Tire size/inflation pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 528
Winter tires/tire chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 296
Checking/rotation/tire pressure warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 393
Coping with flat tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 472, 483
5 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 373
Opening. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 373
Engine compartment cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 379
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 522
Coping with overheat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 509
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 443
Light bulbs of the exterior lights for driving
(Replacing method: P. 418, Watts: P. 531)
6 Headlights/front side marker lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 216
Front turn signal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 210
7
Parking lights/daytime running lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 216
8 Side turn signal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 210
*: If equipped
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
16
Pictorial index
■ Exterior (rear)

GS350/GS300

GS F
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Pictorial index
1
Trunk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 143
2
Outside rear view mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 171
Opening from inside the cabin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 143
Opening from outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 143
Opening by using the mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 501
Warning lights/warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 436, 443
Adjusting the mirror angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 171
Folding the mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 171
Driving position memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 160
Defogging the mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 314
Light bulbs of the exterior lights for driving
(Replacing method: P. 418)
3 Tail lights/rear side marker lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 216
Stop lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 182
Rear turn signal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 210
Back-up light
Shifting the shift lever to R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 202
4 License plate lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 216
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
17
18
Pictorial index
■ Instrument panel
1
Engine switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 197
2
Shift lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 202
Starting the engine/changing the modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 197
Emergency stop of the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 425
When the engine will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 497
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 450, 467
Changing the shift position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 202
Precautions against towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 426
When the shift lever does not move. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 208
3 Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 86, 92
Reading the meters/adjusting the instrument panel light . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 86, 92
Warning lights/indicator lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 78
When the warning lights come on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 434
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Pictorial index
19
4 Multi-information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 100, 108
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 100, 108
When the warning messages are displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 441
5 Parking brake switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 211
Applying/releasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 211
Precautions against winter season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 297
Warning buzzer/message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 436, 455
6 Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 210
Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 216
Headlights/parking lights/tail lights/daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 216
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 223
7
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 223
Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 392
Headlight cleaners*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 224
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 462
8 Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 424
9 Trunk opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 143
10 Hood lock release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 373
11 Tilt and telescopic steering control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 168
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 168
Driving position memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 160
12 Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 308
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 308
Rear window defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 314
13 Audio system*2
14 Trunk opener main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 145
*
*1: If equipped
2
: Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
20
Pictorial index
■ Switches

GS350/GS300

GS F
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Pictorial index
1
VSC OFF switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 290
2
Heated steering wheel switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 322
21
3 Automatic High Beam switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 219
4 Instrument panel light control switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 89, 97
5 Odometer/trip meter and trip meter reset button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 89, 96
6 HUD (Head-up display) switches* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 120
7
Brake hold switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 213
8 ASC switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 215
*: If equipped
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
22
Pictorial index

GS350/GS300

GS F
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Pictorial index
1
Driving position memory switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 160
2
Outside rear view mirror switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 171
3 Door lock switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 139
4 Power window switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 175
5 Window lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 175
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
23
24
Pictorial index

GS350/GS300

GS F
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Pictorial index
1
Audio remote control switches*1
2
Paddle shift switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 204
25
3 Talk switch*1
4 Meter control switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 101, 109
5 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch*2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 264
6 Cruise control switch
Cruise control*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 270
Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 258
7
LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) switch*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 249
8 Telephone switches*1
*1: Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”
*2: If equipped
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
26
Pictorial index

GS350/GS300

GS F
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Pictorial index
1
Seat heater switches*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 323
2
Seat ventilator switches*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 323
27
3 Remote Touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 302
4 Intuitive parking assist switch*1, 2
5 Rear sunshade switch*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 341
6 Driving mode select switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 273
Snow mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 203
7
8 TVD switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 286
*
*1: If equipped
2
: Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
28
Pictorial index
■ Interior

GS350/GS300

GS F
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Pictorial index
1
SRS airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 41
2
Floor mats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 32
29
3 Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 158
4 Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 165
5 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 36
6 Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 331
7
Inside lock buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 139
8 Cup holders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 332
9 Auxiliary boxes* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 333
Ashtrays* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 339
10 Assist grips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 344
*: If equipped
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
30
Pictorial index
1
Inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 169
2
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 338
3 Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 338
4 Interior light*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 328
5 Personal lights*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 328
6 Moon roof switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 178
7
“SOS” button*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 352
8 Garage door opener switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 345
*1: The illustration shows the front, but they are also equipped in the rear.
*2: If equipped
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
31
For safety and security
1
1-1. For safe use
Before driving................................. 32
For safe driving .............................. 34
Seat belts ..........................................36
SRS airbags .......................................41
Front passenger occupant
classification system..................52
Safety information
for children ...................................58
Child restraint systems ...............59
Installing child restraints.............63
Exhaust gas precautions..............71
1-2. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system....... 72
Alarm ................................................. 74
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
32
1-1. For safe use
Before driving
Floor mat
Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same model and
model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place onto the carpet.
1
Insert the retaining hooks (clips) into
the floor mat eyelets.
2
Turn the upper knob of each retaining hook (clip) to secure the floor
mats in place.
*: Always align the
*
marks.
The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) may differ from that shown in the illustration.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
1-1. For safe use
33
WARNING
● Check that the floor mat is securely fixed in
the correct place with all the provided retaining hooks (clips). Be especially careful to perform this check after cleaning the floor.
● With the engine stopped and the shift lever in
P, fully depress each pedal to the floor to
make sure it does not interfere with the floor
mat.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
1
For safety and security
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause the driver’s floor mat to slip, possibly interfering with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may become difficult to
stop the vehicle. This could lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
■ When installing the driver’s floor mat
● Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year vehicles,
even if they are Lexus Genuine floor mats.
● Only use floor mats designed for the driver’s seat.
● Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) provided.
● Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.
● Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.
■ Before driving
34
1-1. For safe use
For safe driving
For safe driving, adjust the seat and mirror to an appropriate position before
driving.
Correct driving posture
1
Adjust the angle of the seatback so
that you are sitting straight up and so
that you do not have to lean forward
to steer. (→P. 158)
2
Adjust the seat so that you can
depress the pedals fully and so that
your arms bend slightly at the elbow
when gripping the steering wheel.
(→P. 158)
3
GS350/GS300: Lock the head restraint in place with the center of the head
restraint closest to the top of your ears. (→P. 165)
4
Wear the seat belt correctly. (→P. 36)
Correct use of the seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle. (→P. 36)
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes
large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (→P. 59)
Adjusting the mirrors
Make sure that you can see backward clearly by adjusting the inside and outside
rear view mirrors properly. (→P. 169, 171)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
1-1. For safe use
35
WARNING
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
1
For safety and security
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat while driving.
Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
● Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.
A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint.
● Do not place anything under the front seats.
Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and stop
the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident and the adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.
● Always observe the legal speed limit when driving on public roads.
● When driving over long distances, take regular breaks before you start to feel tired.
Also, if you feel tired or sleepy while driving, do not force yourself to continue driving
and take a break immediately.
36
1-1. For safe use
Seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the
vehicle.
Correct use of the seat belts
● Extend the shoulder belt so that it
comes fully over the shoulder, but
does not come into contact with the
neck or slide off the shoulder.
● Position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips.
● Adjust the position of the seatback.
Sit up straight and well back in the
seat.
● Do not twist the seat belt.
Fastening and releasing the seat belt
1
To fasten the seat belt, push the plate
into the buckle until a click sound is
heard.
2
To release the seat belt, press the
release button.
Release button
Adjusting the seat belt shoulder anchor height (front seats)
1
Push the seat belt shoulder anchor
down while pressing the release button.
2
Push the seat belt shoulder anchor
up.
Move the height adjuster up and down
as needed until you hear a click.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
1-1. For safe use
37
Seat belt comfort guide (outboard rear seats)
For children or smaller-than-average
people, slide the seat belt comfort
guide forward so that the shoulder belt
does not sit close to the person’s neck.
1
The pretensioner helps the seat belt to
quickly restrain the occupant by
retracting the seat belt when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of
severe frontal collision.
The front seat pretensioners also activate when the vehicle is subjected to
certain types of severe side collision.
The pretensioner does not activate in the event of a minor frontal impact, a minor side
impact, a rear impact or a vehicle rollover.
■ Emergency locking retractor (ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if you
lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend so that you can
move around fully.
■ Automatic locking retractor (ALR)
When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even
slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to
hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully retract the belt
and then pull the belt out once more. (→P. 63)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
For safety and security
Seat belt pretensioners (front and outboard rear seats)
38
1-1. For safe use
■ Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size.
● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large
enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (→P. 59)
● When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt, follow
the instructions regarding seat belt usage. (→P. 36)
■ Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the first
collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.
■ Seat belt extender
If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely
because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from your
Lexus dealer free of charge.
WARNING
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden
braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
■ Wearing a seat belt
● Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.
● Always wear a seat belt properly.
● Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more
than one person at once, including children.
● Lexus recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat belt
and/or an appropriate child restraint system.
● To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than necessary. The
seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well back in
the seats.
● Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
● Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
1-1. For safe use
39
WARNING
■ Pregnant women
■ People suffering illness
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (→P. 36)
■ When children are in the vehicle
Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around
a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the
belt.
■ Seat belt pretensioners
● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger’s seat.
Doing so will disperse the passenger’s weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger’s weight properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner for the
front passenger’s seat may not activate in the event of a collision.
● If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In that case, the
seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at your Lexus dealer.
■ Adjustable shoulder anchor
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder.
The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Failure to
do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause death or serious
injuries in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident. (→P. 36)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
1
For safety and security
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt
in the proper way. (→P. 36)
Women who are pregnant should position the
lap belt as low as possible over the hips in the
same manner as other occupants, extending
the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder
and avoiding belt contact with the rounding of
the abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only the
pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer
death or serious injury as a result of sudden
braking or a collision.
40
1-1. For safe use
WARNING
■ Seat belt damage and wear
● Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed in
the door.
● Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts. Do
not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot protect an
occupant from death or serious injury.
● Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted.
If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Lexus dealer.
● Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in a
serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.
● Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts.
Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Lexus dealer. Inappropriate handling
may lead to incorrect operation.
■ Using a seat belt extender
● Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the extender.
● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system because the
belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of death or
serious injury in the event of an accident.
● The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by another
person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally intended.
NOTICE
■ When using a seat belt extender
When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender, not
on the seat belt.
This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
1-1. For safe use
41
SRS airbags
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of
severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They work
together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious injury.
1
For safety and security
◆ SRS front airbags
SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from
impact with interior components
2 SRS knee airbags
Can help provide driver and front passenger protection
An SRS knee airbag for the front passenger’s seat is built into the glove box
door.
1
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
42
1-1. For safe use
◆ SRS side and curtain shield airbags
SRS front side airbags
Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants
SRS rear side airbags
Can help protect the torso of occupants in the rear outer seats
4 SRS curtain shield airbags
● Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer seats
● Can prevent the occupants from being thrown from the vehicle in the
event of vehicle rollover
3
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
1-1. For safe use
43
SRS airbag system components
1
For safety and security
Front passenger occupant classifi- 10 SRS warning light
cation system (ECU and sensors)
11 Driver airbag
2 Side impact sensors (front doors)
12 Rear side airbags
1
3
Knee airbags
13
Side impact sensors (rear)
4
Front passenger airbag
14
Driver’s seat position sensor
5
Curtain shield airbags
15 Driver’s seat belt buckle switch
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG 16 Airbag sensor assembly
OFF” indicator lights
17 Front passenger’s seat belt buckle
7 Seat belt pretensioners and force
switch
limiters
18 Front impact sensors
8 Side impact sensors (front)
6
9
Front side airbags
Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based on the
US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag sensor assembly
(ECU) controls airbag deployment based on information obtained from the sensors etc. shown in the system components diagram above. This information
includes crash severity and occupant information. As the airbags deploy, a
chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to
help restrain the motion of the occupants.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
44
1-1. For safe use
WARNING
■ SRS airbag precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly.
The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.
● The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) advises:
Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation,
placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear
margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering wheel to
your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now, you can change your
driving position in several ways:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably.
• Slightly recline the back of the seat.
Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of
the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road,
raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle
has that feature.
• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward
your chest instead of your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument panel
controls.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
1-1. For safe use
45
WARNING
■ SRS airbag precautions
● If the seat belt extender has been connected
● The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause
death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The
front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback
adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.
● Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously
injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt
should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Lexus strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are safer for infants and children than the front
passenger seat. (→P. 59)
● Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean
against the dashboard.
● Do not allow a child to stand in front of the
SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on the
knees of a front passenger.
● Do not allow the front seat occupants to hold
items on their knees.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
1
For safety and security
to the front seat belt buckles but the seat belt
extender has not also been fastened to the
latch plate of the seat belt, the SRS front airbags will judge that the driver and front passenger are wearing the seat belt even though
the seat belt has not been connected. In this
case, the SRS front airbags may not activate
correctly in a collision, resulting in death or
serious injury in the event of a collision. Be
sure to wear the seat belt with the seat belt
extender.
46
1-1. For safe use
WARNING
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not lean against the door, the roof side rail
or the front, side and rear pillars.
● Do not allow anyone to kneel on the passen-
ger seat toward the door or put their head or
hands outside the vehicle.
● Do not attach anything to or lean anything
against areas such as the dashboard, steering
wheel pad, lower portion of the instrument
panel and door of the glove box.
These items can become projectiles when the
SRS driver, front passenger and knee airbags
deploy.
● Do not attach anything to areas such as a
door, windshield glass, side door glass, front
or rear pillar, roof side rail and assist grip.
(Except for the speed limit sticker →P. 490)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
1-1. For safe use
47
WARNING
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not hang coat hangers or other hard objects on the coat hooks. All of these items
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
1
For safety and security
could become projectiles and may cause death or serious injury, should the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy.
● If a vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy, be sure to
remove it.
● Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags inflate
as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags. Such accessories may prevent the
side airbags from activating correctly, disable the system or cause the side airbags to
inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag components.
Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
● Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have
deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
● If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbags have deployed, open a door or
window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.
● If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad, door of
the glove box and front and rear pillar garnishes are damaged or cracked, have them
replaced by your Lexus dealer.
● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger’s seat. Doing so will
disperse the passenger’s weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger’s weight properly. As a result, the SRS front airbags for the front passenger
may not deploy in the event of a collision.
■ Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components
Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without
consulting your Lexus dealer. The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate)
accidentally, causing death or serious injury.
● Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags
● Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument
panel, dashboard, glove box, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars or
roof side rails
● Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant
compartment
● Installation of a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.), snow plows, winches or
roof luggage carrier
● Modifications to the vehicle’s suspension system
● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios and CD players
● Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability
48
1-1. For safe use
■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
● Slight abrasions, burns, bruising etc., may be sustained from SRS airbags, due to the
extremely high speed deployment (inflation) by hot gases.
● A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
● Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as well as the
seats, the glove box, parts of the front and rear pillars, and roof side rails may be hot for
several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.
● The windshield may crack.
● For Lexus Enform Safety Connect subscribers, if the SRS airbags deploy or in the event
of a severe rear-end collision, the system is designed to send an emergency call to the
response center, notifying them of the vehicle’s location (without needing to push the
“SOS” button) and an agent will attempt to speak with the occupants to ascertain the
level of emergency and assistance required. If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emergency and helps to dispatch the
necessary emergency services. (→P. 352)
■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags)
● The SRS front airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approximately 12 - 18 mph [20 30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or deform).
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher in the following situations:
• If the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move
or deform on impact
• If the vehicle is involved in an underride collision, such as a collision in which the
front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck
● Depending on the type of collision, it is possible that only the seat belt pretensioners will
activate.
● The SRS front airbags for the front passenger will not activate if there is no passenger
sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the SRS front airbags for the front passenger may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if the seat is unoccupied. (→P. 52)
■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side and curtain shield airbags)
● The SRS side and curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that
exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to the impact force
produced by an approximately 3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle colliding with the vehicle
cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle orientation at an approximate
speed of 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h]).
● The SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of vehicle rollover.
● The SRS side and curtain shield airbags may also deploy in the event of a severe frontal
collision.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
1-1. For safe use
49
■ Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a collision
The SRS front airbags, SRS side and curtain shield airbags may also deploy if a serious
impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.
● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface
● Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
● Landing hard or falling
■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS front airbags)
The SRS front airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear
collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But, whenever a
collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of
the SRS front airbags may occur.
● Collision from the side
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
For safety and security
The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy under the situations shown in the illustration.
● The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal.
● The vehicle skids and hits a curb stone.
1
50
1-1. For safe use
■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS side and curtain shield air-
bags)
The SRS side and curtain shield airbags may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a
collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other
than the passenger compartment.
● Collision from the side to the vehicle body
other than the passenger compartment
● Collision from the side at an angle
The SRS side airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a rear collision, if
it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side or low-speed frontal collision.
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover
The SRS curtain shield airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a rear
collision, if it pitches end over end, or if it is involved in a low-speed side or low-speed
frontal collision.
● Collision from the rear
● Pitching end over end
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
1-1. For safe use
51
■ When to contact your Lexus dealer
In the following cases, the vehicle will require inspection and/or repair. Contact your
Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
● Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.
● The front of the vehicle is damaged or
deformed, or was involved in an accident that
was not severe enough to cause the SRS front
airbags to inflate.
damaged or deformed, or the vehicle was
involved in an accident that was not severe
enough to cause the SRS side and curtain
shield airbags to inflate.
● The pad section of the steering wheel, dash-
board near the front passenger airbag, lower
portion of the instrument panel or door of the
glove box is scratched, cracked, or otherwise
damaged.
● The surface of the seats with the side airbag is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
● The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars or
roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing
the curtain shield airbags inside is scratched,
cracked, or otherwise damaged.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
For safety and security
● A portion of a door or its surrounding area is
1
52
1-1. For safe use
Front passenger occupant classification system
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and activates or deactivates the devices for the front passenger.
1
Seat belt reminder light
2
SRS warning light
3
“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light
4
“AIR BAG ON” indicator light
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
1-1. For safe use
53
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification
system
■ Adult*1
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON”
SRS warning light
Off
Seat belt reminder light
Off *2
or
flashing*3
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag
on the front passenger seat
Devices
Curtain shield airbag
in the front passenger side
Activated
Front passenger knee airbag
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
■ Child*4
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“AIR BAG OFF”
or
“AIR BAG ON”*4
SRS warning light
Off
Seat belt reminder light
Off*2 or
flashing*3
Front passenger airbag
Deactivated or
activated*4
Side airbag
on the front passenger seat
Devices
Curtain shield airbag
in the front passenger side
Activated
Front passenger knee airbag
Deactivated or
activated*4
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
Activated
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
1
For safety and security
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
54
1-1. For safe use
■ Child restraint system with infant*5
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“AIR BAG OFF”*6
SRS warning light
Off
Seat belt reminder light
Off*2 or
flashing*3
Front passenger airbag
Deactivated
Side airbag
on the front passenger seat
Devices
Curtain shield airbag
in the front passenger side
Activated
Front passenger knee airbag
Deactivated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
Activated
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“AIR BAG OFF”
■ Unoccupied
Indicator/
warning light
SRS warning light
Off
Seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag
on the front passenger seat
Devices
Curtain shield airbag
in the front passenger side
Deactivated
Activated
Front passenger knee airbag
Deactivated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
Activated
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
1-1. For safe use
55
■ There is a malfunction in the system
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG OFF”
SRS warning light
On
Seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Devices
Curtain shield airbag
in the front passenger side
Deactivated
Activated
Front passenger knee airbag
Deactivated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
Activated
*1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in
the front passenger seat, the system may not recognize him/her as an adult
depending on his/her physique and posture.
*2: In the event the front passenger is wearing a seat belt.
*3: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt
*4: For some children, child in seat, child in booster seat or child in convertible seat,
the system may not recognize him/her as a child. Factors which may affect this can
be the physique or posture.
*5: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on the front passenger
seat when it is unavoidable. (→P. 59)
*6: In case the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual on how to install the
child restraint system properly. (→P. 63)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
For safety and security
Side airbag
on the front passenger seat
1
56
1-1. For safe use
WARNING
■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the front passenger occupant classification system.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● Wear the seat belt properly.
● Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt plate has not been left inserted into the
buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.
● Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not illuminated when using the seat
belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle, and reconnect
the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure the “AIR BAG ON”
indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender while the “AIR BAG
OFF” indicator light is illuminated, the SRS airbags for the front passenger will not
activate, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of a collision.
● Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment (e.g. seatback
pockets).
● Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on the
front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.
● Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on the
seatback with their legs.
● Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.
● Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat. This may
cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates that the
SRS airbags for the front passenger will not activate in the event of a severe accident.
If the seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does
not touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible
when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the seat belt system.
● If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up
straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If
the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to
move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully
rearward.
● When it is unavoidable to install a forward-facing child restraint system on the front
passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat in the
proper order. (→P. 63)
● Do not modify or remove the front seats.
● Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise, the
SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the front passenger
occupant classification system. In this case, contact your Lexus dealer immediately.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
1-1. For safe use
57
WARNING
■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
● Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the front seat-
backs.
● Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion and seat cover, that covers the seat
cushion surface.
● Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.
1
● Adjust the front passenger seat so that the head restraint does not touch the ceiling. If
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
For safety and security
the head restraint is left in contact with the ceiling, the system may not detect the front
passenger properly, leading to improper operation of the airbags.
58
1-1. For safe use
Safety information for children
Observe the following precautions when children are in the vehicle.
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes
large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
● It is recommended that children sit in the rear seats to avoid accidental con-
tact with the shift lever, wiper switch etc.
● Use the rear door child-protector lock or the window lock switch to avoid
children opening the door while driving or operating the power window accidentally. (→P. 140, 175)
● Do not let small children operate equipment which may catch or pinch body
parts, such as the power window, hood, trunk, seats etc.
WARNING
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use
the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a
danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows, the moon roof
or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
1-1. For safe use
59
Child restraint systems
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly
restrained on the seat with the LATCH anchors or the lap portion of the lap/
shoulder belt.
The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of child
restraint systems.
Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is much safer
than installing one on the front passenger seat.
● Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appropriate to
the age and size of the child.
● For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child restraint
system.
General installation instructions are provided in this manual. (→P. 63)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
For safety and security
Points to remember
1
60
1-1. For safe use
Types of child restraints
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types according to the
age and size of the child:


Rear facing ⎯ Infant seat/convertible seat

Forward facing ⎯ Convertible
seat
Booster seat
■ Selecting an appropriate child restraint system
● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large
enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
● If the child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat and use the
vehicle’s seat belt. (→P. 36)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
1-1. For safe use
61
WARNING
■ Child restraint precautions
● For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must be
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
1
For safety and security
properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on the age
and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a child restraint
system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between
you and the vehicle’s interior.
● Lexus strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to the
size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is
safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even if
the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated.
In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.
● A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger seat
only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that requires a top tether strap
should not be used in the front passenger seat since there is no top tether strap
anchor for the front passenger seat. Adjust the seatback as upright as possible and
always move the seat as far back as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator
light is illuminated, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.
● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the front
or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt extender
connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the
event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
● Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the
door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side rails from which the SRS
side airbags or SRS curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child
restraint system. It is dangerous if the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags
inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.
● Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the child
restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not secured
properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a sudden
stop, sudden swerve or accident.
62
1-1. For safe use
WARNING
■ When children are in the vehicle
Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around
a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the
belt.
■ When the child restraint system is not in use
● Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use. Do
not store the child restraint system unsecured in the passenger compartment.
● If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or
store it securely in the trunk. If a head restraint was removed when installing a child
restraint system, always install the head restraint before driving. This will prevent it
from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
1-1. For safe use
63
Installing child restraints
Follow the child restraint system manufacturer’s instructions. Firmly secure
child restraints to the seats using the LATCH anchors or a seat belt. Attach the
top tether strap when installing a child restraint.
The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is not compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) system.
LATCH anchors are provided for the
outboard rear seats. (Buttons displaying
the location of the anchors are attached
to the seats.)
Seat belts equipped with a child
restraint locking mechanism (ALR/
ELR belts except driver’s seat belt)
(→P. 37)
Anchor brackets (for top tether strap)
Anchor brackets are provided for each
rear seats.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
For safety and security
Child restraint LATCH anchors
1
64
1-1. For safe use
Installation with LATCH system
1
Remove the head restraint.
2
Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback slightly.

Type A
3
Latch the hooks of the lower straps
onto the LATCH anchors. If the child
restraint has a top tether strap, the
top tether strap should be latched
onto the top tether strap anchor.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a
lower connector system.
Canada only
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
1-1. For safe use

3
65
Type B
Latch the buckles onto the LATCH
anchors. If the child restraint has a
top tether strap, the top tether strap
should be latched onto the top
tether strap anchor.
1
For safety and security
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a
lower connector system.
Canada only
Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function
belt)
■ Rear-facing ⎯ Infant seat/convertible seat
1
Place the child restraint system
on the rear seat facing the rear of
the vehicle.
2
Run the seat belt through the
child restraint system and insert
the plate into the buckle. Make
sure that the belt is not twisted.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
66
1-1. For safe use
3
Fully extend the shoulder belt and
allow it to retract to put it in lock
mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended.
4
While pushing the child restraint
system down into the rear seat,
allow the shoulder belt to retract
until the child restraint system is
securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has retracted
to a point where there is no slack in
the belt, pull the belt to check that it
cannot be extended.
■ Forward-facing ⎯ Convertible seat
1
Rear outboard seats:
Remove the head restraint.
2
Place the child restraint system
on the seat facing the front of the
vehicle.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
1-1. For safe use
3
67
Run the seat belt through the
child restraint system and insert
the plate into the buckle. Make
sure that the belt is not twisted.
1
Fully extend the shoulder belt and
allow it to retract to put it in lock
mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended.
5
While pushing the child restraint
system into the rear seat, allow
the shoulder belt to retract until
the child restraint system is
securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has retracted
to a point where there is no slack in
the belt, pull the belt to check that it
cannot be extended.
6
If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be
latched onto the top tether strap anchor. (→P. 68)
■ Booster seat
1
Place the child restraint system
on the seat facing the front of the
vehicle.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
For safety and security
4
68
1-1. For safe use
2
Sit the child in the child restraint
system. Fit the seat belt to the
child restraint system according
to the manufacturer’s instructions
and insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the belt is
not twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child’s shoulder and
that the lap belt is as low as possible. (→P. 36)
Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt
Push the buckle release button and fully
retract the seat belt.
Child restraint systems with a top tether strap
1
Rear outboard seats:
Remove the head restraint.
2
Secure the child restraint system
using the seat belt or LATCH
anchors.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
1-1. For safe use
3
69
Open the anchor bracket cover,
latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top tether
strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is
securely latched.
1
The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be
used.
This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.
WARNING
■ When installing a booster seat
To prevent the belt from going into ALR lock mode, do not fully extend the shoulder
belt. ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only. This could cause injury or discomfort to
the child. (→P. 37)
■ When installing a child restraint system
Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix the
child restraint system securely in place.
If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other passengers
may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving
or an accident.
● If the driver’s seat interferes with the child
restraint system and prevents it from being
attached correctly, attach the child restraint
system to the right-hand rear seat.
● Adjust the front passenger seat so that it does
not interfere with the child restraint system.
● Only put a forward-facing child restraint sys-
tem on the front seat when unavoidable.
When installing a forward-facing child
restraint system on the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible even if
the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated. Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury if the airbags deploy (inflate).
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
For safety and security
■ Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages
70
1-1. For safe use
WARNING
■ When installing a child restraint system
● When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is positioned
across the center of the child’s shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child’s
neck, but not so that it could fall off the child’s shoulder. Failing to do so may result in
death or serious injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
● Ensure that the belt and plate are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted.
● Shake the child restraint system left and right, and forward and backward to ensure
that it has been securely installed.
● After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.
■ Do not use a seat belt extender
If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt will
not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury
to the child or other passengers in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an
accident.
■ To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors
When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the
anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint system. Make sure
the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or serious injury to
the child or other passengers in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an
accident.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
1-1. For safe use
71
Exhaust gas precautions
Harmful substance to the human body is included in exhaust gases if inhaled.
WARNING
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
1
For safety and security
Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause exhaust gases enter the vehicle and may lead to an accident
caused by light-headedness, or may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
■ Important points while driving
● Keep the trunk lid closed.
● If you smell exhaust gases in the vehicle even when the trunk lid is closed, open the
windows and have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
■ When parking
● If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area or a closed area, such as a garage, stop the
engine.
● Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time.
If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and ensure
that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
● Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it is snowing.
If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is running, exhaust gases
may collect and enter the vehicle.
■ Exhaust pipe
The exhaust system needs to be checked periodically. If there is a hole or crack caused
by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehicle
inspected and repaired by your Lexus dealer.
72
1-2. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system
The vehicle’s keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the engine
from starting if a key has not been previously registered in the vehicle’s onboard computer.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
This system is designed to help prevent vehicle theft but does not guarantee
absolute security against all vehicle thefts.
The indicator light flashes after the
engine switch has been turned off to
indicate that the system is operating.
The indicator light stops flashing after
the engine switch has been turned to
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode to indicate that the system has
been canceled.
■ System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type engine immobilizer system.
■ Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction
● If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object
● If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system (key with a
built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
1-2. Theft deterrent system
73
■ Certifications for the engine immobilizer system

For vehicles sold in the U.S. mainland, Hawaii, NATO Germany, Guam and Puerto Rico
1
For vehicles sold in Canada
WARNING
■ Certifications for the engine immobilizer system
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTICE
■ To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of
the system cannot be guaranteed.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
For safety and security

74
1-2. Theft deterrent system
Alarm
The alarm
The alarm uses light and sound to give an alert when an intrusion is detected.
The alarm is triggered in the following situations when the alarm is set:
● A locked door is unlocked or opened in any way other than using the entry
function, wireless remote control or mechanical key. (The doors will lock again
automatically.)
● A locked trunk is unlocked or opened in any way other than using the entry
function or wireless remote control.
● The hood is opened.
Setting the alarm system
Close the doors, trunk and hood, and
lock all the doors. The system will be set
automatically after 30 seconds.
The indicator light changes from being
on to flashing when the system is set.
Deactivating or stopping the alarm
Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarms:
● Unlock the doors.
● Turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or start
the engine. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a few seconds.)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
1-2. Theft deterrent system
75
■ System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type alarm system.
■ Items to check before locking the vehicle
● A person inside the vehicle opens a door, the
trunk or hood, or unlocks the vehicle using an
inside lock button.
● The battery is recharged or replaced when the
vehicle is locked. (→P. 507)
■ Alarm-operated door lock
In the following cases, the door may automatically lock:
● When a person remaining in the vehicle unlocks the door and the alarm is activated.
● While the alarm is activated, a person remaining in the vehicle unlocks the door.
● When recharging or replacing the battery.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
1
For safety and security
To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of the following:
● Nobody is in the vehicle.
● The windows and moon roof are closed before the alarm is set.
● No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.
■ Triggering of the alarm
The alarm may be triggered in the following situations:
(Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.)
● The trunk is opened using the mechanical key.
76
1-2. Theft deterrent system
NOTICE
■ To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of
the system cannot be guaranteed.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
77
Instrument cluster
2
2.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Instrument cluster
Warning lights
and indicators.............................. 78
Gauges and meters
(GS350/GS300)....................86
Gauges and meters (GS F)...... 92
Multi-information display
(GS350/GS300)..................100
Multi-information display
(GS F) ...........................................108
Head-up display .......................... 120
Fuel consumption
information ..................................127
78
2. Instrument cluster
Warning lights and indicators
The warning lights and indicators on the instrument cluster, center panel and
outside rear view mirrors inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems.
For the purpose of explanation, the following illustrations display all warning
lights and indicators illuminated.

GS350/GS300 (except F SPORT models)

GS350/GS300 (F SPORT models)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
2. Instrument cluster

79
GS F
2
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Instrument cluster
The units used on the meters and some indicators may differ depending on the target
region.
80
2. Instrument cluster
Warning lights
Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in the indicated vehicle systems.
*1
Brake system warning light
(→P. 434)
(U.S.A.)
*1
*1, 3
(If equipped)
Brake system warning light
(→P. 434)
PCS (Pre-Collision
System) warning light
(→P. 435)
*1
Slip indicator (→P. 435)
(Canada)
*1, 2
Charging system warning
light (→P. 434)
*1, 4, 5
“AFS OFF” indicator
(→P. 435)
(If equipped)
*1
Malfunction indicator lamp
(→P. 434)
*1, 4
Brake hold operated
indicator (→P. 435)
(U.S.A.)
*1
Malfunction indicator lamp
(→P. 434)
(Canada)
*1
*4
Parking brake indicator
(→P. 436)
(U.S.A.)
SRS warning light
(→P. 434)
*4
Parking brake indicator
(→P. 436)
(Canada)
*1
ABS warning light
(→P. 434)
*1
Brake system warning light
(→P. 436)
(U.S.A.)
*1
ABS warning light
(→P. 434)
*6
Open door warning light
(→P. 436)
(Canada)
*1
Electric power steering
system warning light
(→P. 435)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Low fuel level warning light
(→P. 436)
2. Instrument cluster
Seat belt reminder light
(→P. 436)
*1
Master warning light
(→P. 436)
*1
(If equipped)
81
Tire pressure warning light
(→P. 436)
LKA warning light
(→P. 437)
*1: These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode to
indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is
started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does
not come on, or turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
Instrument cluster
*2: On some models
*3: The light flashes or illuminates to indicate a malfunction.
*4: The light flashes to indicate a malfunction.
*5: GS350/GS300
*6: GS F
Indicators
The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle’s various systems.
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Turn signal indicator
(→P. 210)
Cruise control indicator
(→P. 266, 270)
Headlight indicator
(→P. 216)
Dynamic radar cruise
control indicator
(→P. 258)
Cruise control
“SET” indicator
(→P. 258, 270)
Tail light indicator
(→P. 216)
Headlight high beam
indicator (→P. 216)
(If equipped)
(If equipped)
Automatic High Beam
indicator (→P. 219)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
LKA indicator (→P. 249)
(If equipped)
*1
(If equipped)
2
Intuitive parking assist
indicator
82
2. Instrument cluster
*2, 3
*2
“AFS OFF” indicator
(→P. 217)
Brake hold standby
indicator (→P. 213)
(If equipped)
*2, 4
*2
*2, 5
*2, 6
(If equipped)
*7, 8
(If equipped)
(If equipped)
*2
Slip indicator (→P. 290)
*2, 9
VSC OFF indicator
(→P. 290)
*2
TRAC OFF indicator
(→P. 290)
PCS (Pre-Collision
System) warning light
(→P. 241)
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
outside rear view mirror
indicators (→P. 278)
Brake hold operated
indicator (→P. 213)
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
*10
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
indicator (→P. 278)
“AIR BAG ON/OFF”
indicator (→P. 52)
Eco Driving Indicator Light
(→P. 85)
Parking brake indicator
(→P. 211)
Parking brake indicator
(→P. 211)
Low outside temperature
indicator (→P. 87, 94)
● Drive mode indicators

GS350/GS300 (except F SPORT models)
Eco drive mode indicator
(→P. 273)
(If equipped)
(If equipped)
“SPORT S” indicator
(→P. 273)
“Customize” indicator
(→P. 273)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
(If equipped)
(If equipped)
“SPORT” indicator
(→P. 273)
“SPORT S+” indicator
(→P. 273)
Snow mode indicator
(→P. 203)
2. Instrument cluster

GS350/GS300 (F SPORT models)
Eco drive mode indicator
(→P. 273)
“SPORT S” indicator
(→P. 273)
“SPORT S+” indicator
(→P. 273)
“CUSTOMIZE” indicator
(→P. 273)
Snow mode indicator
(→P. 203)
2
GS F
“NORMAL” indicator
(→P. 276)
Eco drive mode indicator
(→P. 276)
“SPORT S” indicator
(→P. 276)
“SPORT S+” indicator
(→P. 276)
“CUSTOMIZE” indicator
(→P. 276)
Snow mode indicator
(→P. 203)
“EXPERT” indicator
(→P. 292)
● TVD (Torque Vectoring Differential) control mode indicators (GS F)
“STANDARD” indicator
(→P. 286)
“TRACK” indicator
(→P. 286)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
“SLALOM” indicator
(→P. 286)
Instrument cluster

83
84
2. Instrument cluster
*1: Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
*2: These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode to
indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is
started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does
not come on, or turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
*3: GS350/GS300
*4: The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating.
*5: GS F
*6: The light turns on when the system is turned off.
*7: In order to confirm operation, the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators illuminate
in the following situations:
• When the engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode, the BSM function is enabled
on
of the multi-information display
• When the BSM function is enabled on
of the multi-information display, the
engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.
If the system is functioning correctly, the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators will
turn off after a few seconds.
If the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators do not illuminate or do not turn off,
there may be a malfunction in the system.
If this occurs, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
8
* : This light illuminates on the outside rear view mirrors.
*9: This light illuminates on the center panel.
*10: When the outside temperature is approximately 37°F (3°C) or lower, the indicator
will flash for approximately 10 seconds, then stay on.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
2. Instrument cluster
85
■ Eco Driving Indicator

1
2
3
Eco Driving Indicator will not operate under the following conditions:
● The shift lever is in any position other than D.
● A paddle shift switch is operated.
● Neither normal mode nor Eco drive mode is selected. (→P. 273)
● The vehicle speed is approximately 80 mph (130 km/h) or higher.
GS F
During Eco-friendly acceleration (Eco driving),
the Eco Driving Indicator Light will turn on.
When the acceleration exceeds the Zone of
Eco driving, or when the vehicle is stopped, the
light turns off.

Eco Driving Indicator will not operate under the following conditions:
● The shift lever is in any position other than D.
● A paddle shift switch is operated.
● Neither normal mode nor Eco drive mode is selected. (→P. 273)
● The vehicle speed is approximately 80 mph (130 km/h) or higher.
WARNING
■ If a safety system warning light does not come on
Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS warning light not come on when
you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately if this occurs.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
2
Instrument cluster
4
GS350/GS300
Eco Driving Indicator Light
During Eco-friendly acceleration (Eco driving), the Eco Driving Indicator Light will turn
on. When the acceleration exceeds the Zone
of Eco driving, or when the vehicle is stopped,
the light turns off.
Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display
Suggests the Zone of Eco driving with current
Eco driving ratio based on acceleration.
Eco driving ratio based on acceleration
If the acceleration exceeds the Zone of Eco
driving, the right side of the Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display will illuminate.
Zone of Eco driving
86
2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters (GS350/GS300)

Except F SPORT models

F SPORT models
The units used on the speedometer may differ depending on the target region.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
2. Instrument cluster
1
87
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature
2
Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute
3
Outside temperature
Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40°F (-40°C) to 122°F
(50°C). Low outside temperature indicator comes on when the ambient temperature
is 37°F (3°C) or lower.
4
Clock
Time displayed is linked to the analog clock on the instrument panel. (→P. 339)
5
Speedometer
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank
7
Multi-information display
Presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data (→P. 100)
Displays warning messages in case of a malfunction (→P. 441)
8
Odometer, trip meter and maintenance required information display
Odometer:
Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven
Trip meter:
Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset. Trip
meters “A” and “B” can be used to record and display different distances independently.
Maintenance required information:
• Displays the maintenance required information when the engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
• It can be reset from
9
of the multi-information display. (→P. 100)
Shift position and shift range
Displays the selected shift position or selected shift range (→P. 202)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Instrument cluster
Displays the vehicle speed
6
2
88
2. Instrument cluster
■ Rev indicator (F SPORT models)
When the engine reaches a set
speed, a ring-shaped indicator will
be displayed on the tachometer.
■ Rev peak (F SPORT models)
The engine speed reaches or
exceeds 5000 rpm, an afterimage
of the tachometer will be displayed
at the highest engine speed for
approximately 1 seconds.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
2. Instrument cluster
89
Changing the display
Switches between odometer, trip meter
and maintenance required information
displays. When the trip meter is displayed, pressing and holding the button
will reset the trip meter.
2
The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.
1
Darker
2
Brighter
■ The meters and display illuminate when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Instrument panel brightness adjustment
The instrument panel brightness levels when the tail lights are on and off can be adjusted
individually. However, when the surroundings are bright (daytime, etc.), turning on the tail
lights will not change the instrument panel brightness. At this time, any adjustments made
to the instrument panel brightness levels will be applied to both settings at once.
■ Limitation of brightness adjustment
The brightness of the instrument panel lights is automatically adjusted based on the light
sensor detecting how bright the surroundings are. However, if the instrument panel
brightness has been manually set to either the brightest or darkest setting, the automatic
adjustment will not be performed.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Instrument cluster
Instrument panel light control
90
2. Instrument cluster
■ Outside temperature display
● In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or the
display may take longer than normal to change.
• When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 12 mph [20 km/h])
• When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a
garage, tunnel, etc.)
● When “--” or “E” is displayed, the system may be malfunctioning.
Take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer.
■ Pop-up display
In some situations, a pop-up display will be temporarily displayed on the multi-information display or the odometer/trip meter/maintenance required information screen.
Some pop-up displays can be set on/off. (→P. 546)
■ Liquid crystal display
Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenomenon is characteristic
of liquid crystal displays, and there is no problem continuing to use the display.
■ Clock settings
If the screen shown to the right is displayed
when trying to change the time display method
through
(→P. 100) on the multi-infor-
mation display, the system may be malfunctioning.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer.
■ Customization
The meter display can be customized on the multi-information display.
(Customizable features: →P. 545)
WARNING
■ The information display at low temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information
display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may respond
slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
For example, there is a lag between the driver’s shifting and the new gear number
appearing on the display. This lag could cause the driver to downshift again, causing
rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in death or
injury.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
2. Instrument cluster
91
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components
● Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indicates
the maximum engine speed.
● The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is in the red
zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check the
engine after it has cooled completely. (→P. 509)
2
Instrument cluster
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
92
2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters (GS F)
If the drive mode is changed, some of the meter displays and the gauge layout
will be changed.

Normal mode/CUSTOMIZED mode*

Eco drive mode
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
2. Instrument cluster

93
SPORT S mode*
2
SPORT S+ mode*
The units used on the meters may differ depending on the target region.
*: The illustrations show the default meter display. The meter display can be changed on
the settings screen of the multi-information display.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Instrument cluster

94
2. Instrument cluster
1
Multi-information display
Presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data (→P. 108)
Displays warning messages in case of a malfunction (→P. 441)
2
Fuel gauge
3
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature. If the engine coolant temperature gauge
indicator ( ) enters the red zone, a buzzer will sound and the indicator will turn red
and start flashing. Also, a warning message will be displayed.
4
Engine oil temperature gauge
Displays the engine oil temperature. If the engine oil temperature gauge indicator
( ) enters the red zone, the indicator will turn red and start flashing.
5
Outside temperature
Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40°F (-40°C) to 122°F
(50°C). Low outside temperature indicator comes on when the ambient temperature
is 37°F (3°C) or lower.
6
Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute
7
Digital speedometer
8
Analog speedometer
9
Shift position and gear position
Displays the selected shift position or selected shift range (→P. 202)
10
Odometer and trip meter display
Odometer:
Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven
Trip meter:
Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset. Trip
meters “A” and “B” can be used to record and display different distances independently.
11
Eco driving meter
Displays the vehicle acceleration. The more rapidly the vehicle is accelerated, the
lower the number of blue segments displayed, indicating that your driving is less ecofriendly. This meter is designed as a guideline to show the eco-friendliness of your
driving.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
2. Instrument cluster
95
■ Speed indicator
When the vehicle reaches the set
speed, the displayed unit of speed
measure will turn yellow.
The indicators will be displayed in
yellow (corresponding to a speed set
by a user) or red (fixed at 100 mph
[160 km/h])*.
This setting can be enabled on the
multi-information display.
*: Always observe the legal speed limit when driving on public roads.
When the shift lever is in M, an indicator on the tachometer will be displayed in 3 steps. When the 3rd
level indicator is displayed, the indicator will flash and a buzzer will
sound to notify you of shift-up timing.

SPORT S mode
screen

SPORT S+ mode
screen
The indicator may be displayed when
downshifting, depending on the
engine speed.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Instrument cluster
■ Rev indicator (SPORT S mode screen/SPORT S+ mode screen)
2
96
2. Instrument cluster
■ Rev peak (Normal mode screen/SPORT S mode screen)
The engine speed reaches or
exceeds 3600 rpm, an afterimage
of the tachometer will be displayed
at the highest engine speed for
approximately 1 second.
Changing the display
■ Odometer/Trip meter
Switches between odometer and
trip meter displays. When the trip
meter is displayed, pressing and
holding the button will reset the trip
meter.
■ Meter display and layout
If the drive mode is changed, some
of the meter displays and the gauge
layout will be changed.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
2. Instrument cluster
97
Instrument panel light control
The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.
1
Darker
2
Brighter
2
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Welcome illumination of the analog speedometer
● When the driver’s door is opened, the analog speedometer will illuminate.
Then, when the driver’s door is closed, the analog speedometer will illuminate and go
off (pulsate) 3 times.
● In the following situations, the analog speedometer will not pulsate even though the
driver’s door is opened and closed:
• Within 60 seconds after the analog meter pulsation completes
• Within 60 seconds of turning the engine switch off
■ Variable red zone
To help protect the engine, the engine speed is
controlled by changing the starting position of
the tachometer’s red zone depending on the
engine coolant temperature within a range from
3700 rpm to 7300 rpm.
Before driving under extremely high load conditions, make sure to sufficiently warm up the
engine.
■ Eco driving meter
● The number of blue segments displayed on the eco driving meter decreases/increases
depending on the vehicle acceleration. Use this meter as a guideline when you wish to
drive in an eco-friendly manner that reduces fuel consumption.
However, on a downward grade where the vehicle can accelerate without the accelerator pedal being depressed, the eco driving meter may not display the eco-driving
state correctly.
● When the shift lever is moved to P, N or R, the segments will turn gray and the eco driving meter will not operate.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Instrument cluster
■ The meters and display illuminate when
98
2. Instrument cluster
■ Instrument panel brightness adjustment
The instrument panel brightness levels when the tail lights are on and off can be adjusted
individually. However, when the surroundings are bright (daytime, etc.), turning on the tail
lights will not change the instrument panel brightness. At this time, any adjustments made
to the instrument panel brightness levels will be applied to both settings at once.
■ Dimming the analog speedometer lighting
The analog speedometer lighting will be dimmed when the ambient light is bright, such
as during the daytime, and SPORT S or SPORT S+ mode screen is selected.
■ Outside temperature display
● In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or the
display may take longer than normal to change.
• When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 12 mph [20 km/h])
• When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a
garage, tunnel, etc.)
● When “--” or “E” is displayed, the system may be malfunctioning.
Take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer.
■ Pop-up display
In some situations, such as when a switch operation is performed, a pop-up display will
be temporarily displayed on the multi-information display.
Some pop-up displays can be set on/off. (→P. 548)
■ Liquid crystal display
Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenomenon is characteristic
of liquid crystal displays, and there is no problem continuing to use the display.
■ Customization
The meter display can be customized on the multi-information display.
(Customizable features: →P. 545)
WARNING
■ The information display at low temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information
display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may respond
slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
For example, there is a lag between the driver’s shifting and the new gear number
appearing on the display. This lag could cause the driver to downshift again, causing
rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in death or
injury.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
2. Instrument cluster
99
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components
● Do not let the indicator of the tachometer enter the red zone, as it represents the
engine speed range which exceeds the maximum safe engine speed.
● In the following situations, the engine may be overheating. In this case, immediately
stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely.
(→P. 509)
• The engine coolant temperature gauge indicator ( ) is in the red zone and flashing.
• The engine oil temperature gauge indicator ( ) is in the red zone and flashing.
2
Instrument cluster
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
100
2. Instrument cluster
Multi-information display (GS350/GS300)
Display contents
The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data.
● Menu icons

Except F SPORT models

F SPORT models
Displays the following information when an icon is selected. (→P. 102)
Some of the information may be displayed automatically depending on the situation.
Drive information
Select to display various drive data. (→P. 102)
Navigation system-linked display (if equipped)
Select to display the following navigation system-linked information.
• Route guidance
• Compass display (north-up display/heading-up display)
Audio system-linked display
Select to enable selection of an audio source or track on the meter using the
meter control switches.
Driving assist system information
Select to display the cruise control or dynamic radar cruise control with fullspeed range/LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) (if equipped) information, when the
system is used. (→P. 249, 258, 270)
Warning message display
Select to display warning messages and measures to be taken if a malfunction is
detected. (→P. 441)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
2. Instrument cluster
101
Settings display
Select to change the meter display settings. (→P. 546)
Operating the meter control switches
The multi-information display is operated using the meter control switches.
1
: Switch menu
: Change displayed content, scroll up/down the
screen and move the cursor up/down
Instrument cluster
2
2
Press: Enter/Set
Press and hold: Reset
3
Return to the previous screen
4
Press: Displays the screen registered to
When no screen has been registered, the drive information screen will be displayed.
Press and hold: Registers the currently displayed screen to
(→P. 546)
When the confirmation screen is displayed, select yes to register the screen. If the
selected screen cannot be registered, a registration failure message will be shown.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
102
2. Instrument cluster
Drive information
Items displayed can be switched by pressing
switches to select
and pressing
or
or
of the meter control
.
■ Current fuel consumption*1
Displays the current rate of fuel consumption
■ Average fuel economy (after reset*2/after start/after refuel)*1
Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was reset, the
engine was started, and the vehicle was refueled, respectively
Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.
■ Average speed (after reset*2/after start)*1
Displays the average vehicle speed since the function was reset and the
engine was started, respectively
■ Elapsed time (after reset*2/after start)*1
Displays the elapsed time since the function was reset and the engine was
started, respectively
■ Distance (range/after start)*1
Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity
of fuel remaining and the distance driven after the engine was started respectively.
• This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result,
the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.
• When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may not be
updated.
When refueling, turn the engine switch off. If the vehicle is refueled without turning
the engine switch off, the display may not be updated.
■ Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display
→P. 85
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
2. Instrument cluster
103
■ Boost meter/oil temperature gauge/oil pressure gauge (GS300)
The boost pressure, engine oil temperature and oil pressure can be displayed.
1
Boost meter
When the boost pressure reaches
15 psi (100 kPa) or higher, the color
changes to amber.
2
Oil temperature gauge
3
Oil pressure gauge
If the oil pressure drops, the buzzer sounds and a warning message is displayed.
(→P. 453)
Actual vehicle conditions may differ from the displayed information depending on
road conditions, temperature, vehicle speed and other factors.
Use this information as reference.
■ G-forces
Displays lateral G-forces on the vehicle
Also displays, around the periphery of the G-force display, the left and right
steering amount, accelerator pedal input, and brake fluid pressure
1
Acceleration G-force on the
vehicle
2
Current G-force value (analyzed
value of front/rear and left/right
G-forces)
3
Accelerator pedal input
4
Brake fluid pressure
5
Record of the maximum G-forces
6
Steering amount
Actual vehicle conditions may differ from the displayed information depending on
road conditions, temperature, vehicle speed and other factors.
Use this information as reference.
● Resetting the record of maximum G-forces
Press and hold
to reset the record.
● Peak hold function (F SPORT models)
If lateral G-forces of 0.5 G or greater are generated, the G-force value display will turn amber and be held for 2 seconds.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
2
Instrument cluster
When the engine oil temperature
reaches 284°F (140°C) or higher,
the display flashes.
104
2. Instrument cluster
■ Tire inflation pressure
Displays inflation pressure of each tire.
The inflation pressure of the compact spare tire will not be displayed.
■ LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) vehicle sway warning (if equipped)
→P. 249
■ Display off
A blank screen is displayed
* : Displayed when the item is set in “Drive Info 1”, “Drive Info 2” or “Drive Info 3”.
1
(→P. 546)
*2: The function can be reset by pressing the
of the meter control switches for longer
than 1 second when the item to reset is displayed.
If there is more than one item that can be reset, the item selection screen will appear.
Settings display
The settings of the following items can be changed, refer to P. 545
For functions that can be enabled or disabled, the function switches between on and
off each time is pressed.
■
■
(Lane-Keeping Assist) (if equipped)
(Pre-Collision System) (if equipped)
(→P. 249)
(→P. 238)
■
(Adaptive Front-lighting System) (if equipped)
(→P. 217)
■
(Blind Spot Monitor) (if equipped)
(→P. 278)
■
Select to set the display mode of the clock.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
2. Instrument cluster
105
■
● Scheduled Maintenance
(→P. 366)
(→P. 384)
(→P. 395)
● Oil Maintenance
● TPMS (Tire pressure warning system)
■
● Language
Select to change the language on the display.
● Units
2
Select to change the unit of measure.
Select to activate/deactivate the Eco Driving Indicator Light.
●
switch
Displays a procedure to register a desired screen to
.
You can register 1 screen as a shortcut, which can be displayed by pressing
.
● Drive information 1/2/3
Select to select up to 2 items that will be displayed on a Drive information screen,
up to 3 Drive information screens can be set.
● Pop-up display
Select to set the following pop-up displays, which may appear in some situations,
on/off.
• Route guidance of the navigation system-linked display (if equipped)
• Incoming call display of the hands-free phone system
• Instrument panel brightness adjustment display
● Accent color (except F SPORT models)
Select to change the accent colors on the screen, such as the cursor color.
● Needle (F SPORT models)
Select to change the needle color for the tachometer.
● Rev indicator (F SPORT models)
Select to set the rev indicator on/off.
When set to on, proceed to set the engine speed at which the rev indicator will be
displayed.
Selectable engine speed range:
GS350: 2000 rpm to 6800 rpm
GS300: 2000 rpm to 6100 rpm
● Rev peak (F SPORT models)
Select to set the rev peak on/off.
● Default settings
Registered or changed meter settings will be deleted or returned to their default
setting.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Instrument cluster
● Eco Driving Indicator Light
106
2. Instrument cluster
■ G-force display
● The G-force values may not be zero even when the vehicle is parked, such as when it is
parked on an incline.
● Depending on the vehicle usage conditions, the brake fluid pressure display may not
reach its maximum reading even though the brake pedal is fully depressed.
● If a battery terminal is disconnected and reconnected, the steering amount display may
be disabled temporarily. After driving the vehicle for a while, the display will be enabled.
■ System check display
After turning the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode, opening image is displayed
while system operation is checked. When the system check is complete, the normal
screen will return.
■ Suspension of the settings display
In the following situations, the settings display using the meter control switches will be
suspended.
● When a warning message appears on the multi-information display
● When the vehicle begins to move
■ Tire inflation pressure
● It may take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after the engine switch is
turned to IGNITION ON mode. It may also take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after inflation pressure has been adjusted.
● “---” may be displayed if the tire information cannot be determined due to unfavorable
radio wave conditions.
● Tire inflation pressure changes with temperature. The displayed values may also be different from the values measured using a tire pressure gauge.
■ When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals
The drive information will be reset.
■ Liquid crystal display
→P. 90
WARNING
■ Caution for use while driving
● When operating the multi-information display while driving, pay extra attention to the
safety of the area around the vehicle.
● Do not look continuously at the multi-information display while driving as you may fail
to see pedestrians, objects on the road, etc. ahead of the vehicle.
■ Cautions during setting up the display
As the engine needs to be operating during setting up the display, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage,
exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the
vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
2. Instrument cluster
107
NOTICE
■ During setting up the display
To prevent battery discharge, ensure that the engine is operating while setting up the
display features.
2
Instrument cluster
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
108
2. Instrument cluster
Multi-information display (GS F)
Display content
The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data.
● Menu icons
Displays the following information
when an icon is selected. (→P. 109)
Some of the information may be displayed automatically depending on
the situation.
Drive information
Select to display various drive data. (→P. 109)
“F” content
Select to display the lap timer, G-force, torque distribution and other useful
functions for sporty driving. (→P. 111)
Navigation system-linked display (if equipped)
Select to display the following navigation system-linked information.
• Route guidance
• Compass display (north-up display/heading-up display)
Audio system-linked display
Select to enable selection of an audio source or track on the meter using the
meter control switches.
Driving assist system information
Select to display the cruise control or dynamic radar cruise control with fullspeed range/LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) (if equipped) information, when the
system is used. (→P. 249, 258, 270)
Warning message display
Select to display warning messages and measures to be taken if a malfunction is
detected. (→P. 441)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
2. Instrument cluster
109
Settings display
Select to change the meter display settings. (→P. 548)
Operating the meter control switches
The multi-information display is operated using the meter control switches.
1
: Switch menu
: Change displayed content, scroll up/down the
screen and move the cursor up/down
Instrument cluster
2
2
Press: Enter/Set
Press and hold: Reset
3
Return to the previous screen
4
Press: Displays the screen registered to
When no screen has been registered, the drive information screen will be displayed.
Press and hold: Registers the currently displayed screen to
(→P. 548)
When the confirmation screen is displayed, select yes to register the screen. If the
selected screen cannot be registered, a registration failure message will be shown.
Drive information
Items displayed can be switched by pressing
switches to select
and pressing
or
or
of the meter control
.
■ Current fuel consumption*1
Displays the current rate of fuel consumption
■ Average fuel economy (after reset*2/after start/after refuel)*1
Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was reset, the
engine was started, and the vehicle was refueled, respectively
Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
110
2. Instrument cluster
■ Average speed (after reset*2/after start)*1
Displays the average vehicle speed since the function was reset and the
engine was started, respectively
■ Elapsed time (after reset*2/after start)*1
Displays the elapsed time since the function was reset and the engine was
started, respectively
■ Distance (range/after start)*1
Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity
of fuel remaining and the distance driven after the engine was started respectively.
• This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result,
the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.
• When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may not be
updated.
When refueling, turn the engine switch off. If the vehicle is refueled without turning
the engine switch off, the display may not be updated.
■ Tire inflation pressure
Displays inflation pressure of each tire.
The inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be displayed.
■ Gear positions
Displays the current gear position when the shift lever is in D or M.
■ LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) vehicle sway warning (if equipped)
→P. 249
■ Display off
A blank screen is displayed
* : Displayed when the item is set in “Drive Info 1”, “Drive Info 2” or “Drive Info 3”.
1
(→P. 548)
*
2:
The function can be reset by pressing the of the meter control switches for longer
than 1 second when the item to reset is displayed.
If there is more than one item that can be reset, the item selection screen will appear.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
2. Instrument cluster
111
“F” content
■ Lap timer
Measures and displays current lap time and previous lap times
● Reading the display
Measured lap times since the timer was last reset are displayed as follows:
• Multi-information display
1
Total lap time
2
Past lap times
3
Multi-information display
2
4
Current lap time
5
Most recent lap time
Lap time for the most recently
completed lap.
Main meter
● Operating the meter control switches
1
Press: Start/stop lap timer
Press and hold: Reset
2
: Mark off one lap
: Change displayed
content
While a lap time is being measured, the display can be changed
to show the following content:
• Torque distribution
• G-force
• Tire pressure
● Resetting/saving measured lap times
After stopping the lap timer, press and hold
.
When a confirmation screen is displayed, select to reset/save the measured lap times.
When saved, the lap time data will be displayed on the history screen. (→P. 112)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Instrument cluster
Fastest lap (marked with a star)
• Main meter
112
2. Instrument cluster
■ History (Lap timer)
Displays the saved lap times
● Reading the display
History top screen
Past lap screen
• History top screen
1
Total lap time
2
Fastest lap time
• Past lap screen
3
Page
4
Past lap times (20 most recent lap times)
Press
/
to scroll up and down the screen.
● Switching the display
To display the past lap screen, press
.
To return to the history top screen, press
● Deleting history
.
When the history top screen is displayed, press and hold
to display a
confirmation screen. To delete the history, follow the instructions displayed
on the screen.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
2. Instrument cluster
113
■ Torque distribution
Displays the distribution of driving torque between the left and right rear
wheels
● Reading the display
To switch to advanced display, press
Multi-information display
2
Main meter
.
To return to normal display, press
.
● Peak hold function (advanced display only)
If the difference in torque of 4
segments or more is applied to
the left or right rear wheel, a yellow outline will be displayed for
the highest segment that was
reached, for a certain amount of
time.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Instrument cluster
• Normal display
Displays the amount of drive
torque applied to the left and
right rear wheels through bars
that fluctuate in length on the
multi-information display
• Advanced display
Displays the difference in
torque applied to the left and
right rear wheels through displayed segments on the main
meter in addition to the bar
display.
The greater the number of
segments displayed, the
greater the difference in
torque is.
● Switching the display
114
2. Instrument cluster
■ G-force
Displays lateral G-forces on the vehicle
Also displays, around the periphery of the G-force display, the left and right
steering amount, accelerator pedal input, and brake fluid pressure
● Reading the display
• Normal display
Displays the following on the multi-information display
1
Acceleration G-force on the
vehicle
2
Current G-force value (analyzed value of front/rear and
left/right G-forces)
3
Accelerator pedal input
4
Brake fluid pressure
5
Steering amount
• Advanced display
Displays the following on the main meter and multi-information display
1
Acceleration G-force on the
vehicle
2
Record of the maximum Gforces
3
Value of the maximum Gforce since display reset (analyzed value of front/rear and
left/right G-forces)
4
Accelerator pedal input
5
Brake fluid pressure
6
Steering amount
7
G-force direction
8
Current G-force value (analyzed value of front/rear and left/right Gforces)
Multi-information display
Main meter
Actual vehicle conditions may differ from the displayed information depending on
road conditions, temperature, vehicle speed and other factors.
Use this information as reference.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
2. Instrument cluster
115
● Switching the display
To switch to advanced display, press
.
To return to normal display, press
.
● Resetting the record of maximum G-forces
With the record of maximum G-forces displayed, press and hold
reset the display.
● Peak hold function (advanced display only)
to
■ Tire inflation pressure
Displays the tire inflation pressure (→P. 394)
Unlike the tire pressure display on the drive information menu, the tire inflation
pressure display of the “F” content menu can be displayed while lap time is being
measured.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
2
Instrument cluster
If lateral G-forces of 0.5 G or
greater are generated, the Gforce value displayed on the main
meter will turn yellow and be held
for 3 seconds.
116
2. Instrument cluster
Settings display
The settings of the following items can be changed, refer to P. 545
For functions that can be enabled or disabled, the function switches between on and
off each time is pressed.
(Lane-Keeping Assist) (if equipped)
■
(Pre-Collision System) (if equipped)
■
(Blind Spot Monitor) (if equipped)
■
(→P. 249)
(→P. 238)
(→P. 278)
(→P. 95)
■
• Display of the indicator can be turned on or off.
• The speed at which the indicator is displayed can be set.
Selectable speed range:
30 mph to 100 mph (50 km/h to 160 km/h)*
*: Always observe the legal speed limit when driving on public roads.
■
● Scheduled Maintenance
● TPMS (Tire pressure warning system) (if equipped)
(→P. 366)
(→P. 395)
■
● Language
Select to change the language on the display.
● Units
Select to change the unit of measure.
● Eco Driving Indicator Light
Select to activate/deactivate the Eco Driving Indicator Light
●
switch
Displays a procedure to register a desired screen to
.
You can register 1 screen as a shortcut, which can be displayed by pressing
.
● Drive information 1/2/3
Select to select up to 2 items that will be displayed on a Drive information screen,
up to 3 Drive information screens can be set.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
2. Instrument cluster
117
● Pop-up display
Select to set the following pop-up displays, which may appear in some situations,
on/off.
• Route guidance of the navigation system-linked display (if equipped)
• Incoming call display of the hands-free phone system
• Instrument panel brightness adjustment display
• TVD control mode change display
● Rev indicator
Select to set the rev indicator on/off.
When set to on, proceed to set the engine speed at which the rev indicator will be
displayed.
● Rev peak
2
Select to set the rev peak on/off.
The meter display when in SPORT S, SPORT S+ or customized mode can be
selected and set from the Eco drive mode screen*/normal mode screen*/SPORT
S mode screen/SPORT S+ mode screen.
*: Only customized mode can be selected.
● Default settings
Registered or changed meter settings will be deleted or returned to their default
setting.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Instrument cluster
● Drive gauges
118
2. Instrument cluster
■ Start-up display
When the engine is started, the name of the vehicle is displayed on the multi-information
display.
While the start-up display is being displayed, the meter display cannot be changed even
if the drive mode is changed. When the start-up display is finished, the meter display for
the currently selected mode will be displayed.
■ Torque distribution display
Torque distribution may not be displayed correctly in some cases, such as when the vehicle passes over road expansion joints.
■ G-force display
● The G-force values may not be zero even when the vehicle is parked, such as when it is
parked on an incline.
● The steering amount, accelerator pedal input, and brake fluid pressure displays are disabled until the engine has warmed up (the variable red zone of the tachometer has
retracted to 7300 rpm).
After the engine has warmed up, these displays will be enabled.
● Depending on the vehicle usage conditions, the brake fluid pressure display may not
reach its maximum reading even though the brake pedal is fully depressed.
● If a battery terminal is disconnected and reconnected, the steering amount display may
be disabled temporarily. After driving the vehicle for a while, the display will be enabled.
■ Suspension of the settings display
In the following situations, operation of the settings display will be temporarily suspended.
● When a warning message appears on the multi-information display
● When the vehicle begins to move
■ Tire inflation pressure
● It may take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after the engine switch is
turned to IGNITION ON mode. It may also take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after inflation pressure has been adjusted.
● “---” may be displayed if the tire position information cannot be determined due to
unfavorable radio wave conditions.
● Tire inflation pressure changes with temperature. The displayed values may also be different from the values measured using a tire pressure gauge.
■ When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals
The following information data will be reset:
● Lap timer: Measured lap times, history
● G-force: Record of the maximum G-forces
■ Using the lap timer
If the engine is stopped while a lap is being timed, the lap timer will stop and the lap time
up to that point will be recorded.
■ Liquid crystal display
→P. 98
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
2. Instrument cluster
119
WARNING
■ Caution for use while driving
● When operating the multi-information display while driving, pay extra attention to the
safety of the area around the vehicle.
● Do not look continuously at the multi-information display while driving as you may fail
to see pedestrians, objects on the road, etc. ahead of the vehicle.
■ Cautions during setting up the display
As the engine needs to be running during setting up the display, ensure that the vehicle
is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage,
exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the
vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
■ During setting up the display
To prevent battery discharge, ensure that the engine is running while setting up the display features.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Instrument cluster
NOTICE
2
120
2. Instrument cluster
Head-up display∗
Summary of functions
The head-up display can be used to project vehicle speed and other information
onto the windshield.
1
Head-up display
Display brightness will change automatically according to the brightness of the
surrounding area.
2
“HUD” button
3
Display
switch
brightness
adjustment
Display brightness can be adjusted to
the desired level.
4
Display position adjustment switch
5
“DISP” button
∗: If equipped
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
2. Instrument cluster
121
Head-up display contents
● Vehicle speed
● Tachometer
● Shift position and shift range
Displays the selected shift position or selected shift range
● Eco Driving Indicator (GS350/GS300)
● Head-up rev indicator (GS F)
(→P. 202)
(→P. 124)
(→P. 124)
● Audio display*
Displays audio information for approximately 3 seconds when the audio system is
operated
(→P. 124)
When approaching an intersection while the navigation system is giving route guidance, an arrow will automatically be displayed to indicate the direction of travel.
● Lexus Enform (if equipped)
Displays “LEXUS Enform” for approximately 3 seconds when LEXUS App Suite is
operated
● Lane departure warning display (LKA [Lane-Keeping Assist]) (if equipped)
(→P. 442)
● Approach warning display (dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed
range) (if equipped)
(→P. 442)
● Pre-collision warning message (PCS [Pre-Collision System])
(if equipped)
(→P. 442)
● Speed limit display (vehicles with navigation system)
(→P. 125)
*: The default setting is off
Switching the head-up display
■ “HUD” button
Pressing the switch turns the headup display on/off and changes the
vehicle speed display units as follows:

U.S.A.
OFF → ON (MPH) →
ON (km/h) → OFF

Canada
OFF → ON (km/h) → ON (MPH) → OFF
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Instrument cluster
● Route guidance display (vehicles with navigation system)
2
122
2. Instrument cluster
■ “DISP” button
Pressing the button changes the display items (except vehicle speed).

GS350/GS300

GS F
1
Off
1
Off
2
Eco Driving Indicator
2
Tachometer
3
Tachometer
3
Head-up rev indicator*
When any of the following displays are operating, the display items do not
change (except vehicle speed): Audio display/Route guidance display (vehicles with navigation system)/Lexus Enform (if equipped)/Lane departure
warning display (if equipped)/Approach warning display (if equipped)/Precollision warning message (if equipped)/Speed limit display (vehicles with
navigation system).
*: Displayed when the drive gauges displays the SPORT mode screen and the shift lever
in M
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
2. Instrument cluster
123
Making the display easier to see
■ Adjusting the display position
1
Higher
2
Lower
2
The brightness of the display is automatically adjusted in accordance with the
brightness of the surrounding environment. However, the brightness can also
be manually adjusted in 9 stages.
1
Brighter
2
Darker
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Instrument cluster
■ Setting the brightness
124
2. Instrument cluster
Eco Driving Indicator (GS350/GS300)
Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display
1
Suggests the Zone of Eco driving with
current Eco driving ratio based on
acceleration.
2
Eco driving ratio based on acceleration
If the acceleration exceeds the Zone of
Eco driving, the right side of the Eco
Driving Indicator Zone Display will illuminate.
3
Zone of Eco driving
Eco Driving Indicator will not operate under the following conditions:
● The shift lever is in any position other than D.
● A paddle shift switch is operated.
● Neither normal mode nor Eco drive mode is selected. (→P. 273)
● The vehicle speed is approximately 80 mph (130 km/h) or higher.
Head-up rev indicator (GS F)
While the drive gauges displays the
SPORT mode screen with the shift
lever in M, the display changes to one
of 3 levels in response to the engine
speed, notifying you of when to shift up.
This may also be displayed when shifting
down as well, depending on the engine
speed.
Route guidance display (vehicles with navigation system)
When the vehicle approaches an intersection, the direction the vehicle should
go is guided by the arrow.
When the vehicle approaches an intersection, the route guidance will start
and the distance* to the intersection
will also be displayed.
*: The distance decreases in increments of
164 ft. (50 m) and the distance indication will disappear when the vehicle
passes through the intersection.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
2. Instrument cluster
125
Speed limit display (vehicles with navigation system)
Displays the speed limit for the current
road.
2
Display of the following screens can be switched on or off.
● Audio display
● Route guidance display (vehicles with navigation system)
■ Changing the settings
1
Continue holding the “DISP” button until the screen changes, and
repeat the process until the setting you want to change is displayed.
Customization can be performed
when the head-up display is on and
the vehicle is traveling at less than
5 mph (8 km/h).
2
Press the “DISP” button to switch between on and off.
On and off will be switched between each time the button is pressed.
If the button is left alone without being operated for a short time, setting will be finished automatically.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Instrument cluster
Display customization
126
2. Instrument cluster
■ Head-up display
● The head-up display may seem dark and hard to see when viewed through sunglasses,
especially polarized sunglasses.
Adjust the brightness of the head-up display or remove your sunglasses.
● When the head-up display is turned off, it will remain off even if the engine switch is
turned to IGNITION ON mode after the engine switch has been turned off.
● The startup image will be displayed on the head-up display after the engine switch has
been turned to IGNITION ON mode while the head-up display switch is set to on.
■ Head-up rev indicator
● The head-up display is linked to the rev indicator in the meter.
● Whether or not to display the rev indicator in the head-up display, as well as display timing, can be changed through the settings for the rev indicator in the meter. (→P. 117)
■ When the battery is disconnected
The customize settings of the head-up display will be reset.
■ Head-up display automatic position adjustment
If the display position is recorded into memory, the head-up display will be automatically
adjusted to the desired position. (→P. 160)
WARNING
■ Before using the head-up display
Check that the position and brightness of the head-up display image does not interfere
with safe driving. Incorrect adjustment of the image’s position or brightness may
obstruct the driver’s view and lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to components
● Do not place any drinks near the head-up dis-
play projector. If the projector gets wet, electrical malfunctions may result.
● Do not place anything on or put stickers onto
the head-up display projector.
Doing so could interrupt head-up display
indications.
● Do not touch the inside of the head-up display projector or thrust sharp edges or the
like into the projector.
Doing so could cause mechanical malfunctions.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
2. Instrument cluster
127
Fuel consumption information
Fuel consumption information can be displayed on the Remote Touch screen.
Vehicles with 12.3-inch display: The fuel consumption information can be displayed and operated on the side display.
Remote Touch screen
2
“MENU” button
3
Remote Touch knob
4
“ENTER” buttons
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
2
Instrument cluster
1
128
2. Instrument cluster
Fuel consumption
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select
on the “Menu”
screen, and then select “Fuel Consumption”.
■ Trip information
If the “Past Record” screen is displayed, select “Trip Information”.
1
Resetting the consumption data
2
Fuel consumption in the past 15
minutes
3
Current fuel consumption
4
Average vehicle speed since the
engine was started.
5
Elapsed time since the engine
was started.
6
Cruising range (→P. 129)
Average fuel consumption for the past 15 minutes is divided by color into past
averages and averages attained since the engine switch was last turned to IGNITION ON mode. Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.
The image is an example only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
2. Instrument cluster
129
■ Past record
If the “Trip Information” screen is displayed, select “Past Record”.
1
Resetting the past record data
2
Best recorded fuel economy
3
Average fuel consumption
4
Previous fuel consumption record
5
Updating the average fuel consumption data
■ Updating the past record data
Update the average fuel consumption by selecting “Update” to measure the current fuel
consumption again.
■ Resetting the data
The fuel consumption data can be deleted by selecting “Clear”.
■ Cruising range
Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel
remaining.
This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption.
As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
2
Instrument cluster
The average fuel consumption history is divided by color into past
averages and the average fuel consumption since the last reset. Use the
displayed average fuel consumption
as a reference.
The image is an example only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.
130
2. Instrument cluster
Using the side display (vehicles with 12.3-inch display)
Vehicle information can be displayed on the side display (→P. 307), then select
or
to select the desired screen.

Fuel consumption
Displays the average fuel consumption
for the past 10 minutes in 1 minute intervals, as well as the cruising range.

Past record
Displays the average fuel consumption
and highest fuel consumption.

Trip information
Displays the cruising range, average
fuel consumption and the amount of
time elapsed since the engine was
started.
The image is an example only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
2. Instrument cluster
131
2
Instrument cluster
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
132
2. Instrument cluster
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
131
Operation of
each component
3
3-1. Key information
Keys .................................................. 132
3-2. Opening, closing and locking
the doors and trunk
Doors ................................................137
Trunk ................................................ 143
Smart access system
with push-button start ............ 150
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Front seats...................................... 158
Driving position memory......... 160
Head restraints ............................ 165
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel
and mirrors
Steering wheel ............................. 168
Inside rear view mirror ............. 169
Outside rear view mirrors......... 171
3-5. Opening, closing the windows
and moon roof
Power windows ............................175
Moon roof...................................... 178
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
132
3-1. Key information
Keys
The keys
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.
Electronic keys
1
• Operating the smart access system
with push-button start (→P. 150)
• Operating the wireless remote control function
2
Mechanical keys
3
Key number plate
4
Card key (electronic key) (if
equipped)
Operating the smart access system with
push-button start (→P. 150)
Wireless remote control
1
Locks all the doors (→P. 137)
2
Unlocks all the doors
3
Opens the windows and moon roof
(→P. 137)*
4
Opens the trunk (→P. 144)
5
Sounds the alarm (→P. 134)
*: This setting must be customized at your
Lexus dealer.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
3-1. Key information
133
Using the mechanical key
To take out the mechanical key, push
the release button and take the key out.
The mechanical key can only be
inserted in one direction, as the key only
has grooves on one side. If the key cannot be inserted in a lock cylinder, turn it
over and re-attempt to insert it.
After using the mechanical key, store it
in the electronic key. Carry the mechanical key together with the electronic key.
If the electronic key battery is depleted
or the entry function does not operate
properly, you will need the mechanical
key. (→P. 501)
● The card key is not waterproof.
● The mechanical key that is stored inside the card key should be used only if a problem
arises, such as when the card key does not operate properly.
● If it is difficult to take out the mechanical key, push down the lock release button using a
pen tip etc. If it is still difficult to pull it out, use a coin etc.
● To store the mechanical key in the card key,
insert it while pressing the lock release button.
● If the battery cover is not installed and the bat-
tery falls out or if the battery was removed
because the key got wet, reinstall the battery
with the positive terminal facing the Lexus
emblem.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Operation of each component
■ Card key (if equipped)
3
134
3-1. Key information
■ Panic mode
When
is pressed for longer than about
one second, an alarm will sound intermittently
and the vehicle lights will flash to deter any person from trying to break into or damage your
vehicle.
To stop the alarm, press any button on the electronic key.
■ When required to leave the vehicle’s key with a parking attendant
Turn the trunk opener main switch off, lock the glove box and armrest door as circumstances demand. (→P. 145, 331, 343)
Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with the electronic key only.
■ If you lose your mechanical keys
New genuine mechanical keys can be made by your Lexus dealer using the other
mechanical key and the key number stamped on your key number plate. Keep the plate
in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle.
■ When riding in an aircraft
When bringing an electronic key onto an aircraft, make sure you do not press any buttons on the electronic key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying an electronic
key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons are not likely to be pressed accidentally.
Pressing a button may cause the electronic key to emit radio waves that could interfere
with the operation of the aircraft.
■ Electronic key battery depletion
● The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years. (The card key battery life is about a year and a
half.)
● If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the engine stops.
(→P. 470)
● As the electronic key always receives radio waves, the battery will become depleted
even if the electronic key is not used. The following symptoms indicate that the electronic key battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (→P. 410)
• The smart access system with push-button start or the wireless remote control does
not operate.
• The detection area becomes smaller.
• The LED indicator on the key surface does not turn on.
● To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m) of the
following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field:
• TVs
• Personal computers
• Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers
• Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones
• Table lamps
• Induction cookers
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
3-1. Key information
135
■ Replacing the battery
→P. 410
■ Confirmation of the registered key number
The number of keys already registered to the vehicle can be confirmed. Ask your Lexus
dealer for details.
■ If a wrong key is used
The key cylinder rotates freely to isolate inside mechanism.
NOTICE
■ To prevent key damage
● Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them.
● Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for long periods of time.
● Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc.
● Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys close to
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Operation of each component
such materials.
● Do not disassemble the keys.
● Do not attach a sticker or anything else to the surface of the electronic key.
● Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as TVs, audio
systems and induction cookers.
● Do not place the keys near medical electrical equipment such as low-frequency therapy equipment or microwave therapy equipment, and do not receive medical attention with the keys on your person.
■ Carrying the electronic key on your person
Carry the electronic key 3.9 in. (10 cm) or more away from electric appliances that are
turned on. Radio waves emitted from electric appliances within 3.9 in. (10 cm) of the
electronic key may interfere with the key, causing the key to not function properly.
■ In case of a smart access system with push-button start malfunction or other keyrelated problems
Take your vehicle with all the electronic keys provided with your vehicle, including the
card key, to your Lexus dealer.
■ When an electronic key is lost
If the electronic key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Visit
your Lexus dealer immediately with all remaining electronic keys and the card key that
was provided with your vehicle.
3
136
3-1. Key information
NOTICE
■ Handling the card key
● Do not apply excess force when inserting the mechanical key into the card key. Doing
so may damage the card key.
● If the battery or card key terminals get wet, the battery may corrode.
If the key is dropped into water, or if drinking water etc. is spilled on the key, immediately remove the battery cover and wipe the battery and terminals. (To remove the
battery cover, lightly grasp and pull it.) If the battery is corroded, have your Lexus
dealer replace the battery.
● Do not crush the battery cover or use a screwdriver to remove the battery cover.
Forcibly removing the battery cover may bend or damage the key.
● If the battery cover is frequently removed, the battery cover may become loose.
● When installing the battery, make sure to check the direction of the battery.
Installing the battery in the wrong direction may cause the battery to deplete rapidly.
● The surface of the card key may be damaged, or its coating may peel off in the following situations:
• The card key is carried together with hard objects, such as coins and keys.
• The card key is scraped with a sharp object, such as the tip of a mechanical pencil.
• The surface of the card key is wiped with thinner or benzene.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
137
Doors
Unlocking and locking the doors from the outside
◆ Smart access system with push-button start
Carry the electronic key to enable this function.
Grip the driver’s door handle to
unlock the door. Grip the passenger’s door handle to unlock all the
doors.*
1
*: The door unlock settings can be changed. (→P. 545)
2
Touch the lock sensor (the indentation on the upper part of the door handle) to lock all the doors.
Check that the door is securely locked.
◆ Wireless remote control
Locks all the doors
1
Check that the door is securely
locked.
2
Unlocks all the doors
Pressing the button unlocks the
driver’s door. Pressing the button
again within 5 seconds unlocks the
other doors.
Press and hold to open the windows
and moon roof.*
*: This setting must be customized at your Lexus dealer.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
3
Operation of each component
Make sure to touch the sensor on the
back of the handle.
The doors cannot be unlocked for 3
seconds after the doors are locked.
138
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Operation signals
A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been
locked/unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice)
■ Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked, the
security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.
■ Welcome light illumination control
The side marker, parking, tail and license plate lights automatically turn on at night when
the doors are unlocked using the entry function or wireless remote control if the light
switch is in the “AUTO” position.
■ When the door cannot be locked by the lock sensor on the upper part of the door handle
If the door will not lock even when the topside
sensor area is touched, try touching both the
topside and underside sensor areas at the same
time.
■ Door lock buzzer
If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds
continuously for 5 seconds. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle
once more.
■ Setting the alarm
Locking the doors will set the alarm system. (→P. 74)
■ If the smart access system with push-button start or the wireless remote control does
not operate properly
● Use the mechanical key to lock and unlock the doors. (→P. 501)
● Replace the key battery with a new one if it is depleted. (→P. 410)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
139
Unlocking and locking the doors from the inside
◆ Door lock switches
1
Locks all the doors
2
Unlocks all the doors
◆ Inside lock buttons
Locks the door
2
Unlocks the door
The front doors can be opened by
pulling the inside handle even if the
lock buttons are in the lock position.
Locking the front doors from the outside without a key
1
Move the inside lock button to the lock position.
2
Close the door.
The door cannot be locked if the engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION
ON mode, or the electronic key is left inside the vehicle. However, the key may not be
detected correctly and the door may be locked.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Operation of each component
1
3
140
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Rear door child-protector lock
The door cannot be opened from inside
the vehicle when the lock is set.
1
Unlock
2
Lock
These locks can be set to prevent children from opening the rear doors. Push
down on each rear door switch to lock
both rear doors.
Automatic door locking and unlocking systems
The following functions can be set or canceled:
For instructions on customizing, refer to P. 545.
Function
Speed linked door locking function
Operation
All doors are automatically locked when
vehicle speed is approximately 12 mph
(20 km/h) or higher.
All doors are automatically locked when
Shift position linked door locking function shifting the shift lever to position other
than P.
Shift position linked door unlocking func- All doors are automatically unlocked
tion
when shifting the shift lever to P.
All the doors are unlocked when the
Driver’s door linked door unlocking func- driver’s door is opened within approxition
mately 45 seconds after turning the
engine switch off.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
141
■ Switching the door unlock function
It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks using the wireless remote control.
1 Turn the engine switch off.
When the indicator light on the key surface is not on, press and hold
,
or
for approximately 5 seconds while pressing and holding
.
The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below. (When
changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at least 5 seconds, and
repeat step 2 .)
2
Multi-information
display
Unlocking function
Beep
Holding a door handle unlocks Exterior: Beeps twice
all the doors.
Interior: Pings once
To prevent unintended triggering of the alarm, unlock the doors using the wireless
remote control and open and close a door once after the settings have been changed. (If
a door is not opened within 60 seconds after
is pressed, the doors will be locked
again and the alarm will automatically be set.)
In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (→P. 74)
■ Impact detection door lock release system
In the event that the vehicle is subject to a strong impact, all the doors are unlocked.
Depending on the force of the impact or the type of accident, however, the system may
not operate.
■ Using the mechanical key
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. (→P. 501)
■ Conditions affecting the operation of the smart access system with push-button start
or wireless remote control
→P. 152
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed.
(Customizable features: →P. 545)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
3
Operation of each component
Holding the driver’s door handle
unlocks only the driver’s door.
Exterior: Beeps 3 times
Holding a passenger’s door han- Interior: Pings once
dle unlocks all the doors.
142
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
WARNING
■ To prevent an accident
Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant throwing out of the vehicle, resulting in death or serious injury.
● Ensure that all doors are properly closed and locked.
● Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.
Be especially careful for the front doors, as the doors may be opened even if the
inside lock buttons are in locked position.
● Set the rear door child-protector locks when children are seated in the rear seats.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
143
Trunk
The trunk can be opened using the trunk opener, entry function or wireless
remote control.
If the vehicle is equipped with a power trunk opener and closer, the trunk can
be closed using the trunk closer.
Opening the trunk from inside the vehicle
Press the opener switch.
If the vehicle is equipped with a power
trunk opener and closer, the trunk lid
automatically opens fully.
3
◆ Smart access system with push-button start

GS350/GS300

GS F
While carrying the electronic key, press the button.
When all the doors are unlocked with the power door lock system, the trunk can
be opened without carrying the electronic key.
If the vehicle is equipped with a power trunk opener and closer, the trunk lid automatically opens fully.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Operation of each component
Opening the trunk from outside the vehicle
144
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
◆ Wireless remote control
Press and hold the switch.
If the vehicle is equipped with a
power trunk lid, the trunk lid automatically opens fully.
Trunk closer switch (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer)
Pressing the switch closes the trunk lid
automatically. (A buzzer sounds.)
Pressing the switch while the trunk lid is
closing opens the trunk lid again.
When closing the trunk
Using the trunk grip, lower the trunk
without applying force to the side and
push the trunk down from the outside
to close it.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
145
Luggage security system
The trunk opener switch can be temporarily disabled to protect luggage stored
in the trunk against theft.
Turn the main switch in the glove box off
to disable the trunk opener.
1
On
2
Off
The trunk lid cannot be opened even
with the wireless remote control or the
trunk release button.
3
■ Operation signals
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Operation of each component
Wireless remote control: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk has been unlocked.
■ Trunk light
The trunk light turns on when the trunk is opened.
■ Trunk easy closer
In the event that the trunk lid is left slightly open, the trunk easy closer will automatically
close it to the fully closed position.
■ Function to prevent the trunk being locked with the electronic key inside
● When all doors are being locked, closing the trunk lid with the electronic key left inside
the trunk will sound an alarm.
In this case, the trunk lid can be opened pressing the trunk release button on the trunk
lid.
● Even when the spare electronic key is put in the trunk with all the doors locked, the key
confinement prevention function can be activated so the trunk can be opened. In order
to prevent theft, take all electronic keys with you when leaving the vehicle.
● Even when the electronic key is put in the trunk with all the doors are locked, the key
may not be detected depending on the places and the surrounding radio wave conditions. In this case, the key confinement prevention function cannot be activated, causing
the doors to lock when the trunk is closed. Make sure to check where the key is before
closing the trunk.
● The key confinement prevention function cannot be activated if any one of the doors is
unlocked. In this case, open the trunk using the trunk opener.
■ Overload protection function (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer)
The trunk lid will not operate when excessive load is present on the top of the trunk lid.
■ Fall-down protection function (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer)
While the trunk lid is opening automatically, applying excessive force to it will stop the
opening operation to prevent the trunk lid from rapidly falling down.
■ Jam protection function (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer)
While the trunk lid is closing automatically, the trunk lid will stop closing and open if
something gets caught.
146
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Internal trunk release lever
The trunk lid can be opened by pulling the glowin-the-dark lever located on the inside of the
trunk lid to the side.
The lever will continue to glow for some time
after the trunk lid is closed.
■ If the smart access system with push-button start or the wireless remote control does
not operate properly
● Use the mechanical key to open the trunk. (→P. 501)
● Replace the key battery with a new one if it is depleted. (→P. 410)
■ When leaving a key to the vehicle with a parking attendant
→P. 134
■ Customization
The trunk unlocking operation can be changed. (Customizable features:→P. 545)
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ Before driving
● Make sure that the trunk lid is fully closed. If the trunk lid is not fully closed, it may
open unexpectedly while driving and hit near-by objects or luggage in the trunk may
be thrown out, causing an accident.
● Do not allow children to play in the trunk.
If a child is accidentally locked in the trunk, they could suffer from heat exhaustion,
suffocation or other injuries.
● Do not allow a child to open or close the trunk lid.
Doing so may cause the trunk lid to open unexpectedly, or cause the child’s hands,
head, or neck to be caught by the closing trunk lid.
■ Important points while driving
Never let anyone sit in the trunk. In the event of sudden braking or a collision, they are
susceptible to death or serious injury.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
147
WARNING
■ Using the trunk
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in serious injury.
● Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the trunk lid before opening it.
Failure to do so may cause the trunk lid to suddenly shut again after it is opened.
● When opening or closing the trunk lid, thoroughly check to make sure the surrounding area is safe.
● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the trunk is
about to open or close.
● Use caution when opening or closing the trunk lid in windy weather as it may move
abruptly in strong wind.
● The trunk lid may suddenly shut if it is not
● When closing the trunk lid, take extra care to
prevent your fingers etc. from being caught.
● When closing the trunk lid, make sure to
press it lightly on its outer surface. If the trunk
grip is used to fully close the trunk lid, it may
result in hands or arms being caught.
● Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Lexus parts to the trunk lid. Such
additional weight on the trunk lid may cause the lid to suddenly shut again after it is
opened.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
3
Operation of each component
opened fully. It is more difficult to open or
close the trunk lid on an incline than on a level
surface, so beware of the trunk lid unexpectedly opening or closing by itself. Make sure
that the trunk lid is fully open and secure
before using the trunk.
148
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
WARNING
■ Trunk easy closer
In the event that the trunk lid is left slightly open,
the trunk easy closer will automatically close it
to the fully closed position. It takes several seconds before the trunk easy closer begins to
operate. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else in the trunk lid, as this may cause
bone fractures or other serious injuries.
■ Power trunk opener and closer (If equipped)
Observe the following precautions when operating the power trunk opener and closer.
Failure to do so may cause serious injury.
● Check the safety of the surrounding area to make sure there are no obstacles or anything that could cause any of your belongings to get caught.
● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the trunk is
about to open or close.
● If the trunk closer switch is pressed while the trunk lid is opening during automatic
operation, the trunk lid stops opening. Take extra care when on an incline, as the trunk
lid may open or close suddenly.
● On an incline, the trunk lid may suddenly shut after it opens automatically. Make sure
the trunk lid is fully open and secure before using the trunk.
● In the following situations, the power trunk opener and closer may detect an abnormality and automatic operation may be stopped. In this case, the trunk lid has to be
operated manually. Take extra care in this situation, as the stopped trunk lid may suddenly shut, causing an accident.
• When the trunk lid contacts an obstacle
• When the battery voltage suddenly drops, such as when the engine switch is
turned to IGNITION ON mode or the engine is started during automatic operation
● Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Lexus parts to the trunk lid. The
power trunk opener and closer may not operate, causing itself to malfunction, or the
trunk lid may suddenly shut again after it is opened.
■ Jam protection function (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer)
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause serious injury.
● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the
trunk lid fully closes. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else in the trunk lid.
● The jam protection function may not work depending on the shape of the object that
is caught. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
149
NOTICE
■ To prevent trunk easy closer malfunctions
Do not apply force to the trunk lid while the trunk easy closer is operating.
■ To prevent damage to the power trunk opener and closer (vehicles with power trunk
opener and closer)
● Make sure that there is no luggage or snow on the trunk lid before operating the
power trunk opener and closer. In addition, make sure that there is no ice between the
trunk lid and frame that prevents movement of the trunk lid. Operating the power
trunk opener and closer when excessive load is present on the trunk lid may cause a
malfunction.
● Do not apply excessive force to the trunk lid while the power trunk opener and closer
is operating.
3
Operation of each component
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
150
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Smart access system with push-button start
The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the electronic
key (including the card key) on your person, for example in your pocket. The
driver should always carry the electronic key.
● Locks and unlocks the doors (→P. 137)
● Opens the trunk (→P. 143)
● Starts the engine (→P. 197)
■ Antenna location
1
2
3
4
Antennas outside the cabin
Antennas inside the cabin
Antenna outside the trunk
Antenna inside the trunk
■ Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected)
When locking or unlocking the
doors
The system can be operated when the
electronic key is within about 2.3 ft.
(0.7 m) of an outside door handle. (Only
the doors detecting the key can be operated.)
When opening the trunk
The system can be operated when the
electronic key is within about 2.3 ft.
(0.7 m) of the trunk release button.
When starting the engine or changing engine switch modes
The system can be operated when the electronic key is inside the vehicle.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
151
■ Alarms and warning indicators
An alarm sounds and warning message displays shown on the multi-information display
are used to protect against unexpected accidents or theft of the vehicle resulting from
erroneous operation. When a warning message is displayed, take appropriate measures
based on the displayed message. (→P. 467)
When only an alarm sounds, circumstances and correction procedures are as follows.
Alarm
Exterior alarm
once for 5 seconds
Situation
Correction procedure
The trunk was closed while
the electronic key was still Retrieve the electronic key
from the trunk and close
inside the trunk and all the
the trunk lid.
sounds doors were locked.
An attempt was made to
lock the vehicle while a Close all of the doors and
lock the doors again.
door was open.
■ Battery-saving function
The battery-saving function will be activated in order to prevent the electronic key battery and the vehicle battery from being discharged while the vehicle is not in operation
for a long time.
● In the following situations, the smart access system with push-button start may take
some time to unlock the doors.
• The electronic key has been left in an area of approximately 6 ft. (2 m) of the outside
of the vehicle for 10 minutes or longer.
• The smart access system with push-button start has not been used for 5 days or longer.
● If the smart access system with push-button start has not been used for 14 days or longer, the doors cannot be unlocked at any doors except the driver’s door. In this case,
take hold of the driver’s door handle, or use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key, to unlock the doors.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Operation of each component
The engine switch was
turned to ACCESSORY
mode while the driver’s
Interior alarm sounds con- door was open (or the Turn the engine switch off
driver’s door was opened and close the driver’s door.
tinuously
while the engine switch
was in ACCESSORY
mode).
3
152
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Electronic Key Battery-Saving Function
When battery-saving mode is set, battery depletion is minimized by stopping the electronic key from receiving radio waves.
Press
twice while pressing and holding
. Confirm that the electronic key indicator flashes 4 times.
While the battery-saving mode is set, the smart
access system with push-button start cannot be
used. To cancel the function, press any of the
electronic key buttons.
■ Conditions affecting operation
The smart access system with push-button start uses weak radio waves. In the following
situations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be
affected, preventing the smart access system with push-button start, wireless remote
control and engine immobilizer system from operating properly.
(Ways of coping: →P. 501)
● When the electronic key battery is depleted
● Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or
other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
● When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metallic
objects
• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached
• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside
• Metallic wallets or bags
• Coins
• Hand warmers made of metal
• Media such as CDs and DVDs
● When other wireless keys (that emit radio waves) are being used nearby
● When carrying the electronic key together with the following devices that emit radio
waves
• When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless
communication device
• Another vehicle’s electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio waves
• Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs)
• Digital audio players
• Portable game systems
● If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear window
● When the electronic key is placed near a battery charger or electronic devices
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
153
■ Note for the entry function
● Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas), the system
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
3
Operation of each component
may not operate properly in the following cases:
• The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near the
ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked.
• The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to the rear
bumper center when the trunk is opened.
• The electronic key is on the instrument panel, rear package tray or floor, or in the
door pockets or glove box when the engine is started or engine switch modes are
changed.
● Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the door pockets
when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave reception conditions, it may be
detected by the antenna outside the cabin and the door will become lockable from the
outside, possibly trapping the electronic key inside the vehicle.
● As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be locked or
unlocked by anyone. However, only the doors detecting the electronic key can be used
to unlock the vehicle.
● Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start the engine
if the electronic key is near the window.
● The doors may unlock or lock if a large amount of water splashes on the door handle,
such as in the rain or in a car wash when the electronic key is within the effective range.
(The doors will automatically be locked after approximately 60 seconds if the doors
are not opened and closed.)
● If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key is near
the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.)
● Touching the door lock sensor while wearing gloves may delay or prevent lock operation.
● If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range,
the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the following correction
procedures to wash the vehicle:
• Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the vehicle. (Take
care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)
• Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart access system
with push-button start. (→P. 152)
● If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet during a car
wash, a message may be shown on the multi-information display and a buzzer will
sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the alarm, lock all the doors.
● The lock sensor may not work properly if it comes into contact with ice, snow, mud, etc.
Clean the lock sensor and attempt to operate it again, or use the lock sensor on the
lower part of the door handle.
● A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the doors from
being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the original position and check
that the doors unlock before pulling the door handle again.
● Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.
● If there is another electronic key in the detection area, it may take slightly longer to
unlock the doors after the door handle is gripped.
154
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods
● To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m) of the
vehicle.
● The smart access system with push-button start can be deactivated in advance.
(→P. 545)
■ To operate the system properly
● Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get the elec-
tronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside of the
vehicle.
Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key may not
be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The alarm may go off
accidentally, or the door lock prevention function may not operate.)
● Do not leave the electronic key inside the trunk.
The key confinement prevention function may not operate, depending on the location
of the key (close to a spare tire, the inside edge of the trunk), conditions (inside a metal
bag, close to metallic objects) and the radio waves in the surrounding area. (→P. 145)
■ If the smart access system with push-button start does not operate properly
● Locking and unlocking the doors and opening the trunk: Use the mechanical key.
(→P. 501)
● Starting the engine: →P. 502
■ Customization
Settings (e. g. smart access system with push-button start) can be changed.
(Customizable features: →P. 545)
■ If the smart access system with push-button start has been deactivated in a customized
setting
● Locking and unlocking the doors and opening the trunk:
Use the wireless remote control or mechanical key. (→P. 137, 144, 501)
● Starting the engine and changing engine switch modes: →P. 502
● Stopping the engine: →P. 198
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
155
■ Certification for the smart access system with push-button start

For vehicles sold in the U.S. mainland, Hawaii, NATO Germany, Guam and Puerto Rico
3
Operation of each component
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
156

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
For vehicles sold in Canada
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
157
WARNING
■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
● People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-
pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should keep away from the
smart access system with push-button start antennas. (→P. 150)
The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the entry
function can be disabled. Ask your Lexus dealer for details, such as the frequency of
radio waves and timing of the emitted radio waves. Then, consult your doctor to see if
you should disable the entry function.
● Users of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pacemakers,
cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves.
Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical
devices.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details on disabling the entry function.
3
Operation of each component
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
158
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Front seats
Adjustment procedure

GS350/GS300

GS F
1
Seat position adjustment switch
2
Seatback angle adjustment switch
6
Lumbar support adjustment switch
(if equipped)
Seat cushion (front) angle adjust- 7 Pelvic support adjustment switch (if
equipped)
ment switch
8 Seat cushion length adjustment
4 Vertical height adjustment switch
switch (if equipped)
5 Seatback upper angle adjustment
9 Seatback side support adjustment
switch (if equipped)
switch (if equipped)
3
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
3-3. Adjusting the seats
159
■ When adjusting the seat
Take care when adjusting the seat so that the head restraint does not touch the ceiling.
■ Power easy access system
The driver’s seat and steering wheel move in accordance with engine switch mode and
the driver’s seat belt condition. The passenger’s seat moves when the passenger’s door is
opened. (→P. 160)
WARNING
■ When adjusting the seat position
● Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are not
injured by the moving seat.
● Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury.
Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.
● Make sure to leave enough space around the feet so they do not get stuck.
To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the seat
more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces
directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk
of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly move and
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Operation of each component
■ Seat adjustment
3
160
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Driving position memory
This feature automatically adjusts the front seats, steering wheel and outside
rear view mirrors to make entering and exiting the vehicle easier or to suit
your preferences.
Power easy access system
The seat and steering wheel are automatically adjusted to allow the driver or
front passenger to enter and exit the vehicle easily.
■ Driver’s seat
When all of the following have been
performed, the driver’s seat and
steering wheel are automatically
adjusted to a position that allows
driver to enter and exit the vehicle
easily.
• The shift lever has been shifted to
P.
• The engine switch has been turned off.
• The driver’s seat belt has been unfastened.
When any of the following has been performed, the driver’s seat and steering
wheel automatically return to their original positions.
• The engine switch has been turned to ACCESSORY mode or IGNITION
ON mode.
• The driver’s seat belt has been fastened.
■ Front passenger’s seat (if equipped)
If the front passenger’s door is opened while the vehicle is stopped, the
adjusted lumbar support, side support (if equipped), etc. will return to its original position.
■ Operation of the power easy access system
When exiting the vehicle, the power easy access system may not operate if the seat is
already close to the rearmost position, etc.
■ Customization
The seat movement amount settings of the power easy access system can be customized. (Customizable features: →P. 545)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
3-3. Adjusting the seats
161
Driving position memory
Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver’s seat, steering wheel,
outside rear view mirrors and HUD [head-up display] [if equipped]) can be
recorded and recalled by pressing a button.
Three different driving positions can be recorded into memory.
■ Recording procedure
Check that the shift lever is in P.
2
Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.
3
Adjust the driver’s seat, steering wheel, outside rear view mirrors and HUD
(head-up display) (if equipped) to the desired positions.
4
While pressing the “SET” button,
or within 3 seconds after the
“SET” button is pressed, press
button “1”, “2” or “3” until the
buzzer sounds.
If the selected button has already
been preset, the previously recorded
position will be overwritten.
Vehicles with the driving position memory for the front passenger’s seat: To
record the position of the front passenger’s seat, adjust the front passenger’s
seat to the desired position and perform step 4 using the buttons on the front
passenger’s side.
■ Recall procedure
1
Check that the shift lever is in P.
2
Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.
3
Press one of the buttons for the
driving position you want to recall
until the buzzer sounds.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
3
Operation of each component
1
162
3-3. Adjusting the seats
■ To stop the position recall operation part-way through
Perform any of the following:
● Press the “SET” button.
● Press button “1”, “2” or “3”.
● Operate any of the seat adjustment switches (only cancels seat position recall).
● Operate the tilt and telescopic steering control switch (only cancels steering wheel
position recall).
● Operate the head-up display position adjustment switch (if equipped) (only cancels
head-up display position recall).
■ Seat positions that can be memorized (→P. 158)
 Vehicles without seatback side support adjustment switch
The adjusted positions other than the position adjusted by lumbar support switch can be
recorded.
 Vehicles with seatback side support adjustment switch
All adjusted positions can be recorded.
■ Operating the driving position memory after turning the engine switch off
Driver’s seat:
Recorded seat positions can be activated up to 180 seconds after the driver’s door is
opened and another 60 seconds after it is closed again.
Front passenger’s seat:
Recorded seat positions can be activated up to 180 seconds after the front passenger’s
door is opened.
■ In order to correctly use the driving position memory function
If a seat position is already in the furthest possible position and the seat is operated in the
same direction, the recorded position may be slightly different when it is recalled.
Memory recall function (driver’s side only)
Each electronic key (including a card key) can be registered to recall your preferred driving position.
■ Registering procedure
Record your driving position to button “1”, “2” or “3” before performing the
following:
Carry only the key you want to register, and then close the driver’s door.
If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be recorded
properly.
1
Check that the shift lever is in P.
2
Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.
3
Recall the driving position that you want to record.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
3-3. Adjusting the seats
4
163
While pressing the recalled button, press and hold the door lock
switch (either lock or unlock) until
the buzzer sounds.
If the button could not be registered,
the buzzer sounds continuously for
approximately 3 seconds.
■ Recall procedure
1
Make sure that the doors are locked before recalling the driving position.
Carry the electronic key that has been registered to the driving position,
and then unlock and open the driver’s door using the smart access system
with push-button start or wireless remote control.
2
Turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY mode or IGNITION ON mode,
or fasten a seat belt.
The seat, steering wheel and HUD (head-up display) (if equipped) will move to the
recorded position.
■ Cancelation procedure
Carry only the key you want to cancel and then close the driver’s door.
If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be canceled
properly.
1
Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.
2
While pressing the “SET” button, press and hold the door lock switch
(either lock or unlock) until the buzzer sounds twice.
If the button could not be canceled, the buzzer sounds continuously for approximately 3 seconds.
■ Recalling the driving position using the memory recall function
● Different driving positions can be registered for each electronic key. Therefore, the
driving position that is recalled may be different depending on the key being carried.
● If a door other than the driver’s door is unlocked with the smart access system with
push-button start, the driving position cannot be recalled. In this case, press the driving
position button which has been set.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Operation of each component
The driving position will move to the recorded position (not including the steering
wheel and HUD [head-up display] [if equipped]). However, the seat will move to a
position slightly behind the recorded position in order to make entering the vehicle
easier.
If the driving position is in a position that has already been recorded, the seat and
outside rear view mirrors will not move.
3
164
3-3. Adjusting the seats
■ Customization
The unlock door settings of the memory recall function can be customized.
(Customizable features: →P. 545)
WARNING
■ Seat adjustment caution
Take care during seat adjustment so that the seat does not strike the rear passenger or
squeeze your body against the steering wheel.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
3-3. Adjusting the seats
165
Head restraints
Head restraints are provided for all seats.
GS F: The head restraints of the front seats are integrated into the seatback
and cannot be adjusted.
Front seats

Vertical adjustment
1
Up
Pull the head restraints up.
2
3
Down
Lock release button

Horizontal adjustment (if equipped)
The position of the head restraint can
be adjusted forward in 4 stages.
If the head restraint is pulled forward
from the foremost position, it will return
to the rearmost position.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)

Side support adjustment
(if equipped)
Operation of each component
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the lock release button.
166
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Rear seats
1
Up
Pull the head restraints up.
2
Down
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the lock release button.
Lock release button
■ Removing the head restraints
Pull the head restraint up while pressing the lock
release button.
Front seats: If the head restraint touches the ceiling, making the removal difficult, change the
seat height or angle. (→P. 158)
Outboard rear seats (vehicles with rear sunshade): If the rear sunshade is raised, lower it
before removing the head restraint. (→P. 341)
Lock release button
■ Installing the head restraints
Front seats
Align the head restraint with the installation
holes and push it down to the lock position.
Press and hold the lock release button when
lowering the head restraint.

Lock release button
Rear seats
Align the head restraint with the installation
holes and push it down to the lowest lock position while pressing the lock release button.

Lock release button
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
3-3. Adjusting the seats
167
■ Adjusting the height of the head restraints
Make sure that the head restraints are adjusted
so that the center of the head restraint is closest
to the top of your ears.
■ Adjusting the rear seat head restraints
Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when using.
WARNING
■ Head restraint precautions
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Operation of each component
Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so may
result in death or serious injury.
● Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.
● Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
● After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure they are
locked in position.
● Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
3
168
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
Steering wheel
Adjustment procedure
Operating the switch moves the steering wheel in the following directions:
1
Up
2
Down
3
Toward the driver
4
Away from the driver
Horn
To sound the horn, press on or close to
the
mark.
■ The steering wheel can be adjusted when
The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode*.
*: If the driver’s seat belt is fastened, the steering wheel can be adjusted regardless of
engine switch mode.
■ Automatic adjustment of the steering position
A desired steering position can be entered to memory and recalled automatically by the
driving position memory system. (→P. 160)
■ Power easy access system
The steering wheel and driver’s seat move in accordance with engine switch mode and
the driver’s seat belt condition. (→P. 160)
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
169
Inside rear view mirror
The rear view mirror’s position can be adjusted to enable sufficient confirmation of the rear view.
Adjusting the height of rear view mirror
The height of the rear view mirror can be adjusted to suit your driving posture.
Adjust the height of the rear view mirror by moving it up and down.
3
Responding to the level of brightness of the headlights of vehicles behind, the
reflected light is automatically reduced.
Changing automatic anti-glare function mode
ON/OFF
When the automatic anti-glare function
is in ON mode, the indicator illuminates.
The function will set to ON mode each
time the engine switch is turned to
IGNITION ON mode.
Pressing the button turns the function to
OFF mode. (The indicator also turns
off.)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Indicator
Operation of each component
Anti-glare function
170
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
■ To prevent sensor error
To ensure that the sensors operate properly, do
not touch or cover them.
WARNING
Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
171
Outside rear view mirrors
Adjustment procedure
1
To select a mirror to adjust, press the
switch.
1
Left
2
Right
Pressing the same switch again will
put the switch in neutral.
2
To adjust the mirror, press the switch.
Up
2
Right
3
Down
4
Left
Manually folding and extending the mirrors (if equipped)
Push the mirror back in the direction of
the vehicle’s rear.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Operation of each component
1
3
172
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
Automatically folding and extending the mirrors (if equipped)
■ Using the switch
Press the switch to fold the mirrors.
Press it again to extend them to the
original position.
■ Setting automatic mode
Automatic mode allows the folding
or extending of the mirrors to be
linked to locking/unlocking of the
doors.
Press the “AUTO” switch to set automatic mode.
The indicator will come on.
Pressing the switch once more will
return to manual mode.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Indicator
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
173
Linked mirror function when reversing
When either “L” or “R” of the mirror select switch is selected, the outside rear
view mirrors will automatically angle downwards when the vehicle is reversing in
order to give a better view of the ground. To disable this function, select neither
“L” nor “R”.
■ Adjusting the mirror angle when the vehicle is reversing
With the shift lever in R, adjust the mirror angle at a desired position. The
adjusted angle will be memorized and the mirror will automatically tilt to the
memorized angle whenever the shift lever is shifted to R from next time.
The memorized downward tilt position of the mirror is linked to the normal position
(angle adjusted with the shift lever in other than R). Therefore, if the normal position is changed after adjustment, the tilt position will also change.
When the normal position is changed, readjust the angle in reversing.
The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
■ When the mirrors are fogged up
The outside rear view mirrors can be cleared using the mirror defoggers. Turn on the
rear window defogger to turn on the outside rear view mirror defoggers. (→P. 314)
■ Automatic adjustment of the mirror angle
A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and recalled automatically by the
driving position memory. (→P. 160)
■ Auto anti-glare function
When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror is set to automatic mode, the outside rear
view mirrors will activate in conjunction with the anti-glare inside rear view mirror to
reduce reflected light. (→P. 169)
■ Using automatic mode in cold weather (if equipped)
When automatic mode is used in cold weather, the door mirror could freeze up and
automatic stowing and return may not be possible. In this event, remove any ice and snow
from the door mirror, then either operate the mirror using manual mode or move the mirror by hand.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Operation of each component
■ Mirror angle can be adjusted when
3
174
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
WARNING
■ Important points while driving
Observe the following precautions while driving.
Failure to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
● Do not drive with the mirrors folded.
● Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly adjusted
before driving.
■ When a mirror is moving
To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your hand caught
by the moving mirror.
■ When the mirror defoggers are operating
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn you.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
175
Power windows
Opening and closing procedures
The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches.
Operating the switch moves the windows as follows:
1
Closing
2
One-touch closing*
3
Opening
4
One-touch opening*
*: To stop the window partway, operate the
3
switch in the opposite direction.
Operation of each component
Window lock switch
Press the switch to lock the passenger
window switches.
The indicator will come on.
Use this switch to prevent children from
accidentally opening or closing a passenger window.
Indicator
■ The power windows can be operated when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Operating the power windows after turning the engine off
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the
engine switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. They cannot, however, be
operated once either front door is opened.
■ Jam protection function
If an object becomes jammed between the window and the window frame while the window is closing, window movement is stopped and the window is opened slightly.
■ Catch protection function
If an object becomes caught between the door and window while the window is opening,
window movement is stopped.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
176
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
■ When the window cannot be opened or closed
When the jam protection function or catch protection function operates unusually and
the door window cannot be opened or closed, perform the following operations with the
power window switch of that door.
● Stop the vehicle. With the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode, within 4 seconds of
the jam protection function or catch protection function activating, continuously operate the power window switch in the one-touch closing direction or one-touch opening
direction so that the door window can be opened and closed.
● If the door window cannot be opened and closed even when performing the above
operations, perform the following procedure for function initialization.
1 Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.
2 Pull and hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing direction and completely close the door window.
3 Release the power window switch for a moment, resume pulling the switch in the
one-touch closing direction, and hold it there for approximately 6 seconds or more.
4 Press and hold the power window switch in the one-touch opening direction. After
the door window is completely opened, continue holding the switch for an additional
1 second or more.
5 Release the power window switch for a moment, resume pressing the switch in the
one-touch opening direction, and hold it there for approximately 4 seconds or
more.
6 Pull and hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing direction again.
After the door window is completely closed, continue holding the switch for a further 1 second or more.
If you release the switch while the window is moving, start again from the beginning.
If the window reverses and cannot be fully closed or opened, have the vehicle inspected
by your Lexus dealer.
■ Door lock linked window operation
● The power windows can be opened and closed using the mechanical key.*(→P. 501)
● The power windows can be opened using the wireless remote control.* (→P. 137)
*: These settings must be customized at your Lexus dealer.
■ When the battery is disconnected
The window lock switch is disabled. If necessary, press the window lock switch after
reconnecting the battery.
■ Power windows open warning buzzer
The buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display in the instrument cluster when the engine switch is turned off and the driver’s door is opened with the
power windows open.
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features: →P. 545)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
177
WARNING
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
3
Operation of each component
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ Closing the windows
● The driver is responsible for all the power window operations, including the operation
for the passengers. In order to prevent accidental operation, especially by a child, do
not let a child operate the power windows. It is possible for children and other passengers to have body parts caught in the power window. Also, when riding with a child, it
is recommended to use the window lock switch. (→P. 175)
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
● When using the mechanical key and operating the power windows, operate the
power window after checking to make sure that there is no possibility of any passenger having any of their body parts caught in the window. Also do not let a child operate window by the mechanical key. It is possible for children and other passengers to
get caught in the power window.
● When exiting the vehicle, turn the engine switch off, carry the key and exit the vehicle
along with the child. There may be accidental operation, due to mischief, etc., that
may possibly lead to an accident.
■ Jam protection function
● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets jammed just before the
window is fully closed. Be careful not to get any part of your body jammed in the window.
■ Catch protection function
● Never use any part of your body or clothing to intentionally activate the catch protection function.
● The catch protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the
window is fully opened. Be careful not to get any part of your body or clothing caught
in the window.
178
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
Moon roof
Use the overhead switches to open and close the moon roof and tilt it up and
down.
Opening and closing
Opens the moon roof*
1
The moon roof stops slightly before the
fully open position to reduce wind noise.
Press the switch again to fully open the
moon roof.
2
Closes the moon roof*
*: Lightly
press either way of the moon
roof switch to stop the moon roof partway.
Tilting up and down
1
Tilts the moon roof up*
2
Tilts the moon roof down*
*: Lightly
press either way of the moon
roof switch to stop the moon roof partway.
■ The moon roof can be operated when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Operating the moon roof after turning the engine off
The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the engine switch is
turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. It cannot, however, be operated once either
front door is opened.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
179
■ Jam protection function
If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while the moon roof is closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.
■ Sunshade
The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will open
automatically when the moon roof is opened.
■ Door lock linked moon roof operation
● The moon roof can be opened and closed using the mechanical key.* (→P. 501)
● The moon roof can be opened using the wireless remote control.* (→P. 137)
*: These settings must be customized at your Lexus dealer.
■ When the moon roof does not close normally
*2: If the switch is released after the above mentioned 10 second pause, automatic
operation will be disabled. In that case, press and hold the “CLOSE” or “UP” switch,
and the moon roof will tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Then it will tilt
down, open and close. Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed
and then release the switch.
If the moon roof does not fully close even after performing the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
3
Operation of each component
Perform the following procedure:
● If the moon roof closes but then re-opens slightly
1 Stop the vehicle.
2 Press and hold the “CLOSE” switch.*1
The moon roof will close, reopen and pause for approximately 10 seconds.*2 Then it
will close again, tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Finally, it will tilt down,
open and close.
3 Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the
switch.
● If the moon roof tilts down but then tilts back up
1 Stop the vehicle.
2 Press and hold the “UP” switch*1 until the moon roof moves into the tilt up position
and stops.
3 Release the “UP” switch once and then press and hold the “UP” switch again.*1
The moon roof will pause for approximately 10 seconds in the tilt up position.*2
Then it will adjust slightly and pause for approximately 1 second. Finally, it will tilt
down, open and close.
4 Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the
switch.
*1: If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will have to be performed again from the beginning.
180
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
■ Moon roof open warning buzzer
The buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display in the instrument cluster when the engine switch is turned off and the driver’s door is opened with the
moon roof open.
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features: →P. 545)
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
■ Opening the moon roof
● Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while it is
moving.
● Do not sit on top of the moon roof.
■ Closing the moon roof
● The driver is responsible for moon roof opening and closing operations.
In order to prevent accidental operation, especially by a child, do not let a child operate the moon roof. It is possible for children and other passengers to have body parts
caught in the moon roof.
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when the moon roof is being operated.
● When using the mechanical key and operating the moon roof, operate the moon roof
after checking to make sure that there is no possibility of any passenger having any of
their body parts caught in the moon roof. Also, do not let a child operate moon roof
by the mechanical key. It is possible for children and other passengers to get caught in
the moon roof.
● When exiting the vehicle, turn the engine switch off, carry the key and exit the vehicle
along with the child. There may be accidental operation, due to mischief, etc., that
may possibly lead to an accident.
■ Jam protection function
● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the
moon roof fully closes.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
181
Driving
4-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle......................182
Cargo and luggage......................191
Vehicle load limits....................... 194
Trailer towing................................195
Dinghy towing .............................. 196
4-2. Driving procedures
Engine (ignition) switch ............ 197
Automatic transmission...........202
Turn signal lever...........................210
Parking brake .................................211
Brake Hold..................................... 213
ASC (Active Sound Control)
(GS F) ........................................... 215
4-3. Operating the lights
and wipers
Headlight switch.......................... 216
Automatic High Beam .............. 219
Windshield wipers
and washer.................................223
4
4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap .....228
4-5. Using the driving support
systems
Lexus Safety System+ .............. 232
PCS (Pre-Collision
System)........................................238
LKA (Lane-Keeping
Assist) ..........................................249
Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range.............258
Cruise control .............................270
Driving mode select
switch ........................................... 273
BSM
(Blind Spot Monitor)..............278
• The Blind Spot Monitor
function ..................................... 281
• The Rear Cross Traffic
Alert function.........................283
TVD (Torque Vectoring
Differential) (GS F) ................286
Driving assist systems ............. 288
4-6. Driving tips
Winter driving tips.....................296
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
182
4-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving:
Starting the engine
→P. 197
Driving
1
With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D. (→P. 202)
2
If the parking brake is in manual mode, release the parking brake. (→P. 211)
3
Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal
to accelerate the vehicle.
Stopping
1
With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
2
If necessary, set the parking brake.
If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift lever to P or
N. (→P. 202)
Parking the vehicle
1
With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
2
Set the parking brake (→P. 211), and shift the shift lever to P. (→P. 202)
3
Press the engine switch to stop the engine.
4
Lock the door, making sure that you have the electronic key on your person.
If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.
Starting off on a steep uphill
1
Make sure that the parking brake is set and shift the shift lever to D.
2
Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
3
Release the parking brake.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-1. Before driving
183
■ When starting off on a uphill
The hill-start assist control is available. (→P. 288)
■ Driving in the rain
● Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows may
become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.
● Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially slip-
pery.
● Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because there may
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4
Driving
be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing the steering and
brakes from operating properly.
■ Engine speed while driving
In the following conditions, the engine speed may become high while driving. This is due
to automatic up-shifting control or down-shifting implementation to meet driving conditions. It does not indicate sudden acceleration.
● The vehicle is judged to be driving uphill or downhill
● When the accelerator pedal is released
● When the brake pedal is depressed while sport mode is selected (→P. 273)
■ Restraining engine output (Brake Override System)
● When the accelerator and brake pedals are depressed at the same time, the engine
output may be restrained.
● A warning message is displayed on the multi-information display while the system is
operating. (→P. 461)
■ Restraining sudden start (Drive-Start Control)
● When the following unusual operation is performed, the engine output may be
restrained.
• When the shift lever is shifted from R to D, D to R, N to R, P to D, or P to R (D
includes M) with the accelerator pedal depressed, a warning message appears on
the multi-information display. (→P. 446)
• When the accelerator pedal is depressed too much while the vehicle is in reverse.
● While Drive-Start Control is being activated, your vehicle may have trouble escaping
from the mud or fresh snow. In such case, deactivate TRAC (→P. 290) to cancel DriveStart Control so that the vehicle may become able to escape from the mud or fresh
snow.
■ Breaking in your new Lexus
To extend the life of the vehicle, observing the following precautions is recommended:
● For the first 186 miles (300 km):
Avoid sudden stops.
● For the first 621 miles (1000 km):
• Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
• Avoid sudden acceleration.
• Do not drive continuously in low gears.
• Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.
184
4-1. Before driving
■ Drum-in-disc type parking brake system
Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of brake system
needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking brake
shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your Lexus dealer perform the bedding down
operation.
■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign country
Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the correct fuel. (→P. 521)
■ Brake pads and discs
● F SPORT models of GS350/GS300, and GS F: The brake pads and discs are
designed for use under high load conditions. Therefore, brake noise may be generated
depending on the vehicle speed, braking force and vehicle environment (temperature,
humidity, etc.).
● GS F: In order to achieve steady braking performance even during high-load sporty
driving, brake pads that include a large amount of iron are used. As a result, rust may
form if the vehicle is parked for a long time with wet brake pads or disc rotors, causing
them to stick. When parts are stuck, abnormal noise or vibration may occur during
driving, so lightly depress the accelerator pedal and drive slowly. (Before parking the
vehicle after it is washed, drive slowly and apply the brakes several times to dry the
parts.)
■ Idling time before engine stop (GS300)
To prevent damage to the turbocharger, allow the engine to idle immediately after highload driving.
Driving condition
Idling time
Normal city driving or high-speed driving (at the high- Not necessary
way speed limit or recommended speed)
Steep hill driving or continuous driving (race track drivApproximately 1 minute
ing etc.)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-1. Before driving
185
WARNING
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4
Driving
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When starting the vehicle
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running. This
prevents the vehicle from creeping.
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.
• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will
result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident.
• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle only
slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly.
• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal using
your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident.
● Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.
The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot parts may
cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.
● During normal driving, do not turn off the engine. Turning the engine off while driving
will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist to these systems
will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over
and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the
vehicle in the normal way: →P. 425
● Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a steep
hill.
Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. (→P. 202)
● Do not adjust the positions of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside rear
view mirrors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control.
● Always check that all passengers’ arms, heads or other parts of their body are not
outside the vehicle.
● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not
drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-speed capability tires.
Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible
injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on your vehicle
are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.
186
4-1. Before driving
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When driving on slippery road surfaces
● Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce your
ability to control the vehicle.
● Sudden acceleration, engine braking due to shifting, or changes in engine speed
could cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an accident.
● After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that the
brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning properly,
steering control may be affected.
■ When shifting the shift lever
● Do not let the vehicle roll backward while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll
forward while the shift lever is in R.
Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.
● Do not shift the shift lever to P while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
● Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
● Do not shift the shift lever to a driving position while the vehicle is moving backward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
● Moving the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the engine from
the transmission. Engine braking is not available when N is selected.
● Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. Shifting the
shift lever to a gear other than P or N may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of
the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.
■ If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators) (GS350/
GS300)
Have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
Rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed.
Front brakes of F SPORT models: Moderate levels of brake pad and disc wear allow
enhanced front braking power. As a result, the discs may wear more quickly than conventional brake discs. Therefore, when replacing the brake pads, Lexus recommends
that you also have the thickness of the discs measured.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or those
of the brake discs are exceeded.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-1. Before driving
187
WARNING
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4
Driving
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ If a brake pad wear warning message is displayed (GS F)
Have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
Rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed.
Moderate levels of the brake pad and disc wear allow enhanced braking power. As a
result, the discs may wear more quickly than conventional brake discs. Therefore, when
replacing the brake pads, Lexus recommends that you also have the thickness of the
discs measured.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or those
of the brake discs are exceeded.
■ When the vehicle is stopped
● Do not race the engine.
If the vehicle is any gear other than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and
unexpectedly, causing an accident.
● In order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep depressing
the brake pedal while the engine is running, and apply the parking brake as necessary.
● If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused by the
vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal and securely
apply the parking brake as needed.
● Avoid revving or racing the engine.
Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause the exhaust
system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible material is nearby.
188
4-1. Before driving
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When the vehicle is parked
● Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehicle
when it is in the sun.
Doing so may result in the following:
• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire.
• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic material of glasses to deform or crack.
• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of the
vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle’s electrical components.
● Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a place such as
the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when luggage is loaded or the
seat is adjusted, causing a fire.
● Do not attach adhesive discs to the windshield or windows. Do not place containers
such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard. Adhesive discs or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehicle.
● Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a metallized
film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause the glass to act as a
lens, causing a fire.
● Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the engine and lock the
vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.
If the vehicle is parked with the shift lever in P but the parking brake is not set, the
vehicle may start to move, possibly leading to an accident.
● Do not touch the exhaust pipes while the engine is running or immediately after turning the engine off.
Doing so may cause burns.
■ When taking a nap in the vehicle
Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, if you accidentally move the shift lever or
depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an accident or fire due to engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust gases
may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-1. Before driving
189
WARNING
NOTICE
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during driving, as
this may restrain the engine output.
● Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the
same time to hold the vehicle on a hill.
■ When parking the vehicle
Always set the parking brake, and shift the shift lever to P. Failure to do so may cause
the vehicle to move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is
accidentally depressed.
■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
● Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for an
extended period of time.
Doing so may damage the power steering motor.
● When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damaging
the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
● GS300: Make sure to idle the engine immediately after high-load driving. Stop the
engine only after the turbocharger has cooled down. (→P. 184)
Failure to do so may cause damage to the turbocharger.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4
Driving
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When braking
● When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.
Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause one side of
the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also, the parking brake may not
securely hold the vehicle.
● If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other vehicles
closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require braking.
In this case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be depressed more
firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase. Have your brakes fixed
immediately.
● Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.
Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted brakes.
● The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems; if one of the systems fails,
the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed more
firmly than usual and the braking distance will increase. Have your brakes fixed immediately.
■ If the vehicle becomes stuck
Do not spin the wheels excessively when any of the tires is up in the air, or the vehicle is
stuck in sand, mud, etc. This may damage the driveline components or propel the vehicle forward or backward, causing an accident.
190
4-1. Before driving
NOTICE
■ If you get a flat tire while driving
A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel
firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.
● It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
● The vehicle will make abnormal sounds or vibrations.
● The vehicle will lean abnormally.
Information on what to do in case of a flat tire (→P. 472, 483)
■ When encountering flooded roads
Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause the
following serious damage to the vehicle:
● Engine stalling
● Short in electrical components
● Engine damage caused by water immersion
In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to have
your Lexus dealer check the following:
● Brake function
● Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, transmission,
transfer (AWD models), differential, etc.
● Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft, bearings and suspension joints (where
possible), and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-1. Before driving
191
Cargo and luggage
Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo
capacity and load:
Capacity and distribution
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) — (Total weight of occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit —
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150
lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 − 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. (→P. 194)
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Your vehicle is not
designed for trailer towing.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4
Driving
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
192
4-1. Before driving
Calculation formula for your vehicle
1
Cargo capacity
2
Total load capacity (vehicle capacity
weight) (→P. 518)
When 2 people with the combined weight of A lb. (kg) are riding in your vehicle,
which has a total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight) of B lb. (kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be C lb. (kg) as follows:
B*2 lb. (kg) - A*1 lb. (kg) = C*3 lb. (kg)
*1: A = Weight of people
*2: B = Total load capacity
*3: C = Available cargo and luggage load
In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of D lb. (kg) get on,
the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced E lb. (kg) as follows:
C lb. (kg) - D*4 lb. (kg) = E*5 lb. (kg)
*4: D = Additional weight of people
*5: E = Available cargo and luggage load
As shown in the example above, if the number of occupants increases, the cargo
and luggage load will be reduced by an amount that equals the increased weight
due to the additional occupants. In other words, if an increase in the number of
occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on
your vehicle.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-1. Before driving
193
WARNING
■ Things that must not be carried in the trunk
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4
Driving
The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the trunk:
● Receptacles containing gasoline
● Aerosol cans
■ Storage precautions
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may prevent the pedals from being depressed properly, may block the
driver’s vision, or may result in items hitting the driver or passengers, possibly causing
an accident.
● Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible.
● Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations.
• At the feet of the driver
• On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)
• On the package tray
• On the instrument panel
• On the dashboard
• In front of the Remote Touch screen
● Secure all items in the occupant compartment.
■ Capacity and distribution
● Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating.
● Even if the total load of occupant’s weight and the cargo load is less than the total load
capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause deterioration
of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury.
194
4-1. Before driving
Vehicle load limits
Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing capacity and cargo capacity.
◆ Total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight): →P. 518
Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and luggage.
◆ Seating capacity: 5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3)
Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated
average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.
◆ Towing capacity
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.
◆ Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and the
number of occupants.
■ Total load capacity and seating capacity
These details are also described on the tire and loading information label. (→P. 403)
WARNING
■ Overloading the vehicle
Do not overload the vehicle.
It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking ability,
resulting in an accident.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-1. Before driving
195
Trailer towing
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Lexus also does
not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or the use of a tow hitch carrier
for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer
towing or for the use of tow hitch mounted carriers.
4
Driving
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
196
4-1. Before driving
Dinghy towing
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the ground)
behind a motor home.
NOTICE
■ To avoid serious damage to your vehicle
Do not tow your vehicle with the four wheels on the ground.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-2. Driving procedures
197
Engine (ignition) switch
Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic key on your
person starts the engine or changes engine switch modes.
Starting the engine
1
Press the parking brake switch to check that the parking brake is set.
(→P. 211)
Parking brake indicator will come on.
2
Check that the shift lever is in P.
3
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
and a message (GS F only) will be displayed on the multi-information display.
If it is not displayed, the engine cannot be started.
Press the engine switch shortly and
firmly.
When operating the engine switch, one
short, firm press is enough.
It is not necessary to press and hold the
switch.
The engine will crank until it starts or for
up to 30 seconds, whichever is less.
Continue depressing the brake pedal
until the engine is completely started.
The engine can be started from any
engine switch mode.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Driving
4
4
198
4-2. Driving procedures
Stopping the engine
1
Stop the vehicle.
2
Set the parking brake (→P. 211), and shift the shift lever to P.
3
Press the engine switch.
4
Release the brake pedal and check that “POWER ON” on the multi-information display is off.
Changing engine switch modes
Modes can be changed by pressing the engine switch with brake pedal released.
(The mode changes each time the switch is pressed.)
Off*
The emergency flashers can be used.
“POWER ON” will not be displayed on
the multi-information display.
ACCESSORY mode
Some electrical components such as the
audio system can be used.
“POWER ON” will be displayed on the
multi-information display.
IGNITION ON mode
All electrical components can be used.
“POWER ON” will be displayed on the
multi-information display.
*: If the shift lever is in a position other than P when turning off the engine, the engine
switch will be turned to ACCESSORY mode, not to off.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-2. Driving procedures
199
When stopping the engine with the shift lever in a position other than P
If the engine is stopped with the shift lever in a position other than P, the engine
switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. Perform the following procedure to turn the switch off:
1
Check that the parking brake is set.
2
Shift the shift lever to P.
3
Check that “Turn Off Vehicle” is displayed on the multi-information display
and then press the engine switch once.
4
Check that “Turn Off Vehicle” on the multi-information display is off.
■ Auto power off function
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4
Driving
If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than 20 minutes or IGNITION ON
mode (the engine is not running) for more than an hour with the shift lever in P, the engine
switch will automatically turn off. However, this function cannot entirely prevent battery
discharge. Do not leave the vehicle with the engine switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode for long periods of time when the engine is not running.
■ Electronic key battery depletion
→P. 134
■ Conditions affecting operation
→P. 152
■ Notes for the entry function
→P. 153
■ If the engine does not start
● The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (→P. 72)
Contact your Lexus dealer.
● Check that the shift lever is securely set in P. The engine may not start if the shift lever is
displaced out of P. “Shift to P position to Start” will be displayed on the multi-information
display.
■ Steering lock
After turning the engine switch off and opening and closing the doors, the steering wheel
will be locked due to the steering lock function. Operating the engine switch again automatically cancels the steering lock.
■ When the steering lock cannot be released
“Steering Lock active” will be displayed on the
multi-information display.
Check that the shift lever is set in P. Press the
engine switch while turning the steering wheel
left and right.
200
4-2. Driving procedures
■ Steering lock motor overheating prevention
To prevent the steering lock motor from overheating, the motor may be suspended if the
engine is turned on and off repeatedly in a short period of time. In this case, refrain from
operating the engine. After about 10 seconds, the steering lock motor will resume functioning.
■ When “Check Access System with Elec. Key” will be displayed on the multi-information display
The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer
immediately.
■ If the electronic key battery is depleted
→P. 410
■ Operation of the engine switch
● If the switch is not pressed shortly and firmly, the engine switch mode may not change
or the engine may not start.
● If attempting to restart the engine immediately after turning the engine switch off, the
engine may not start in some cases. After turning the engine switch off, please wait a
few seconds before restarting the engine.
■ If the smart access system with push-button start has been deactivated in a customized
setting
→P. 501
WARNING
■ When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the accelerator
pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Caution while driving
If engine failure occurs while the vehicle is moving, do not lock or open the doors until
the vehicle reaches a safe and complete stop. Activation of the steering lock in this circumstance may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Stopping the engine in an emergency
If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle, press and hold
the engine switch for more than 2 seconds, or press it briefly 3 times or more in succession. (→P. 425)
However, do not touch the engine switch while driving except in an emergency. Turning
the engine off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the
power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and
brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-2. Driving procedures
201
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
● Do not leave the engine switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode for long
periods of time without the engine running.
● If “POWER ON” is displayed on the multi-information display, the engine switch is
not off. Exit the vehicle after turning the engine switch off.
● Do not stop the engine when the shift lever is in a position other than P. If the engine is
stopped in another shift lever position, the engine switch will not be turned off but
instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY
mode, battery discharge may occur.
■ When starting the engine
● Do not race a cold engine.
● If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have your vehicle checked
by your Lexus dealer immediately.
■ Symptoms indicating a malfunction with the engine switch
If the engine switch seems to be operating somewhat differently than usual, such as the
switch sticking slightly, there may be a malfunction. Contact your Lexus dealer immediately.
4
Driving
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
202
4-2. Driving procedures
Automatic transmission
Shifting the shift lever
While the engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode, move the shift lever
with the brake pedal depressed.
When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the vehicle is completely stopped.
Shift position purpose
Shift position
Objective or function
P
Parking the vehicle/starting the engine
R
Reversing
N
Neutral (Condition in which the power is not transmitted)
D
Normal driving*1
M
M mode driving*2 (→P. 205)
*1: To improve fuel efficiency and reduce noises, set the shift lever in D for normal driving.
*2: Any gear range can be fixed when driving in M mode.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-2. Driving procedures
203
Selecting the driving mode
■ Sport mode/Eco drive mode
→P. 273
■ Snow mode
Snow mode can be selected to suit the conditions when driving on slippery
road surfaces, such as on snow.
Press the switch.
Press the switch again to return to
normal mode.
*1: Except F SPORT models of GS350/
GS300, and GS F
*2: F
SPORT models of GS350/
GS300
4
*1
Driving
*2
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
204
4-2. Driving procedures
Selecting shift ranges in the D position
To drive using temporary shift range selection, operate the “-” or “+” paddle shift
switch.
When the “-” paddle shift switch is operated, the shift range will be downshifted
to a range that enables engine braking force that is suitable to driving conditions.
When the “+” paddle shift switch is operated, the shift range will be one gear
upper than the gear in use during normal D position driving.
Changing the shift range allows restriction of the highest shift gear, preventing
unnecessary upshifting and enabling the level of engine braking force to be
selected.

GS350/GS300
1
Upshifting
2
Downshifting

GS F
6-speed models: The selected shift range, from D1 to D6, will be displayed in the
meter.
8-speed models: The selected shift range, from D1 to D8, will be displayed in the
meter.
To return to normal D position driving, the “+” paddle shift switch must be held down
for a period of time.
■ Shift ranges and their functions
Meter display
6-speed
models
8-speed
models
D2 - D6
D2 - D8
Function
A gear in the range between 1 and the selected gear is
automatically chosen depending on vehicle speed and
driving conditions
D1
Setting the gear at 1
A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking forces than a higher shift
range.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-2. Driving procedures
205
Selecting gears in the M position
To enter M mode, shift the shift lever to M. Gears can then be selected by operating the shift lever or paddle shift switches, allowing you to drive in the gear of
your choosing.

GS350/GS300

GS F
4
Driving
1
Upshifting
2
Downshifting
The gear changes once every time the shift lever or paddle shift switch is operated.
6-speed models: The selected gear, from M1 to M6, will be fixed and displayed in the
meter.
8-speed models: The selected gear, from M1 to M8, will be fixed and displayed in the
meter.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
206
4-2. Driving procedures
When in the M position, the gear will not change unless the shift lever or paddle
shift switches are operated.
However, even when in the M position, the gears will be automatically changed in
the following situation:
● When vehicle speed drops (downshift only).
● When the automatic transmission fluid or engine coolant temperature is low.
● GS350/GS300: When automatic transmission fluid temperature is high.
● GS350/GS300: When the needle of the tachometer is in the red zone (the
range which exceeds the allowable revs of the engine).
In the following situations, the gear will not shift even if the shift lever or paddle
shift switches are operated.
● “Slippery Road. Cannot Shift to Lower Gear.” is displayed on the multi-information display.
● The vehicle speed is low (upshift only).
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-2. Driving procedures
207
■ Automatic deactivation of shift range selection in the D position
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4
Driving
Shift range selection in the D position will be deactivated in the following situations:
● When the vehicle comes to a stop
● If the accelerator pedal is depressed for more than a certain period of time
● When the shift lever is shifted to other than D
■ To protect automatic transmission
When the temperature of the transmission fluid becomes high, protection control is performed temporarily. When “Transmission Fluid Temp High See Owner’s Manual” is displayed on the multi-information display, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■ Downshifting restrictions warning buzzer
To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may sometimes
be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even when the
shift lever or paddle shift switch is operated. (A buzzer will sound twice.)
■ Snow mode automatic deactivation
Snow mode is automatically deactivated if the engine switch is turned off after driving in
snow mode.
■ When driving with cruise control or dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range
activated
Even when performing the following actions with the intent of enabling engine braking,
engine braking will not activate because cruise control or dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range will not be canceled.
● 6-speed models: While driving in the D position, downshifting to 5 or 4.
(→P. 258, 270)
8-speed models: While driving in the D position, downshifting to 7, 6, 5 or 4.
(→P. 258, 270)
● When switching the driving mode to sport mode while driving in D position. (→P. 273)
■ Restraining sudden start (Drive-Start Control)
● When the following unusual operation is performed, the engine output may be
restrained.
• When the shift lever is shifted from R to D, D to R, N to R, P to D, or P to R (D
includes M) with the accelerator pedal depressed, a warning message appears on
the multi-information display. (→P. 441)
• When the accelerator pedal is depressed too much while the vehicle is in reverse.
■ Shift lock system
The shift lock system is a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift lever in starting.
The shift lever can be shifted from P only when the engine switch is in IGNITION ON
mode and the brake pedal is being depressed.
208
4-2. Driving procedures
■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
First, check whether the brake pedal is being depressed.
If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake pedal, there may be a problem with the shift lock system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that the shift lever
can be shifted.
Releasing the shift lock:
1 Press the parking brake switch to check that the parking brake is set. (→P. 211)
Parking brake indicator will come on.
2 Turn the engine switch to off.
3 Depress the brake pedal.
4 Pry the cover up with a flathead screwdriver
or equivalent tool.
To prevent damage to the cover, cover the tip
of the screwdriver with a rag.
5
Press the shift lock override button.
The shift lever can be shifted while the button
is pressed.
■ AI-SHIFT
● The AI-SHIFT automatically selects the suitable gear according to driver performance
and driving conditions.
The AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in D. (Shifting the shift
lever to the M position cancels the function.)
● 8-speed models: G AI-SHIFT automatically selects a suitable gear for sporty driving
according to driver’s input and driving conditions. G AI-SHIFT operates automatically
when the shift lever is in D and sport mode is selected for the driving mode. (Selecting
normal mode with the driving mode select switch or shifting the shift lever to the M
position cancels this function.)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-2. Driving procedures
209
WARNING
■ When driving on slippery road surfaces
Be careful of downshifting and sudden acceleration, as this could result in the vehicle
skidding to the side or spinning.
■ To prevent an accident when releasing the shift lock
Before pressing the shift lock override button, make sure to set the parking brake and
depress the brake pedal.
If the accelerator pedal is accidentally depress instead of the brake pedal when the shift
lock override button is pressed and the shift lever is shifted out of P, the vehicle may
suddenly start, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
4
Driving
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
210
4-2. Driving procedures
Turn signal lever
Operating instructions
The lever will return to its original position immediately after operation.
1
Right turn
2
Lane change to the right (move the
lever partway and release it)
The right hand signals will flash 3 times.
3
Lane change to the left (move the
lever partway and release it)
The left hand signals will flash 3 times.
4
Left turn
■ If the turn signals do not stop flashing after turning left or right, or if you want
to stop them flashing
Operate the lever in the opposite direction to either position 2 or 3 . If you
move the lever to either position 1 or 4 , the selected turn signals will flash.
■ Turn signals can be operated when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ If the indicator flashes faster than usual
Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out.
■ If the turn signals stop flashing before a lane change has been performed
Operate the lever again.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-2. Driving procedures
211
Parking brake
A selections can be made as desired from the following modes.
Manual mode
1
Sets the parking brake
The parking brake indicator light will
come on. (→P. 212)
Press and hold the parking brake switch
if an emergency occurs and it is necessary to operate the parking brake while
driving.
2
Releases the parking brake
Operate the parking brake switch while
depressing the brake pedal. Make sure
that the parking brake indicator light
goes off.
4
Automatic mode
The parking brake is set or released automatically according to shift lever operation.
Turns automatic mode on/off
● When the shift lever is moved out of
P, the parking brake will be released.
● When the shift lever is moved into P,
the parking brake will be set.
Operate the shift lever with the brake
pedal depressed.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Driving
U.S.A. Canada
212
4-2. Driving procedures
■ Parking brake operation
● When the engine switch is not in IGNITION ON mode, the parking brake cannot be
released using the parking brake switch.
● When the engine switch is not in IGNITION ON mode, automatic mode (automatic
brake setting and releasing) is not available.
● If the parking brake is operated repeatedly over a short period of time, the system may
restrict operation to prevent overheating. If this happens, refrain from operating the
parking brake. Normal operation will return after about 1 minute.
● In situations such as when parking on a steep slope*, the maximum amount of braking
force can be used by pressing the parking brake switch with the parking brake already
set.
*: Use wheel chocks when parking on a steep slope.
■ Parking brake operation sound
When the parking brake operates, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard. This
does not indicate a malfunction.
■ Parking brake indicator light
● Depending on the engine switch mode, the parking brake indicator light will come on
and stay on as described below:
IGNITION ON mode: Comes on until the parking brake is released.
Not in IGNITION ON mode: Stays on for approximately 15 seconds.
● When the engine switch is turned off with the parking brake set, the parking brake indicator light will stay on for about 15 seconds. This does not indicate a malfunction.
■ When there is a malfunction in the system
Warning lights and/or warning message will turn on or flash. (→P. 436, 442)
Depending on the condition, the parking brake indicator light may flash.
■ Parking the vehicle
→P. 182
■ Parking brake engaged warning buzzer
→P. 445
■ Usage in winter time
→P. 297
NOTICE
■ When parking the vehicle
Before you leave the vehicle, set the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P and make
sure that the vehicle does not move.
■ When the system malfunctions
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and check the warning messages.
■ When the parking brake cannot be released due to a malfunction
Use the parking brake release tool to manually release the parking brake. (→P. 499)
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-2. Driving procedures
213
Brake Hold
The brake hold system keeps the brake applied when the shift lever is in D, M
or N with the system on and the brake pedal has been depressed to stop the
vehicle. The system releases the brake when the accelerator pedal is
depressed with the shift lever in D or M to allow smooth start off.
Turns the brake hold system on
The brake hold standby indicator
(green) comes on. While the system is
holding the brake, the brake hold operated indicator (yellow) comes on.
4
The brake hold system cannot be turned on in the following conditions:
● The driver’s door is not closed.
● The driver is not wearing the seat belt.
● “EPB Activation Stopped Incompletely” or “Electronic Parking Brake Malfunction Visit
Your Dealer” is displayed on the multi-information display.
If any of the conditions above are detected when the brake hold system is enabled, the
system will turn off and the brake hold standby indicator light will go off. In addition, if any
of the conditions are detected while the system is holding the brake, a warning buzzer
will sound and a message will be shown on the multi-information display. The parking
brake will then be set automatically.
■ Brake hold function
● If the brake pedal is left released for a period of about 3 minutes after the system has
started holding the brake, the parking brake will be set automatically. In this case, a
warning buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display.
● To turn the system off while the system is holding the brake, firmly depress the brake
pedal and press the button again.
● The brake hold function may not hold the vehicle when the vehicle is on a steep incline.
In this situation, it may be necessary for the driver to apply the brakes. A warning
buzzer will sound and the multi-information display will inform the driver of this situation. (→P. 441)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Driving
■ Brake hold system operating conditions
214
4-2. Driving procedures
■ When the parking brake is set automatically while the system is holding the brakes
The parking brake will not be released automatically. Perform one of the following procedures to release the parking brake and confirm that the parking brake indicator light
turns off. (→P. 211)
● With the brake pedal depressed, operate the parking brake switch.
● Fasten your seat belt, check that the shift lever is in either D or R and slowly depress the
accelerator pedal.
■ Warning message and buzzers
Warning messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform
the driver of the need for caution. (→P. 441)
WARNING
■ When the vehicle is on a steep incline
When using the brake hold system on a steep incline exercise caution. The brake hold
function may not hold the vehicle in such a situation.
■ When stopped on a slippery road
The system cannot stop the vehicle when the gripping ability of the tires has been
exceeded. Do not use the system when stopped on a slippery road.
NOTICE
■ When parking the vehicle
The brake hold system is not designed for use when parking the vehicle for a long
period of time. Turning the engine switch off while the system is holding the brake may
release the brake, which would cause the vehicle to move. When operating the engine
switch, depress the brake pedal, set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-2. Driving procedures
215
ASC (Active Sound Control) (GS F)
The ASC system directs certain sounds from the front and rear of the cabin to
the vehicle interior, and harmonizes these sounds with the actual sound of the
engine and exhaust in order to allow the driver to feel acceleration and the
state of the engine more strongly.
Disabling the ASC system
Press the ASC switch.
The indicator on switch will turn off.
Press the switch again to turn the system
back on.
Even if the indicator is illuminated, when
the driving mode select switch is in Normal, Eco drive or customized mode
(powertrain control is not set to
“POWER”), ASC does not operate.
■ Automatic reactivation of ASC system
Even after the ASC system has been turned off, turning the engine off and then on again
will automatically reactivate the ASC system.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4
Driving
The ASC system can be operated
when the driving mode select switch is
in the following modes. (→P. 276)
● SPORT S mode/customized mode
(powertrain control is set to
“POWER”): Sounds are output from
the rear.
● SPORT S+ mode: When the engine
speed is in the low-to-medium
speed range, sounds are output
from the rear. At high engine speeds,
sounds are mainly output from the
front.
216
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Headlight switch
The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.
Operating instructions
Turning the end of the lever turns on the lights as follows:
The side marker, parking, tail,
license plate, instrument panel
lights, and daytime running
lights (→P. 217) turn on.
1
2
The headlights and all lights
listed above (except daytime
running lights) turn on.
3
The headlights, daytime running lights (→P. 217) and all
the lights listed above turn on
and off automatically.
(When the engine switch is in
IGNITION ON mode.)
4
Off
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
The daytime running lights
turn on. (→P. 217)
Turning on the high beam headlights
1
With the headlights on, push the
lever away from you to turn on the
high beams.
Pull the lever toward you to the center
position to turn the high beams off.
2
Pull the lever toward you and release
it to flash the high beams once.
You can flash the high beams with the
headlights on or off.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
U.S.A. Canada
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
217
AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System) (if equipped)
AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System) secures excellent visibility at intersections
and on curves by automatically adjusting the direction of the light axis of the
headlights according to vehicle speed and the degree of the tire’s angle as controlled by steering input.
AFS operates at speeds of 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher.
■ Deactivating AFS
Settings can be changed from
(→P. 100).
1
Press
or
2
Press
on the meter control
switch and select “Off”.
on the multi-information display
on the meter control switch and select “AFS”.
The indicator turns on when the AFS
is deactivated.
4
Driving
■ Daytime running light system
● The daytime running lights illuminate using the same lights as the parking lights and illu-
minate brighter than the parking lights.
● To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers during daytime driving, the daytime
running lights turn on automatically when all of the following conditions are met. (The
daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.)
• The engine is running
• The parking brake is released
• The headlight switch is in the
(Canada only),
or “AUTO”* position
*: When the surroundings are bright
The daytime running lights remain on after they illuminate, even if the parking brake is set
again.
● For the U.S.A.: Daytime running lights can be turned off by operating the switch.
● Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system offers greater
durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help improve fuel economy.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
218
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
■ Headlight control sensor
The sensor may not function properly if an
object is placed on the sensor, or anything that
blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield.
Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting
the level of ambient light and may cause the
automatic headlight system to malfunction.
■ Automatic light off system
● When the headlights are on: The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds after the
engine switch is turned off and a door is opened and all of the doors and trunk are
closed. (The lights turn off immediately if
on the key is pressed twice after all the
doors are closed.)
● When only the tail lights are on: The tail lights turn off automatically if the engine switch
is turned off and the driver’s door is opened.
To turn the lights on again, turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode, or turn the
light switch off once and then back to
or
.
If any of the doors or trunk lid is kept open, the lights automatically turn off after 20 minutes.
■ Light reminder buzzer
A buzzer sounds when the engine switch is turned off or turned to ACCESSORY mode
and the driver’s door is opened while the lights are turned on.
■ Automatic headlight leveling system
The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the headlights do not interfere with other road users.
■ If the “AFS OFF” indicator flashes
It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed.
(Customizable features: →P. 545)
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
219
Automatic High Beam∗
The Automatic High Beam uses an in-vehicle camera sensor to assess the
brightness of streetlights, the lights of vehicles ahead, etc., and automatically
turns the high beam on or off as necessary.
WARNING
■ Limitations of the Automatic High Beam
Do not rely on the Automatic High Beam. Always drive safely, taking care to observe
your surroundings and turning the high beam on or off manually if necessary.
■ To prevent incorrect operation of the Automatic High Beam system
Do not overload the vehicle.
4
Activating the Automatic High Beam system
Push the lever away from you with
the headlight switch in the
or
position.
2
Press the Automatic High Beam
switch.
Driving
1
The Automatic High Beam indicator will
come on when the headlights are turned
on automatically to indicate that the system is active.
∗: If equipped
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
220
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Turning the high beam on/off manually
■ Switching to low beam
Pull the lever to the original position.
The Automatic High Beam indicator
will turn off.
Push the lever away from you to activate the Automatic High Beam system again.
■ Switching to high beam
Press the Automatic High Beam
switch.
The Automatic High Beam indicator
will turn off and the high beam indicator will turn on.
Press the switch to activate the Automatic High Beam system again.
■ High beam automatic turning on or off conditions
● When all of the following conditions are fulfilled, the high beam will be automatically
turned on:
• Vehicle speed is above approximately 21 mph (34 km/h).
• The area ahead of the vehicle is dark.
• There are no vehicles ahead with headlights or tail lights turned on.
• There are few streetlights on the road ahead.
● If any of the following conditions are fulfilled, high beam will be automatically turned off:
• Vehicle speed drops below approximately 17 mph (27 km/h).
• The area ahead of the vehicle is not dark.
• Oncoming or preceding vehicles have headlights or tail lights turned on.
• There are many streetlights on the road ahead.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
221
■ Camera sensor detection information
● The high beam may not be automatically turned off in the following situations:
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4
Driving
• When oncoming vehicles suddenly appear from a curve
• When the vehicle is cut in front of by another vehicle
• When vehicles ahead are hidden from sight due to repeated curves, road dividers or
roadside trees
• When vehicles ahead appear from the faraway lane on wide road
• When vehicles ahead have no lights
● The high beam may be turned off if a vehicle ahead that is using fog lights without using
the headlights is detected.
● House lights, street lights, traffic signals, and illuminated billboards or signs may cause
the high beam to switch to the low beams, or the low beams to remain on.
● The following factors may affect the amount of time taken to turn the high beam on or
off:
• The brightness of headlights, fog lights, and tail lights of vehicles ahead
• The movement and direction of vehicles ahead
• When vehicle ahead only has operational lights on one side
• When vehicle ahead is a two-wheeled vehicle
• The condition of the road (gradient, curve, condition of the road surface etc.)
• The number of passengers and amount of luggage
● The high beam may be turned on or off when the driver does not expect it.
● Bicycles or similar objects may not be detected.
● In the situations shown below, the system may not be able to accurately detect surrounding brightness levels. This may cause the low beams to remain on or the high
beams to cause problems for pedestrians, vehicles ahead or other parties. In these
cases, manually switch between the high and low beams.
• In bad weather (rain, snow, fog, sandstorms etc.)
• The windshield is obscured by fog, mist, ice, dirt etc.
• The windshield is cracked or damaged.
• The camera sensor is deformed or dirty.
• The camera sensor temperature is extremely high.
• Surrounding brightness levels are equal to those of headlights, tail lights or fog lights.
• Vehicles ahead have headlights that are either switched off, dirty, are changing color,
or are not aimed properly.
• When driving through an area of intermittently changing brightness and darkness.
• When frequently and repeatedly driving ascending/descending roads, or roads with
rough, bumpy or uneven surfaces (such as stone-paved roads, gravel tracks etc.).
• When frequently and repeatedly taking curves or driving on a winding road.
• There is a highly reflective object ahead of the vehicle, such as a sign or a mirror.
• The back of a vehicle ahead is highly reflective, such as a container on a truck.
• The vehicle’s headlights are damaged or dirty, or are not aimed properly.
• The vehicle is listing or tilting, due to a flat tire, a trailer being towed etc.
• The high beam and low beam are repeatedly being switched between in an abnormal manner.
• The driver believes that the high beam may be causing problems or distress to other
drivers or pedestrians nearby.
222
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
■ Temporarily lowering sensor sensitivity
The sensitivity of the sensor can be temporarily lowered.
Turn the engine switch off while the following conditions are met.
1
• The headlight switch is in
or
.
• The headlight switch lever is in high beam position.
• Automatic High Beam switch is on.
2 Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.
3 Within 30 seconds after 2 , repeat pulling the headlight switch lever to the original
position then pushing it to the high beam position quickly 10 times, then leave the lever
in high beam position.
4 If the sensitivity is changed, the Automatic High Beam indicator is turn on and off 3
times.
Automatic High Beam (headlights) may turn on even the vehicle is stopped.
■ Warning message
Warning messages are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform the driver of
the need for caution. (→P. 441)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
223
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Windshield wipers and washer
Operating the wiper lever
Operate the lever as follows to operate the wipers. The lever will return to its
original position immediately after operation.

Intermittent windshield wipers with interval adjuster
(U.S.A.) or
1
(Canada)
Move the lever up 2 levels
2
Move the lever up 1 level
3
(U.S.A.) or
(Canada)
Move the lever down 1 level
(U.S.A.) or
4
4
(Canada)
Driving
Move the lever down 2 levels
Operation
Status
before
operation
or
or
or
Off
Temporary
operation
Temporary
operation
Intermittent
operation
High speed
operation
Intermittent
operation
Off
Off
Low speed
operation
High speed
operation
Low speed
operation
Off
Intermittent
operation
High speed
operation
High speed
operation
High speed
operation
Off
Low speed
operation
No change
No change
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
224
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Wiper intervals can be adjusted when intermittent operation is selected.
5
Increases the intermittent windshield
wiper frequency
6
Decreases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency
7
Washer/wiper dual operation
Wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts.
Vehicles with headlight cleaners:
When the headlights are on and the
lever is pulled and held, the headlight
cleaners will operate once. After this,
the headlight cleaners will operate
every 5th time the lever is pulled.

1
Rain-sensing windshield wipers
(U.S.A.) or
(Canada)
Move the lever up 2 levels
2
Move the lever up 1 level
3
(U.S.A.) or
(Canada)
Move the lever down 1 level
4
(U.S.A.) or
(Canada)
Move the lever down 2 levels
5
AUTO mode on/off switch
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
AUTO mode
indicator
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
225
With AUTO mode selected, the wipers will operate automatically when the sensor
detects falling rain. The system automatically adjusts wiper timing in accordance with
rain volume and vehicle speed.
AUTO mode indicator will turn on when AUTO mode is selected.
Operation
or
Status
before
operation
or
or
Off
Temporary
operation
Temporary
operation
Low speed
operation
High speed
operation
Low speed
operation
Off
Off
High speed
operation
High speed
operation
High speed
operation
Off
Low speed
operation
No change
No change
Off
Temporary
operation*1
Low speed
operation*2
High speed
operation*2
AUTO
mode
Intermittent
operation
Continuously
No change
When AUTO mode is selected, the sensor sensitivity can be adjusted by turning
the switch ring.
6
Increases the sensitivity
7
Decreases the sensitivity
8
Washer/wiper dual operation
Wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts.
Vehicles with headlight cleaners:
When the headlights are on and the
lever is pulled and held, the headlight
cleaners will operate once. After this,
the headlight cleaners will operate
every 5th time the lever is pulled.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Driving
*1: After temporary operation, the mode will return to AUTO mode.
*2: AUTO mode will be canceled.
4
226
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Switching between the intermittent windshield wipers and rain-sensing
windshield wipers (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)
The wipers can be used as intermittent windshield wipers, which operate regardless of vehicle speed or amount of raindrops. The intermittent windshield wiper
operation can be switched when the vehicle is stopped and the wiper is off. The
wiper operation cannot be switched during AUTO mode or while the intermittent windshield wipers are operating.
Press and hold
until the AUTO
mode indicator stops flashing.
If
is pressed and held until the
AUTO mode indicator stops flashing
again, it will return to its previous state.
■ The windshield wiper and washer can be operated when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Dripping prevention wiper sweep
After washing and wiping operation several times, the wipers operate one more time
after a short delay to prevent dripping.
However, the last sweep will not happen while the vehicle is moving.
■ Effects of vehicle speed on wiper operation
● Intermittent windshield wipers interval changes when the vehicle is stopped.
● With low speed operation selected, wiper operation will be switched from low speed to
intermittent operation only when the vehicle is stationary.
■ Raindrop sensor
● The raindrop sensor judges the amount of
raindrops.
An optical sensor is adopted. It may not operate properly when sunlight from the rising or
setting of the sun intermittently strikes the
windshield, or if bugs etc. are present on the
windshield.
● If AUTO mode is selected while the engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode, the wip-
ers will operate once to show that AUTO mode is activated.
● If the temperature of the raindrop sensor is 185°F (85°C) or higher, or -22°F
(-30°C) or lower, automatic operation may not occur. In this case, operate the
wipers in any mode other than AUTO mode.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
227
■ When the windshield wipers are in temporary operation
AUTO mode cannot be activated even if
is pressed.
■ If no windshield washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir.
WARNING
■ Caution regarding the use of windshield wipers in AUTO mode
The windshield wipers may operate unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or the windshield is subject to vibration in AUTO mode. Take care that your fingers or anything
else do not become caught in the windshield wipers.
■ Caution regarding the use of washer fluid
When it is cold, do not use the washer fluid until the windshield becomes warm. The
fluid may freeze on the windshield and cause low visibility. This may lead to an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
4
NOTICE
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
■ When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle
Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled toward you and
held continually.
■ When a nozzle becomes blocked
In this case, contact your Lexus dealer.
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
■ When standing the windshield wipers up
Raise the wipers in line with the windshield. (→P. 299)
Failure to do so may result in damage to the wipers and/or the hood.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Driving
■ When the windshield is dry
228
4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap
Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap:
Before refueling the vehicle
● Turn the engine switch off and ensure that all the doors and windows are
closed.
● Confirm the type of fuel.
■ Fuel types
→P. 532
■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline
To help prevent incorrect fueling, your vehicle has a fuel tank opening that only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
WARNING
■ When refueling the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so may
result in death or serious injury.
● After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel door, touch an unpainted metal
surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to discharge static electricity
before refueling because sparks resulting from static electricity can cause fuel vapors
to ignite while refueling.
● Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.
A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait until the
sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressurized fuel
may spray out the filler neck and cause injury.
● Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their body to come
close to an open fuel tank.
● Do not inhale vaporized fuel.
Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
● Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
● Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically charged.
This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.
■ When refueling
Observe the following precautions to prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel tank:
● Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck.
● Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off.
● Do not top off the fuel tank.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-4. Refueling
229
NOTICE
■ Refueling
Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission control system to
operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle’s painted surface.
Opening the fuel tank cap
1
With the doors unlocked, press the
center of the rear edge of the fuel
filler door.
Push until you hear a click and take your
hand away to slightly open the fuel filler
door. Then open the door fully by hand.
4
Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to
remove it and put it into the holder
on the fuel filler door.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Driving
2
230
4-4. Refueling
■ When the fuel filler door cannot be opened by pressing the rearward of the fuel filler
door
Remove the cover inside the trunk and pull the
lever.
Closing the fuel tank cap
1
After refueling, turn the fuel tank cap
until you hear a click. Once the cap
is released, it will turn slightly in the
opposite direction.
2
Close the fuel filler door, and press
the center of the rear edge of the
fuel filler door until you hear a click.
When you lock the doors, the fuel filler
door will lock also.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-4. Refueling
231
■ Fuel filler door lock condition
The fuel filler door may not be locked even when the vehicle’s doors are locked in the following conditions:
● When operating the door lock button inside the vehicle
● When the automatic door locking system is operated (→P. 140)
● When the fuel filler door is closed after the vehicle’s doors are locked
WARNING
■ When replacing the fuel tank cap
Do not use anything but a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle. Doing
so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious injury.
4
Driving
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
232
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Lexus Safety System+∗
The Lexus Safety System+ consists of the following drive assist systems and
contributes to a safe and comfortable driving experience:
◆ PCS (Pre-Collision System)
→P. 238
◆ LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist)
→P. 249
◆ Automatic High Beam
→P. 219
◆ Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range
→P. 258
WARNING
■ Lexus Safety System+
The Lexus Safety System+ is designed to operate under the assumption that the driver
will drive safely, and is designed to help reduce the impact to the occupants and the
vehicle in the case of a collision or assist the driver in normal driving conditions.
As there is a limit to the degree of recognition accuracy and control performance that
this system can provide, do not overly rely on this system. The driver is always responsible for paying attention to the vehicle’s surroundings and driving safely.
∗: If equipped
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
233
Vehicle data recording
The pre-collision system is equipped with a sophisticated computer that will
record certain data, such as:
• Accelerator status
• Brake status
• Vehicle speed
• Operation status of the pre-collision system functions
• Information (such as the distance and relative speed between your vehicle
and the vehicle ahead or other objects)
• Images from the camera sensor (available only when the pre-collision braking
function or the pre-collision brake assist function was operating)
The pre-collision system does not record conversations, sounds or images of the
inside of the vehicle.
● Data usage
Lexus may use the data recorded in this computer to diagnose malfunctions,
conduct research and development, and improve quality.
The image recording function can be disabled. However, if the function is disabled, data from when the pre-collision system operates will not be available.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Driving
Lexus will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:
• With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if
the vehicle is leased
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government agency
• For use by Lexus in a lawsuit
• For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or
vehicle owner
● Recorded images can be erased using a specialized device.
4
234
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Sensors
Two types of sensors, located behind the front grille and windshield, detect information necessary to operate the drive assist systems.
1
Radar sensor
2
Camera sensor
WARNING
■ To avoid malfunction of the radar sensor
Observe the following precautions.
Otherwise, the radar sensor may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
● Keep the radar sensor and front grille emblem clean at all times.
Radar sensor
Front grille emblem
If the front of the radar sensor or the front or
back of the front grille emblem is dirty or
covered with water droplets, snow, etc., clean
it.
Clean the radar sensor and front grille
emblem with a soft cloth so you do not mark
or damage them.
1
2
● Do not attach accessories, stickers (including transparent stickers) or other items to
the radar sensor, front grille emblem or surrounding area.
● Do not subject the radar sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.
If the radar sensor, front grille, or front bumper has been subjected to a strong impact,
have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
● Do not disassemble the radar sensor.
● Do not modify or paint the radar sensor, front grille emblem or surrounding area.
● If the radar sensor, front grille, or front bumper needs to be removed and installed, or
replaced, contact your Lexus dealer.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
235
WARNING
■ To avoid malfunction of the camera sensor
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4
Driving
Observe the following precautions.
Otherwise, the camera sensor may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
● Keep the windshield clean at all times.
• If the windshield is dirty or covered with an oily film, water droplets, snow, etc.,
clear the windshield.
• If a glass coating agent is applied to the windshield, it will still be necessary to use
the windshield wipers to remove water droplets, etc. from the area of the windshield in front of the camera sensor.
• If the inner side of the windshield where the camera sensor is installed is dirty, contact your Lexus dealer.
● Do not attach objects, such as stickers, transparent stickers, etc., and so forth, to the outer
side of the windshield in front of the camera
sensor (shaded area in the illustration).
A: From the top of the windshield to approximately 0.4 in. (1 cm) below the bottom of the
camera sensor
B: Approximately 7.9 in. (20 cm) (Approximately 4.0 in. (10 cm) to the right and left
from the center of the camera sensor)
● If the part of the windshield in front of the camera sensor is fogged up or covered with
condensation or ice, use the windshield defogger to remove the fog, condensation or
ice. (→P. 314)
● If water droplets cannot be properly removed from the area of the windshield in front
of the camera sensor by the windshield wipers, replace the wiper insert or wiper
blade.
If the wiper inserts or wiper blades need to be replaced, contact your Lexus dealer.
● Do not attach window tinting to the windshield.
● Replace the windshield if it is damaged or cracked.
If the windshield needs to be replaced, contact your Lexus dealer.
● Do not get the camera sensor wet.
● Do not allow bright lights to shine into the camera sensor.
● Do not dirty or damage the camera sensor.
When cleaning the inside of the windshield, do not allow glass cleaner to contact the
lens. Also, do not touch the lens.
If the lens is dirty or damaged, contact your Lexus dealer.
● Do not subject the camera sensor to a strong impact.
● Do not change the installation position or direction of the camera sensor or remove it.
● Do not disassemble the camera sensor.
236
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
● Do not modify any components of the vehicle around the camera sensor (inside rear
view mirror, etc.) or ceiling.
● Do not attach any accessories that may obstruct the camera sensor to the hood, front
grille or front bumper. Contact your Lexus dealer for details.
● If a surfboard or other long object is to be mounted on the roof, make sure that it will
not obstruct the camera sensor.
● Do not modify the headlights or other lights.
■ Certification

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, Guam, Puerto Rico and NATO Germany
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems

237
For vehicles sold in Canada
4
Driving
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
238
4-5. Using the driving support systems
PCS (Pre-Collision System)∗
The pre-collision system uses a radar sensor and camera sensor to detect
vehicles and pedestrians in front of your vehicle. When the system determines
that the possibility of a frontal collision with a vehicle or pedestrian is high, a
warning operates to urge the driver to take evasive action and the potential
brake pressure is increased to help the driver avoid the collision. If the system
determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with a vehicle or pedestrian is extremely high, the brakes are automatically applied to help avoid the
collision or help reduce the impact of the collision.
The pre-collision system can be disabled/enabled and the warning timing can
be changed. (→P. 241)
◆ Pre-collision warning
When the system determines that
the possibility of a frontal collision is
high, a buzzer will sound and a warning message will be displayed on the
multi-information display to urge the
driver to take evasive action.
◆ Pre-collision brake assist
When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high,
the system applies greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake
pedal is depressed.
∗: If equipped
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
239
◆ Pre-collision braking
When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high,
the system warns the driver. If the system determines that the possibility of a
frontal collision is extremely high, the brakes are automatically applied to help
avoid the collision or reduce the collision speed.
◆ Suspension control (if equipped)
When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high,
the Adaptive Variable Suspension System (→P. 289) will control the damping
force of the shock absorbers to help maintain an appropriate vehicle posture.
◆ Steering control (if equipped)
When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high
and the driver is operating the steering wheel, the LDH system (→P. 289) will
control the turning angle of the front and rear wheels and effort necessary to
turn the steering wheel to help enhance steering responsiveness.
■ Limitations of the pre-collision system
● The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to
observe your surroundings.
Do not use the pre-collision system instead of normal braking operations under any
circumstances. This system will not prevent collisions or lessen collision damage or
injury in every situation. Do not overly rely on this system. Failure to do so may lead to
an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
● Although this system is designed to help avoid a collision or help reduce the impact of
the collision, its effectiveness may change according to various conditions, therefore
the system may not always be able to achieve the same level of performance.
Read the following conditions carefully. Do not overly rely on this system and always
drive carefully.
• Conditions under which the system may operate even if there is no possibility of a
collision: →P. 243
• Conditions under which the system may not operate properly: →P. 246
● Do not attempt to test the operation of the pre-collision system yourself, as the system
may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Driving
WARNING
4
240
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
■ Pre-collision braking
● When the pre-collision braking function is operating, a large amount of braking force
will be applied.
● If the vehicle is stopped by the operation of the pre-collision braking function, the pre-
collision braking function operation will be canceled after approximately 2 seconds.
Depress the brake pedal as necessary.
● The pre-collision braking function may not operate if certain operations are performed by the driver. If the accelerator pedal is being depressed strongly or the steering wheel is being turned, the system may determine that the driver is taking evasive
action and possibly prevent the pre-collision braking function from operating.
● In some situations, while the pre-collision braking function is operating, operation of
the function may be canceled if the accelerator pedal is depressed strongly or the
steering wheel is turned and the system determines that the driver is taking evasive
action.
● If the brake pedal is being depressed, the system may determine that the driver is taking evasive action and possibly delay the operation timing of the pre-collision braking
function.
■ When to disable the pre-collision system
In the following situations, disable the system, as it may not operate properly, possibly
leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury:
● When the vehicle is being towed
● When your vehicle is towing another vehicle
● When transporting the vehicle via truck, boat, train or similar means of transportation
● When the vehicle is raised on a lift with the engine running and the tires are allowed to
rotate freely
● When inspecting the vehicle using a drum tester such as a chassis dynamometer or
speedometer tester, or when using an on vehicle wheel balancer
● When a strong impact is applied to the front bumper or front grille, due to an accident
or other reasons
● If the vehicle cannot be driven in a stable manner, such as when the vehicle has been
in an accident or is malfunctioning
● When the vehicle is driven in a sporty manner or off-road
● When the tires are not properly inflated
● When the tires are very worn
● When tires of a size other than specified are installed
● When tire chains are installed
● When a compact spare tire or an emergency tire puncture repair kit is used
● If equipment (snow plow, etc.) that may obstruct the radar sensor or camera sensor is
temporarily installed to the vehicle
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
241
Changing settings of the pre-collision system
■ Enabling/disabling the pre-collision system
The pre-collision system can be enabled/disabled on
(→P. 100,
108) of the multi-information display.
The system is automatically enabled each time the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.
If the system is disabled, the PCS
warning light will turn on and a message will be displayed on the multiinformation display.
4
The pre-collision warning timing can be changed on
of the multi-information display.
(→P. 100, 108)
The operation timing setting is retained when the engine switch is turned off.
1
Far
The warning will begin to operate
earlier than with the default timing.
2
Middle
This is the default setting.
3
Near
The warning will begin to operate
later than with the default timing.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Driving
■ Changing the pre-collision warning timing
242
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Operational conditions
The pre-collision system is enabled and the system determines that the possibility of a
frontal collision with a vehicle or pedestrian is high.
Each function is operational at the following speeds:
● Pre-collision warning:
• Vehicle speed is between approximately 7 and 110 mph (10 and 180 km/h). (For
detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is between approximately 7 and 50 mph [10
and 80 km/h].)
• The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead is
approximately 7 mph (10 km/h) or more.
● Pre-collision brake assist:
• Vehicle speed is between approximately 20 and 110 mph (30 and 180 km/h). (For
detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is between approximately 20 and 50 mph
[30 and 80 km/h].)
• The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead is
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) or more.
● Pre-collision braking:
• Vehicle speed is between approximately 7 and 110 mph (10 and 180 km/h). (For
detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is between approximately 7 and 50 mph [10
and 80 km/h].)
• The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead is
approximately 7 mph (10 km/h) or more.
The system may not operate in the following situations:
● If a battery terminal has been disconnected and reconnected and then the vehicle has
not been driven for a certain amount of time
● If the shift lever is in R
● If VSC is disabled (only the pre-collision warning function will be operational)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
243
■ Pedestrian detection function
The pre-collision system detects pedestrians
based on the size, profile, and motion of a
detected object. However, a pedestrian may not
be detected depending on the surrounding
brightness and the motion, posture, and angle of
the detected object, preventing the system from
operating properly. (→P. 247)
■ Cancelation of the pre-collision braking
• When passing a vehicle in an oncoming
lane that is stopped to make a right/left turn
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4
Driving
If either of the following occur while the pre-collision braking function is operating, it will
be canceled:
● The accelerator pedal is depressed strongly.
● The steering wheel is turned sharply or abruptly.
■ Conditions under which the system may operate even if there is no possibility of a collision
● In some situations such as the following, the system may determine that there is a possibility of a frontal collision and operate.
• When passing a vehicle or pedestrian
• When changing lanes while overtaking a preceding vehicle
• When overtaking a preceding vehicle that is changing lanes
• When overtaking a preceding vehicle that
is making a left/right turn
244
4-5. Using the driving support systems
• When driving on a road where relative
location to vehicle ahead in an adjacent
lane may change, such as on a winding
road
• When rapidly closing on a vehicle ahead
• If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered, such as when the road surface is
uneven or undulating
• When approaching objects on the roadside, such as guardrails, utility poles, trees, or
walls
• When there is a vehicle, pedestrian, or
object by the roadside at the entrance of a
curve
• When driving on a narrow path surrounded by a structure, such as in a tunnel or on
an iron bridge
• When there is a metal object (manhole cover, steel plate, etc.), steps, or a protrusion
on the road surface or roadside
• When a crossing pedestrian approaches
very close to the vehicle
• When passing through a place with a low
structure above the road (low ceiling, traffic
sign, etc.)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
245
• When passing under an object (billboard,
etc.) at the top of an uphill road
• When rapidly closing on an electric toll gate barrier, parking area barrier, or other
barrier that opens and closes
• When using an automatic car wash
• When driving through or under objects
that may contact the vehicle, such as thick
grass, tree branches, or a banner
4
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Driving
• When the vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc. from a vehicle ahead
• When driving through steam or smoke
• When there are patterns or paint on the road or a wall that may be mistaken for a
vehicle or pedestrian
• When driving near an object that reflects radio waves, such as a large truck or
guardrail
• When driving near a TV tower, broadcasting station, electric power plant, or other
location where strong radio waves or electrical noise may be present
246
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Situations in which the system may not operate properly
● In some situations such as the following, a vehicle may not be detected by the radar
sensor and camera sensor, preventing the system from operating properly:
• If an oncoming vehicle is approaching your vehicle
• If a vehicle ahead is a motorcycle or bicycle
• When approaching the side or front of a vehicle
• If a preceding vehicle has a small rear end, such as an unloaded truck
• If a preceding vehicle has a low rear end,
such as a low bed trailer
• If a vehicle ahead is carrying a load which protrudes past its rear bumper
• If a vehicle ahead has extremely high
ground clearance
•
•
•
•
If a vehicle ahead is irregularly shaped, such as a tractor or side car
If the sun or other light is shining directly on a vehicle ahead
If a vehicle cuts in front of your vehicle or emerges from beside a vehicle
If a vehicle ahead makes an abrupt maneuver (such as sudden swerving, acceleration or deceleration)
• When suddenly cutting behind a preceding vehicle
• When a vehicle ahead is not directly in front
of your vehicle
•
•
•
•
When driving in inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow or a sandstorm
When the vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc. from a vehicle ahead
When driving through steam or smoke
When driving in a place where the surrounding brightness changes suddenly, such
as at the entrance or exit of a tunnel
• When a very bright light, such as the sun or the headlights of oncoming traffic, shines
directly into the camera sensor
• When the surrounding area is dim, such as at dawn or dusk, or while at night or in a
tunnel
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
247
• After the engine has started the vehicle has not been driven for a certain amount of
time
• While making a left/right turn and for a few seconds after making a left/right turn
• While driving on a curve and for a few seconds after driving on a curve
• If your vehicle is skidding
• If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4
Driving
• If the wheels are misaligned
• If a wiper blade is blocking the camera sensor
• The vehicle is wobbling.
• The vehicle is being driven at extremely high speeds.
• When driving on a hill
• If the radar sensor or camera sensor is misaligned
● In some situations such as the following, sufficient braking force may not be obtained,
preventing the system from performing properly:
• If the braking functions cannot operate to their full extent, such as when the brake
parts are extremely cold, extremely hot, or wet
• If the vehicle is not properly maintained (brakes or tires are excessively worn,
improper tire inflation pressure, etc.)
• When the vehicle is being driven on a gravel road or other slippery surface
● Some pedestrians such as the following may not be detected by the radar sensor and
camera sensor, preventing the system from operating properly:
• Pedestrians shorter than approximately 3.2 ft. (1 m) or taller than approximately
6.5 ft. (2 m)
• Pedestrians wearing oversized clothing (a rain coat, long skirt, etc.), making their silhouette obscure
• Pedestrians who are carrying large baggage, holding an umbrella, etc., hiding part
of their body
• Pedestrians who are bending forward or squatting
• Pedestrians who are pushing a stroller, wheelchair, bicycle or other vehicle
• Groups of pedestrians which are close together
• Pedestrians who are wearing white and look extremely bright
• Pedestrians in the dark, such as at night or while in a tunnel
• Pedestrians whose clothing appears to be nearly the same color or brightness as
their surroundings
• Pedestrians near walls, fences, guardrails, or large objects
• Pedestrians who are on a metal object (manhole cover, steel plate, etc.) on the road
• Pedestrians who are walking fast
• Pedestrians who are changing speed abruptly
• Pedestrians running out from behind a vehicle or a large object
• Pedestrians who are extremely close to the side of the vehicle (outside rear view
mirror, etc.)
248
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ If the PCS warning light flashes or illuminates and a warning message is displayed on
the multi-information display
The pre-collision system may be temporarily unavailable or there may be a malfunction
in the system.
● In the following situations, the warning light will turn off, the message will disappear and
the system will become operational when normal operating conditions return:
• When the radar sensor or camera sensor or the area around either sensor is hot,
such as in the sun
• When the radar sensor or camera sensor or the area around either sensor is cold,
such as in an extremely cold environment
• When a front sensor is dirty or covered with snow, etc.
• When the part of the windshield in front of the camera sensor is fogged up or covered with condensation or ice (Defogging the windshield: →P. 314)
• If the camera sensor is obstructed, such as when the hood is open or a sticker is
attached to the windshield near the camera sensor
● If the PCS warning light continues to flash or remains illuminated or the warning message does not disappear even though the vehicle has returned to normal, the system
may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
■ If VSC is disabled
● If VSC is disabled (→P. 291), the pre-collision brake assist and pre-collision braking
functions are also disabled.
● The PCS warning light will turn on and “VSC Turned Off Pre-Collision Brake System
Unavailable” will be displayed on the multi-information display.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
249
LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist)∗
Summary of functions
When driving on highways and freeways with white or yellow lines, this function
alerts the driver when the vehicle might depart from its lane and provides assistance by operating the steering wheel to keep the vehicle in its lane. Furthermore, the system also provides steering assistance when dynamic radar cruise
control with full-speed range is operating to keep the vehicle in its lane.
The LKA system recognizes visible
white or yellow lines with the camera
sensor on the upper portion of the front
windshield.
4
Driving
Functions included in LKA system
◆ Lane departure alert function
When the system determines that
the vehicle might depart from its
lane, a warning is displayed on the
multi-information display, and either
the warning buzzer sounds or the
steering wheel vibrates to alert the
driver.
When the warning buzzer sounds or
the steering wheel vibrates, check
the surrounding road situation and
carefully operate the steering wheel
to move the vehicle back to the center of the lane.
∗: If equipped
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
250
4-5. Using the driving support systems
◆ Steering assist function
When the system determines that
the vehicle might depart from its
lane, the system provides assistance
as necessary by operating the steering wheel in small amounts for a
short period of time to keep the
vehicle in its lane.
GS350/GS300: If the system
detects that the steering wheel has
not been operated for a fixed amount
of time or the steering wheel is not
being firmly gripped, a warning is displayed on the multi-information display and the warning buzzer sounds.
GS F: If the system detects that the
steering wheel has not been operated for a fixed amount of time or the
steering wheel is not being firmly
gripped, a warning is displayed on
the multi-information display and the
function is temporarily canceled.
◆ Vehicle sway warning function
When the vehicle is swaying or
appears as if it may depart from its
lane multiple times, the warning
buzzer sounds and a message is displayed on the multi-information display to alert the driver.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
251
◆ Lane centering function
This function is linked with radar
cruise control and provides the
required assistance by operating the
steering wheel to keep the vehicle in
its current lane.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4
Driving
When radar cruise control is not
operating, the lane centering function does not operate.
GS350/GS300: If the system
detects that the steering wheel has
not been operated for a fixed amount
of time or the steering wheel is not
being firmly gripped, a warning is displayed on the multi-information display and the warning buzzer sounds.
GS F: If the system detects that the
steering wheel has not been operated for a fixed amount of time or the
steering wheel is not being firmly
gripped, a warning is displayed on
the multi-information display and the
function is temporarily canceled.
252
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
■ Before using LKA system
Do not rely solely upon the LKA system. The LKA system does not automatically drive
the vehicle or reduce the amount of attention that must be paid to the area in front of
the vehicle. The driver must always assume full responsibility for driving safely by paying careful attention to the surrounding conditions and operating the steering wheel to
correct the path of the vehicle. Also, the driver must take adequate breaks when
fatigued, such as from driving for a long period of time.
Failure to perform appropriate driving operations and pay careful attention may lead to
an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
■ To avoid operating LKA system by mistake
When not using the LKA system, use the LKA switch to turn the system off.
■ Situations unsuitable for LKA system
Do not use the LKA system in the following situations.
The system may not operate properly and lead to an accident, resulting in death or
serious injury.
● A spare tire, tire chains, etc. are equipped.
● When the tires have been excessively worn, or when the tire inflation pressure is low.
● Tires which differ by structure, manufacturer, brand or tread pattern are used.
● Objects or patterns that could be mistaken for white (yellow) lines are present on the
side of the road (guardrails, curbs, reflective poles, etc.).
● Vehicle is driven on a snow-covered road.
● White (yellow) lines are difficult to see due to rain, snow, fog, dust, etc.
● Asphalt repair marks, white (yellow) line marks, etc. are present due to road repair.
● Vehicle is driven in a temporary lane or restricted lane due to construction work.
● Vehicle is driven on a road surface which is slippery due to rainy weather, fallen snow,
freezing, etc.
● Vehicle is driven in traffic lanes other than on highways and freeways.
● Vehicle is driven in a construction zone.
■ Preventing LKA system malfunctions and operations performed by mistake
● Do not modify the headlights or place stickers, etc. on the surface of the lights.
● Do not modify the suspension etc. If the suspension etc. needs to be replaced, contact your Lexus dealer.
● Do not install or place anything on the hood or grille. Also, do not install a grille guard
(bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.).
● If your windshield needs repairs, contact your Lexus dealer.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
253
Turning LKA system on
Press the LKA switch to turn the LKA system on.
The LKA indicator illuminates and a message is displayed on the multi-information
display.
Press the LKA switch again to turn the LKA system off.
When the LKA system is turned on or off, operation of the LKA system continues in
the same condition the next time the engine is started.

GS350/GS300

GS F
4
Driving
Indications on multi-information display
1
LKA indicator
The illumination condition of the
indicator informs the driver of the
system operation status.
Illuminated in white:
LKA system is operating.
Illuminated in green:
Steering wheel assistance of the steering assist function or lane centering
function is operating.
Flashing in orange:
Lane departure alert function is operating.
2
Operation display of steering wheel
operation support
Indicates that steering wheel assistance of the steering assist function or lane
centering function is operating.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
254
3
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Lane departure alert function display
Displayed when the multi-information display is switched to the driving assist
system information screen.

Inside of displayed white lines is
white
Indicates that the system is recognizing
white (yellow) lines. When the vehicle
departs from its lane, the white line displayed on the side the vehicle departs
from flashes orange.

Inside of displayed white lines is
black
Indicates that the system is not able to
recognize white (yellow) lines or is
temporarily canceled.
■ Operation conditions of each function
● Lane departure alert function
This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.
• LKA is turned on.
• Vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph (50 km/h) or more.
• System recognizes white (yellow) lines.
• Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or more.
• Turn signal lever is not operated.
• Vehicle is driven on a straight road or around a gentle curve with a radius of more
than approximately 492 ft. (150 m).
• No system malfunctions are detected. (→P. 257)
● Steering assist function
This function operates when all of the following conditions are met in addition to the
operation conditions for the lane departure alert function.
• Setting for “Steering Assist” in
of the multi-information display is set to “On”.
(→P. 100, 108)
• Vehicle is not accelerated or decelerated by a fixed amount or more.
• Steering wheel is not operated with a steering force level suitable for changing
lanes.
• ABS, VSC, TRAC and PCS (Pre-Collision System) are not operating.
• TRAC or VSC is not turned off.
• GS F: Hands off steering wheel alert is not displayed. (→P. 255)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
255
● Vehicle sway warning function
This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4
Driving
• Setting for “Sway Warning” in
of the multi-information display is set to “On”.
(→P. 100, 108)
• Vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph (50 km/h) or more.
• Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or more.
• No system malfunctions are detected. (→P. 257)
● Lane centering function
This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.
• LKA is turned on.
• Setting for “Steering Assist” and “Lane Center” in
of the multi-information
display are set to “On”. (→P. 100, 108)
• System recognizes white (yellow) lines.
• Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range is operating.
• Width of traffic lane is approximately 8.2 to 13.5 ft. (2.5 to 4.1 m).
• Turn signal lever is not operated.
• Vehicle is driven on a straight road or around a gentle curve with a radius of more
than approximately 656 ft. (200 m).
• No system malfunctions are detected. (→P. 257)
• Vehicle does not accelerate or decelerate by a fixed amount or more.
• Steering wheel is not operated with a steering force level suitable for changing
lanes.
• ABS, VSC, TRAC and PCS (Pre-Collision System) are not operating.
• TRAC or VSC is not turned off.
• GS F: Hands off steering wheel alert is not displayed. (→P. 255)
• Steering assist function is not operating.
■ Temporary cancellation of functions
When operation conditions are no longer met, a function may be temporarily canceled.
However, when the operation conditions are met again, operation of the function is automatically restored. (→P. 254)
■ Steering assist function/lane centering function
Depending on the vehicle speed, lane departure situation, road conditions, etc., the
driver may not feel the function is operating or the function may not operate at all.
■ Lane departure alert function
The warning buzzer may be difficult to hear due to external noise, audio playback, etc.
Also, it may be difficult to feel steering wheel vibrations due to the road conditions, etc.
■ Hands off steering wheel alert
GS350/GS300: When the system determines that the driver has removed the hands
from the steering wheel while the steering assist function or lane centering function is
operating, a warning message is displayed on the multi-information display.
If the driver continues to keep the hands off of the steering wheel, a buzzer sounds, a
warning message is displayed. This alert also operates in the same way when the driver
continuously operates the steering wheel only a small amount. However, depending on
the road conditions, etc., the function may not cancel.
256
4-5. Using the driving support systems
GS F: When the system determines that the driver has removed the hands from the
steering wheel while the steering assist function or lane centering function is operating, a
warning message is displayed on the multi-information display.
If the driver continues to keep the hands off of the steering wheel, a warning message is
displayed and the function is temporarily canceled. This alert also operates in the same
way when the driver continuously operates the steering wheel only a small amount.
However, depending on the road conditions, etc., the function may not cancel.
■ White (yellow) lines are only on one side of road
The LKA system will not operate for the side on which white (yellow) lines could not be
recognized.
■ Conditions in which functions may not operate properly
In the following situations, the camera sensor may not detect white (yellow) lines and various functions may not operate normally.
● There are shadows on the road that run parallel with, or cover, the white (yellow) lines.
● The vehicle is driven in an area without white (yellow) lines, such as in front of a tollgate
or checkpoint, or at an intersection, etc.
● The white (yellow) lines are cracked, “Botts’ dots”, “Raised pavement marker” or stones
are present.
● The white (yellow) lines cannot be seen or are difficult to see due to sand, etc.
● The vehicle is driven on a road surface that is wet due to rain, puddles, etc.
● The traffic lines are yellow (which may be more difficult to recognize than lines that are
white).
● The white (yellow) lines cross over a curb, etc.
● The vehicle is driven on a bright surface, such as concrete.
● The vehicle is driven on a surface that is bright due to reflected light, etc.
● The vehicle is driven in an area where the brightness changes suddenly, such as at the
entrances and exits of tunnels, etc.
● Light from the headlights of an oncoming vehicle, the sun, etc. enters the camera.
● The vehicle is driven where the road diverges, merges, etc.
● The vehicle is driven on a slope.
● The vehicle is driven on a road which tilts left or right, or a winding road.
● The vehicle is driven on an unpaved or rough road.
● The vehicle is driven around a sharp curve.
● The traffic lane is excessively narrow or wide.
● The vehicle is extremely tilted due to carrying heavy luggage or having improper tire
pressure.
● The distance to the preceding vehicle is extremely short.
● The vehicle is moving up and down a large amount due to road conditions during driving (poor roads or road seams).
● The headlight lenses are dirty and emit a faint amount of light at night, or the beam axis
has deviated.
● The vehicle is struck by a crosswind.
● The vehicle has just changed lanes or crossed an intersection.
● Snow tires, etc. are equipped.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
257
■ Warning message
Warning messages are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform the driver of
the need for caution while driving. (→P. 441)
■ Customization
The following settings can be changed.
Function
Setting details
Adjust alert sensitivity
Lane departure alert function
Steering assist function
Adjust alert type
Turn steering wheel assistance on and off
Vehicle sway warning function
Lane centering function
For how to change settings, refer to P. 545.
Turn function on and off
Adjust alert sensitivity
Turn function on and off
4
Driving
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
258
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed
range∗
Summary of functions
In vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates, decelerates and stops to match the speed changes of the preceding vehicle
even if the accelerator pedal is not depressed. In constant speed control mode,
the vehicle runs at a fixed speed.
Use the dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range on freeways and
highways.
● Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode (→P. 261)
● Constant speed control mode (→P. 266)

GS350/GS300
1
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch
2
Display
3
Set speed
4
Indicators
5
Cruise control switch

GS F
∗: If equipped
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
259
WARNING
■ Before using dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4
Driving
Driving safely is the sole responsibility of the driver. Do not rely solely on the system,
and drive safely by always paying careful attention to your surroundings.
The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range provides driving assistance to
reduce the driver’s burden. However, there are limitations to the assistance provided.
Set the speed appropriately depending on the speed limit, traffic flow, road conditions,
weather conditions, etc. The driver is responsible for checking the set speed.
Even when the system is functioning normally, the condition of the preceding vehicle as
detected by the system may differ from the condition observed by the driver. Therefore, the driver must always remain alert, assess the danger of each situation and drive
safely. Relying on this system or assuming the system ensures safety while driving can
lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Cautions regarding the driving assist systems
Observe the following precautions, as there are limitations to the assistance provided
by the system.
Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
● Assisting the driver to measure following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range is only intended to help the
driver in determining the following distance between the driver’s own vehicle and a
designated vehicle traveling ahead. It is not a mechanism that allows careless or inattentive driving, and it is not a system that can assist the driver in low-visibility conditions. It is still necessary for driver to pay close attention to the vehicle’s surroundings.
● Assisting the driver to judge proper following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range determines whether the following distance between the driver’s own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling
ahead is within a set range. It is not capable of making any other type of judgement.
Therefore, it is absolutely necessary for the driver to remain vigilant and to determine
whether or not there is a possibility of danger in any given situation.
● Assisting the driver to operate the vehicle
The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range has limited capability to prevent or avoid a collision with a vehicle traveling ahead. Therefore, if there is ever any
danger, the driver must take immediate and direct control of the vehicle and act
appropriately in order to ensure the safety of all involved.
■ To avoid inadvertent dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range activation
Switch the dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range off using the “ON/OFF”
button when not in use.
260
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
■ Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range
Do not use dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range in any of the following
situations.
Doing so may result in inappropriate speed control and could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
● Roads where there are pedestrians, cyclists, etc.
● In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends
● On winding roads
● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
● On steep downhills, or where there are sudden changes between sharp up and down
gradients
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
● At entrances to freeways and highways
● When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sensors from
detecting correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, heavy rain, etc.)
● When there is rain, snow, etc. on the front surface of the radar sensor or camera sensor
● In traffic conditions that require frequent repeated acceleration and deceleration
● During emergency towing
● When an approach warning buzzer is heard often
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
261
Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
This mode employs a radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicles up to
approximately 328 ft. (100 m) ahead, determines the current vehicle-to-vehicle
following distance, and operates to maintain a suitable following distance from
the vehicle ahead.
Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close in when traveling on long downhill
slopes.
4
Driving
1
Example of constant speed cruising
When there are no vehicles ahead
The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-to-vehicle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch.
2
Example of deceleration cruising and follow-up cruising
When a preceding vehicle driving slower than the set speed appears
When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, the system automatically decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is necessary, the system
applies the brakes (the stop lights will come on at this time). The system will respond to
changes in the speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle
distance set by the driver. Approach warning warns you when the system cannot
decelerate sufficiently to prevent your vehicle from closing in on the vehicle ahead.
When the vehicle ahead of you stops, your vehicle will also stop (vehicle is stopped by
system control). After the vehicle ahead starts off, pushing the cruise control lever up
or depressing the accelerator pedal will resume follow-up cruising.
3
Example of acceleration
When there are no longer any preceding vehicles driving slower than the set
speed
The system accelerates until the set speed is reached. The system then returns to constant speed cruising.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
262
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Setting the vehicle speed (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)
1
Press the “ON/OFF” button to activate the cruise control.
Radar cruise control indicator will come
on and a message will be displayed on
the multi-information display.
Press the button again to deactivate the
cruise control.
If the “ON/OFF” button is pressed and
held for 1.5 seconds or more, the system
turns on in constant speed control
mode. (→P. 266)
2
Accelerate or decelerate, with
accelerator pedal operation, to the
desired vehicle speed (at or above
approximately 30 mph [50 km/h])
and push the lever down to set the
speed.
Cruise control “SET” indicator will come
on.
The vehicle speed at the moment the
lever is released becomes the set speed.
If the lever is operated while the vehicle speed is below approximately 30 mph
(50 km/h) and a preceding vehicle is present, the set speed will be adjusted to
approximately 30 mph (50 km/h).
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
263
Adjusting the set speed
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed is displayed.
Increases the speed
1
(Except when the vehicle has been
stopped by system control in vehicle-tovehicle distance control mode)
Decreases the speed
2
Fine adjustment: Momentarily move
the lever in the desired direction.
Large adjustment: Hold the lever up or
down to change the speed, and release
when the desired speed is reached.
In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the set speed will be increased
or decreased as follows:
For the U.S. mainland, Hawaii and NATO Germany
Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h)*1 or 1 km/h (0.6mph)*2 each time the lever is
operated
Large adjustment: Increases or decreases in 1mph (1.6 km/h)*1 or 1 km/h (0.6 mph)*2
increments for as long as the lever is held
 For Canada, Guam and Puerto Rico
Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h)*1 or 1 km/h (0.6mph)*2 each time the lever is
operated
Large adjustment: Increases or decreases in 5 mph (8 km/h)*1 or 5 km/h (3.1 mph)*2
increments for as long as the lever is held
In the constant speed control mode (→P. 266), the set speed will be increased
or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h)*1 or 1.6 km/h (1 mph)*2 each time the lever is
operated
Large adjustment: The speed will continue to change while the lever is held.
*1:
*2 :
When the set speed is shown in “MPH”
When the set speed is shown in “km/h”
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Driving

4
264
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance (vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode)

GS350/GS300
Preceding
vehicle mark

GS F
Preceding
vehicle mark
Pressing the switch changes the vehicle-to-vehicle distance as follows:
1
Long
2
Medium
3
Short
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance is set automatically to long mode when the engine
switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.
If a vehicle is running ahead of you, the preceding vehicle mark will also be displayed.
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)
Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances shown correspond to a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
increases/decreases in accordance with vehicle speed. When the vehicle is
stopped by system control, the vehicle stops at a certain vehicle-to-vehicle distance depending on the situation.
Distance options
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Long
Approximately 160 ft. (50 m)
Medium
Approximately 130 ft. (40 m)
Short
Approximately 100 ft. (30 m)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
265
Resuming follow-up cruising when the vehicle has been stopped by system control (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)
After the vehicle ahead of you starts off,
push the lever up.
Your vehicle will also resume follow-up
cruising if the accelerator pedal is
depressed after the vehicle ahead of
you starts off.
Canceling and resuming the speed control
1
Pulling the lever toward you cancels
the speed control.
2
Pushing the lever up resumes the
cruise control and returns vehicle
speed to the set speed.
However, when a vehicle ahead is not detected, cruise control does not resume when
the vehicle speed is approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or less.
Approach warning (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)
When your vehicle is too close to a
vehicle ahead, and sufficient automatic
deceleration via the cruise control is
not possible, the display will flash and
the buzzer will sound to alert the driver.
An example of this would be if another
driver cuts in front of you while you are
following a vehicle. Depress the brake
pedal to ensure an appropriate vehicleto-vehicle distance.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4
Driving
The speed control is also canceled when
the brake pedal is depressed.
(When the vehicle has been stopped by
system control, depressing the brake
pedal does not cancel the setting.)
266
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Warnings may not occur when
In the following instances, warnings may not occur even when the vehicle-tovehicle distance is small.
● When the speed of the preceding vehicle matches or exceeds your vehicle
speed
● When the preceding vehicle is traveling at an extremely slow speed
● Immediately after the cruise control speed was set
● When depressing the accelerator pedal
Selecting constant speed control mode
When constant speed control mode is selected, your vehicle will maintain a set
speed without controlling the vehicle-to-vehicle distance. Select this mode only
when vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode does not function correctly due
to a dirty radar sensor, etc.
1
With the cruise control off, press and
hold the “ON/OFF” button for 1.5
seconds or more.
Immediately after the “ON/OFF” button is pressed, the radar cruise control
indicator will come on. Afterwards, it
switches to the cruise control indicator.
Switching to constant speed control
mode is only possible when operating
the lever with the cruise control off.
2
Accelerate or decelerate, with
accelerator pedal operation, to the
desired vehicle speed (at or above
approximately 30 mph [50 km/h])
and push the lever down to set the
speed.
Cruise control “SET” indicator will come
on.
The vehicle speed at the moment the
lever is released becomes the set speed.
Adjusting the speed setting: →P. 263
Canceling and resuming the speed setting: →P. 265
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
267
■ Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range can be set when
● The shift lever is in D.
● Range 4 or higher of D has been selected by using the paddle shift switch.
● Vehicle speed is at or above approximately 30 mph (50 km/h).
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4
Driving
However, when a preceding vehicle is detected, the dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range can be set even if the vehicle speed is below approximately 30 mph
(50 km/h).
■ Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed
The vehicle can accelerate by operating the accelerator pedal. After accelerating, the
set speed resumes. However, during vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle speed may decrease below the set speed in order to maintain the distance to the preceding vehicle.
■ When the vehicle stops while follow-up cruising
● Pushing the lever up while the vehicle ahead stops will resume follow-up cruising if the
vehicle ahead starts off within approximately 3 seconds after the lever is pushed up.
● If the vehicle ahead starts off within 3 seconds after your vehicle stops, follow-up cruising will be resumed.
■ Automatic cancelation of vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is automatically canceled in the following situations.
● Actual vehicle speed falls at or below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) when there are
no vehicles ahead.
● The preceding vehicle leaves the lane when your vehicle is following at a vehicle speed
at or below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h). Otherwise, the sensor can not properly
detect the vehicle. (“CRUISE NOT AVAILABLE No Preceding Vehicles” is displayed
on the multi-information display)
● VSC is activated.
● TRAC is activated for a period of time.
● When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off.
● When snow mode is set.
● The sensor cannot detect correctly because it is covered in some way.
● Pre-collision braking is activated.
● The parking brake is operated.
● The vehicle is stopped by system control on a steep incline.
● The following are detected when the vehicle has been stopped by system control:
• The driver is not wearing a seat belt.
• The driver’s door is opened.
• The vehicle has been stopped for about 3 minutes
If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is automatically canceled for any other reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.
268
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Automatic cancelation of constant speed control mode
Constant speed control mode is automatically canceled in the following situations:
● Actual vehicle speed is more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the set vehicle speed.
● Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
● VSC is activated.
● TRAC is activated for a period of time.
● When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off.
● Pre-collision braking is activated.
If constant speed control mode is automatically canceled for any other reason, there may
be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Warning messages and buzzers for dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range
Warning messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform
the driver of the need for caution while driving. If a warning message is shown on the
multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions. (→P. 441)
■ When the sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead
In the case of the following and depending on the conditions, operate the brake pedal
when deceleration of the system is insufficient or operate the accelerator pedal when
acceleration is required.
As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the approach
warning (→P. 265) may not be activated.
● Vehicles that cut in suddenly
● Vehicles traveling at low speeds
● Vehicles that are not moving in the same lane
● Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board, etc.)
● Motorcycles traveling in the same lane
● When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the detecting of
the sensor
● When your vehicle is pointing upwards
(caused by a heavy load in the luggage compartment, etc.)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
269
● Preceding vehicle has an extremely high
ground clearance
■ Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode may not function
correctly
In the case of the following conditions, operate the brake pedal (or accelerator pedal,
depending on the situation) as necessary.
As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, the system may not
operate properly.
● When the road curves or when the lanes are
narrow
4
tion in the lane is unstable
● When the vehicle ahead of you decelerates suddenly
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Driving
● When steering wheel operation or your posi-
270
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Cruise control∗
Summary of functions
Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing the accelerator pedal.
1
Set speed
2
Indicators
3
Cruise control switch
Setting the vehicle speed
1
Press the “ON/OFF” button to activate the cruise control.
Cruise control indicator will come on.
Press the button again to deactivate the
cruise control.
2
Accelerate or decelerate the vehicle
to the desired speed, and push the
lever down to set the speed.
Cruise control “SET” indicator will come
on.
The vehicle speed at the moment the
lever is released becomes the set speed.
∗: If equipped
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
271
Adjusting the set speed
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed is obtained.
1
Increases the speed
2
Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Momentarily move the
lever in the desired direction.
Large adjustment: Hold the lever in the
desired direction.
The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is operated.
Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continually until the
lever is released.
Canceling and resuming the constant speed control
Pulling the lever toward you cancels
the constant speed control.
The speed setting is also canceled when
the brakes are applied.
2
Pushing the lever up resumes the
constant speed control.
Resuming is available when the vehicle
speed is more than approximately 25
mph (40 km/h).
■ Cruise control can be set when
● The shift lever is in D.
● Range 4 or higher of D has been selected by using the paddle shift.
● Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
■ Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed
● The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed resumes.
● Even without canceling the cruise control, the set speed can be increased by first accel-
erating the vehicle to the desired speed and then pushing the lever down to set the new
speed.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Driving
1
4
272
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Automatic cruise control cancelation
Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following situations.
● Actual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset
vehicle speed.
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
● Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
● VSC is activated.
● TRAC is activated for a period of time.
● When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off by pressing the VSC OFF switch.
■ If the warning message for the cruise control is shown on the multi-information display
Press the “ON/OFF” button once to deactivate the system, and then press the button
again to reactivate the system.
If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately after
being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
WARNING
■ To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake
Switch the cruise control off using the “ON/OFF” button when not in use.
■ Situations unsuitable for cruise control
Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting in death or
serious injury.
● In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends
● On winding roads
● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
● On steep hills
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
● During emergency towing
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
273
Driving mode select switch
The driving modes can be selected to suit driving condition.

GS350/GS300 (vehicles without Adaptive Variable Suspension system)
4
Normal mode
For normal driving.
Press the switch to change the driving mode to normal mode when selected to Eco
drive mode or sport mode.
2
Eco drive mode
Use Eco drive mode to help achieve low fuel consumption during trips that
involve frequent accelerating.
When not in Eco drive mode and the driving mode select switch is turned to the left,
the “ECO” indicator comes on in the multi-information display.
3
Sport mode
Assists acceleration response by controlling the transmission, engine and
steering. Suitable for when precise handling is desirable, for example when
driving on mountain roads.
When not in sport mode and the driving mode select switch is turned to the right, the
“SPORT” indicator comes on in the multi-information display.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Driving
1
274

4-5. Using the driving support systems
GS350/GS300 (vehicles with Adaptive Variable Suspension system)
Except
F SPORT models F SPORT models
1
Normal mode/Customized mode
Normal mode and customized mode are selected by pressing the driving
mode select switch. Each time the switch is pressed, the driving mode
changes between normal mode and customized mode. When customized
mode is selected, the “Customize” or “CUSTOMIZE” indicator will be illuminated.
Press the switch to change the driving mode to normal mode when selected to Eco
drive mode or sport mode.
• Normal mode
For normal driving.
• Customized mode
Allows you to drive with the power train, chassis and air conditioning system functions set to your preferred settings.
Customized mode settings can only be changed on the drive mode customization display of the Remote Touch screen. (→P. 555)
2
Eco drive mode
Use Eco drive mode to help achieve low fuel consumption during trips that
involve frequent accelerating.
When not in Eco drive mode and the driving mode select switch is turned to the left,
the “ECO” or “ECO MODE” indicator comes on in the multi-information display.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
3
275
Sport mode
• SPORT S mode
Assists acceleration response by controlling the transmission and engine.
When not in SPORT S mode and the driving mode select switch is turned to the
right, the “SPORT S” indicator comes on in the multi-information display.
• SPORT S+ mode
Helps to ensure steering performance and driving stability by simultaneously controlling the steering and suspension in addition to the transmission and engine. Suitable for sporty driving.
When in SPORT S mode and the driving mode select switch is turned to the right,
the “SPORT S+” indicator comes on in the multi-information display.
4
Driving
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
276
4-5. Using the driving support systems

GS F
1
Normal mode/Customized mode
Normal mode and customized mode are selected by pressing the driving
mode select switch. Each time the switch is pressed, the driving mode
changes between normal mode and customized mode. When customized
mode is selected, the “CUSTOMIZE” indicator will be illuminated.
Press the switch to change the driving mode to normal mode when Eco drive mode or
sport mode is selected. The normal mode indicator comes on in the meter.
• Normal mode
For normal driving.
• Customized mode
Allows you to drive with the power train, chassis and air conditioning system functions set to your preferred settings.
Customized mode settings can only be changed on the drive mode customization display of the Remote Touch screen. (→P. 555)
2
Eco drive mode
Use Eco drive mode to help achieve low fuel consumption during trips that
involve frequent accelerating.
When not in Eco drive mode, if the driving mode select switch is turned to the left, the
Eco drive mode indicator comes on in the meter.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
3
277
Sport mode
• SPORT S mode
Assists acceleration response by controlling the transmission and engine.
When not in SPORT S mode, if the driving mode select switch is turned to the
right, the “SPORT S” indicator comes on in the meter.
• SPORT S+ mode
Provides earlier downshift timing than SPORT S mode in order to maintain
a high engine speed and provides faster gear changes. This mode also
changes the steering feel, suspension control and VDIM control, making it
suitable for powerful sporty driving.
When in SPORT S mode, if the driving mode select switch is turned to the right,
the “SPORT S+” indicator comes on in the meter.
■ Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4
Driving
Eco drive mode controls the heating/cooling operations and fan speed of the air conditioning system to enhance fuel efficiency. To improve air conditioning performance, perform the following operations:
● Turn off eco air conditioning mode (→P. 310)
● Adjust the fan speed (→P. 309)
● Turn off Eco drive mode
■ Automatic operation of the seat heater during Eco drive mode
Eco drive mode controls the heating operation and fan speed of the air conditioning system to enhance fuel efficiency. If the driving mode select switch is switched to Eco drive
mode in cold temperatures, the seat heater will be automatically operated to assist heating performance.
■ Automatic deactivation of sport mode and customized mode
If the engine switch is turned off after driving in sport mode or customized mode, the
drive mode will be changed to normal mode.
■ Driving mode pop-up display (12.3-inch display only)
When the driving mode is changed, the selected driving mode will be temporarily displayed on the side display. (→P. 306)
278
4-5. Using the driving support systems
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)∗
Summary of the Blind Spot Monitor
The Blind Spot Monitor is a system that has 2 functions;
● The Blind Spot Monitor function
Assists the driver in making the decision when changing lanes
● The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function
Assists the driver when backing up
These functions use same sensors.
1
Switching the BSM function
The Blind Spot Monitor function and Rear Cross Traffic Alert function can be
switched on and off using the multi-information display. (→P. 279)
When switched on, the BSM indicator illuminates on the meter and the buzzer
sounds.
2
Outside rear view mirror indicators
Blind Spot Monitor function:
When a vehicle is detected in the blind spot, the outside rear view mirror indicator
comes on while the turn signal lever is not operated. If the turn signal lever is operated
toward the detected side, the outside rear view mirror indicator flashes.
Rear Cross Traffic Alert function:
When a vehicle approaching from the right or left rear of the vehicle is detected, the
outside rear view mirror indicators flash.
3
Rear Cross Traffic Alert buzzer (Rear Cross Traffic Alert function only)
When a vehicle approaching from the right or left rear of the vehicle is detected, a
buzzer sounds from behind the rear seat.
∗: If equipped
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
279
■ The outside rear view mirror indicators visibility
When under strong sunlight, the outside rear view mirror indicator may be difficult to
see.
■ Rear Cross Traffic Alert buzzer hearing
Rear Cross Traffic Alert function may be difficult to hear over loud noises such as high
audio volume.
■ When there is a malfunction in the Blind Spot Monitor
If a system malfunction is detected due to any of the following reasons, warning messages will be displayed: (→P. 441)
● There is a malfunction with the sensors
● The sensors have become dirty
● The outside temperature is extremely high or low
● The sensor voltage has become abnormal
■ Switching the Blind Spot Monitor function and Rear Cross Traffic Alert function on and
off
Settings can be changed from
1
Press
or
on the multi-information display (→P. 100, 108).
on the meter control switch and select “BSM”.
For vehicles sold in Canada
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Driving
Each time
on the meter control switch is pressed, the function switches between
“On” and “Off”.
■ Certification for the Blind Spot Monitor
 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, Guam and Puerto Rico
2

4
280
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
■ Handling the radar sensor
One Blind Spot Monitor sensor is installed
inside the left and right side of the vehicle rear
bumper respectively. Observe the following to
ensure the Blind Spot Monitor can function
correctly.
● Keep the sensor and its surrounding area on the bumper clean at all times.
● Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper to a strong impact. If
the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction and vehicles
that enter the detection area may not be detected. If the sensor or surrounding area is
subject to a strong impact, always have the area inspected by your Lexus dealer.
● Do not disassemble the sensor.
● Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor or surrounding area on the
bumper.
● Do not modify the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper.
● Do not paint the rear bumper any color other than an official Lexus color.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
281
The Blind Spot Monitor function
The Blind Spot Monitor function uses radar sensors to detect vehicles that are
traveling in an adjacent lane in the area that is not reflected in the outside rear
view mirror (the blind spot), and advises the driver of the vehicle’s existence via
the outside rear view mirror indicator.
The Blind Spot Monitor function detection areas
The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.
The range of the detection area
extends to:
1
Approximately 11.5 ft. (3.5 m) from
the side of the vehicle
The first 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) from the side of
the vehicle is not in the detection area
Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) from the
rear bumper
3
Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m) forward
of the rear bumper
WARNING
■ Cautions regarding the use of the system
The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to
observe your surroundings.
The Blind Spot Monitor function is a supplementary function which alerts the driver
that a vehicle is present in the blind spot. Do not overly rely on the Blind Spot Monitor
function. The function cannot judge if it is safe to change lanes, therefore over reliance
could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
According to conditions, the system may not function correctly. Therefore the driver’s
own visual confirmation of safety is necessary.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4
Driving
2
282
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ The Blind Spot Monitor function is operational when
● The BSM function is turned on.
● Vehicle speed is greater than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h).
■ The Blind Spot Monitor function will detect a vehicle when
● A vehicle in an adjacent lane overtakes your vehicle.
● Another vehicle enters the detection area when it changes lanes.
■ Conditions under which the Blind Spot Monitor function will not detect a vehicle
The Blind Spot Monitor function is not designed to detect the following types of vehicles
and/or objects:
● Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians etc.*
● Vehicles traveling in the opposite direction
● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects*
● Following vehicles that are in the same lane*
● Vehicles driving 2 lanes across from your vehicle*
*: Depending on conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur.
■ Conditions under which the Blind Spot Monitor function may not function correctly
● The Blind Spot Monitor function may not detect vehicles correctly in the following con-
ditions:
• During bad weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow etc.
• When ice or mud etc. is attached to the rear bumper
• When driving on a road surface that is wet due to rain, standing water etc.
• When there is a significant difference in speed between your vehicle and the vehicle
that enters the detection area
• When a vehicle is in the detection area from a stop and remains in the detection
area as your vehicle accelerates
• When driving up or down consecutive steep inclines, such as hills, a dip in the road
etc.
• When multiple vehicles approach with only a small gap between each vehicle
• When vehicle lanes are wide, and the vehicle in the next lane is too far away from
your vehicle
• When the vehicle that enters the detection area is traveling at about the same speed
as your vehicle
• When there is a significant difference in height between your vehicle and the vehicle
that enters the detection area
• Directly after the BSM function is turned on
● Instances of the Blind Spot Monitor function unnecessarily detecting a vehicle and/or
object may increase under the following conditions:
• When there is only a short distance between your vehicle and a guardrail, wall etc.
• When there is only a short distance between your vehicle and a following vehicle
• When vehicle lanes are narrow and a vehicle driving 2 lanes across from your vehicle enters the detection area
• When items such as a bicycle carrier are installed on the rear of the vehicle
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
283
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert functions when your vehicle is in reverse. It can
detect other vehicles approaching from the right or left rear of the vehicle. It uses
radar sensors to alert the driver of the other vehicle’s existence through flashing
the outside rear view mirror indicators and sounding a buzzer.
1
Approaching vehicles
2
Detection areas
4
WARNING
The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to
observe your surroundings.
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is only an assist and is not a replacement for careful driving. The driver must be careful when backing up, even when using the Rear
Cross Traffic Alert function. The driver’s own visual confirmation of behind you and
your vehicle is necessary and be sure there are no pedestrians, other vehicles etc.
before backing up. Failure to do so could cause death or serious injury.
According to conditions, the system may not function correctly. Therefore the driver’s
own visual confirmation of safety is necessary.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Driving
■ Cautions regarding the use of the system
284
4-5. Using the driving support systems
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function detection areas
The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.
To give the driver a more consistent time to react, the buzzer can alert for faster
vehicles from farther away.
Example:
Approaching vehicle
Speed
1 Approximate
Fast
18 mph (28 km/h)
65 ft. (20 m)
Slow
5 mph (8 km/h)
18 ft. (5.5 m)
alert distance
■ The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is operational when
● The BSM function is turned on.
● The shift lever is in R.
● Vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h).
● Approaching vehicle speed is between approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) and 18 mph
(28 km/h).
■ Conditions under which the Rear Cross Traffic Alert function will not detect a vehicle
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is not designed to detect the following types of
vehicles and/or objects.
● Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians etc.*
● Vehicles approaching from directly behind
● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects*
● Vehicles moving away from your vehicle
● Vehicles approaching from the parking spaces next to your vehicle*
● Vehicles backing up in the parking space next to your vehicle*
*: Depending on conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
285
■ Conditions under which the Rear Cross Traffic Alert function may not function cor-
rectly
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function may not detect vehicles correctly in the following
conditions:
● During bad weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow etc.
● When ice or mud etc. is attached to the rear bumper
● When multiple vehicles approach continuously
● Shallow angle parking
● When a vehicle is approaching at high speed
● When parking on a steep incline, such as hills, a dip in the road etc.
● Directly after the BSM function is turned on
● When items such as a bicycle carrier are installed on the rear of the vehicle
● Directly after the engine is started with the BSM function is turned on
● When the sensors cannot detect vehicles
because of obstacles
4
Driving
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
286
4-5. Using the driving support systems
TVD (Torque Vectoring Differential) (GS F)
The TVD system distributes driving force (torque) between the right and left
rear wheels automatically. This system contributes to enhanced steering
response while cornering and increased traction when exiting a corner, providing an agile driving experience.
Changing TVD control modes
With the engine switch in IGNITION
ON mode, pressing the TVD switch
changes the TVD control mode.
The current TVD control mode will be
displayed on the meters.
1
STANDARD mode
This is the default mode and provides
an optimum balance of driving agility
and stability.
2
SLALOM mode
This mode emphasizes enhanced
steering response.
3
TRACK mode
This mode emphasizes stability for
high speed sporty driving.
TVD control status on the multi-information display
The multi-information display shows the distribution of driving force between the
right and left rear wheels. (→P. 113)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
287
■ Automatic cancelation of the selected TVD control mode
SLALOM and TRACK mode are canceled when the engine switch is turned off. When
the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, the TVD system will be in STANDARD mode.
■ Automatic disabling of the TVD system
If a malfunction is detected in the TVD system, a warning message will be displayed on
the multi-information display (→P. 441) and the TVD system will be disabled automatically. If the system is disabled, driving force will not be distributed by the TVD but through
normal differential operation.
■ To protect the system
If the TVD fluid temperature becomes excessively high due to driving for a long time
under extremely high load conditions, a warning message will be displayed on the multiinformation display. (→P. 441)
WARNING
■ Cautions regarding the use of the system
The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Do not overly rely on the TVD system.
Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings.
4
Driving
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
288
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving assist systems
To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware, however,
that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.
◆ ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if the
brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface
◆ Brake assist
Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is
depressed when the system detects a panic stop situation
◆ VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on
slippery road surfaces
◆ Enhanced VSC (Enhanced Vehicle Stability Control)
Provides cooperative control of the ABS, TRAC, VSC and EPS.
Helps to maintain directional stability when swerving on slippery road surfaces by controlling steering performance.
◆ TRAC (Traction Control)
Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the drive wheels from spinning
when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads
◆ Hill-start assist control
Helps to prevent the vehicle from rolling backward when starting on an
incline.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
289
◆ VGRS (Variable Gear Ratio Steering) (if equipped)
Adjusts the front wheel turning angle in accordance with the vehicle speed
and steering wheel movement
◆ DRS (Dynamic Rear Steering) (if equipped)
Contributes to the turning characteristics and responsiveness of the vehicle
by slightly adjusting the rear wheel angle of the vehicle in accordance with
steering wheel movement
◆ EPS (Electric Power Steering)
Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn the
steering wheel
◆ AVS (Adaptive Variable Suspension system) (if equipped)
When SPORT S+ mode is selected by the driving mode select switch, the
damping force is suitable for sporty driving (→P. 273)
◆ LDH (Lexus Dynamic Handling system) (if equipped)
Provides independent control of the VGRS, DRS and EPS. Contributes to
turning characteristics at low speeds, responsiveness at medium speeds and
safety at high speeds by controlling the steering angle of the front and rear
wheels in accordance with the steering wheel operation and vehicle speed
◆ VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management)
Provides integrated control of the ABS, brake assist, TRAC, VSC, hill-start
assist control, EPS, VGRS (if equipped) and DRS (if equipped) systems
Helps to maintain vehicle stability when swerving on slippery road surfaces by
controlling the brakes, engine output, steering assist, steering ratio and rear
wheel angle
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4
Driving
By independently controlling the damping force of the shock absorbers for
each of the 4 wheels according to the road and driving conditions, this system
helps riding comfort with superior a high level of stability, and helps good vehicle posture
290
4-5. Using the driving support systems
When the TRAC/VSC systems are operating
The slip indicator light will flash while
the TRAC/VSC systems are operating.
Disabling the TRAC system
If the vehicle gets stuck in mud, dirt or snow, the TRAC system may reduce
power from the engine to the wheels. Pressing
to turn the system off may
make it easier for rock the vehicle in order to free it.

GS350/GS300
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)

GS F
4-5. Using the driving support systems
To turn the TRAC system off, quickly press and release
291
.
GS350/GS300: The “Traction Control Turned Off” will be shown on the multi-information display.
GS F: The “TRAC OFF” indicator light will come on.
Press
again to turn the system back on.
■ Turning off both TRAC/VSC systems

GS350/GS300
To turn the TRAC/VSC systems off, press and hold
for more than 3 seconds while
the vehicle is stopped.
The VSC OFF indicator light will come on and the “Traction Control Turned Off” will
be shown on the multi-information display.*1
Press
 GS F
again to turn the systems back on.
To turn the TRAC and VSC systems off, press and hold
for more than 3 seconds.
The “TRAC OFF” indicator light and the VSC OFF indicator light will come on.*2
*2: On vehicles with PCS (Pre-Collision System), pre-collision brake assist and pre-collision braking will also be disabled. The PCS (Pre-Collision System) warning light will
come on and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display. (→P. 441)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Driving
Press
again to turn the systems back on.
* : On vehicles with PCS (Pre-Collision System), pre-collision brake assist, pre-collision
braking, and steering control (performed through cooperative control of PCS [PreCollision System] and LDH) (if equipped) will also be disabled. The pre-collision system warning light will come on and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display. (→P. 441)
1
4
292
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Expert mode (GS F)
When expert mode is selected, it is possible to drive in a more sporty manner than other
drive modes. Expert mode disables the TRAC and VSC systems but the engine and
brakes may be controlled depending on the vehicle behavior.
To select expert mode, press
when in
SPORT S+ mode.
The “EXPERT” indicator will come on together
with the TRAC OFF and VSC OFF indicators.
To cancel expert mode, press
or use the
driving mode select switch to select a driving
mode other than SPORT S+ mode.
■ When the message is displayed on the multi-information display showing that TRAC
has been disabled even if
has not been pressed (GS350/GS300)
TRAC and hill-start assist control cannot be operated. Contact your Lexus dealer.
■ When the “TRAC OFF” indicator light comes on even if
has not been pressed
(GS F)
TRAC and hill-start assist control cannot be operated. Contact your Lexus dealer.
■ VGRS is disabled when
VGRS may stop operating in the following situations.
In this event, the steering wheel may move from its straight forward position, but it will
return when the system restarts.
● The steering wheel is operated for an extended period of time while the vehicle is
stopped or is moving very slowly.
● When force is continuously applied for a long time with the steering wheel turned as far
as it will go.
The center position of the steering wheel may change when VGRS is disabled. However,
the position will return to normal after VGRS is reactivated.
■ When the battery is disconnected
The steering wheel may move from its straight forward position, but this will be corrected
automatically when driving.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
293
■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, VSC, TRAC, Hill-start assist
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4
Driving
control and VGRS systems
● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the brake pedal is
depressed repeatedly, when the engine is started or just after the vehicle begins to
move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.
● Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operating.
None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
• The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated.
• The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.
■ EPS, VGRS and DRS operation sound
When the steering wheel is operated, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard.
This does not indicate a malfunction.
■ Automatic reactivation of TRAC and VSC systems
After turning the TRAC and VSC systems off, the systems will be automatically reenabled in the following situations:
● When the engine switch is turned off
● If only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC will turn on when vehicle speed
increases
If both TRAC and VSC systems are turned off, automatic re-enabling will not occur
when vehicle speed increases.
■ Reduced effectiveness of the EPS system
The effectiveness of the EPS system is reduced to prevent the system from overheating
when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The steering
wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur, refrain from excessive steering input
or stop the vehicle and turn the engine off. The EPS system should return to normal
within 10 minutes.
■ Operating conditions of hill-start assist control
When the following four conditions are met, the hill-start assist control will operate;
● The shift lever is in a position other than N or P (when starting off forward/backward on
an upward incline).
● The vehicle is stopped.
● The accelerator pedal is not depressed.
● The parking brake is not engaged.
■ Automatic system cancelation of hill-start assist control
The hill-start assist control will be canceled in any of the following situations;
● The shift lever is shifted to N or P.
● The accelerator pedal is depressed.
● The parking brake is engaged.
● Approximately 2 seconds elapse after the brake pedal is released.
294
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
■ The ABS does not operate effectively when
● The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded. (such as excessively
worn tires on a snow covered road).
● The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on wet or slick roads.
■ Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of normal conditions
The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, especially in the following situations:
● When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
● When driving with tire chains
● When driving over bumps in the road
● When driving over roads with potholes or uneven surfaces
■ TRAC may not operate effectively when
Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road
surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating.
Drive the vehicle carefully in conditions where stability and power may be lost.
■ Hill-start assist control does not operate effectively when
● Do not overly rely on the hill-start assist control. The hill-start assist control may not
operate effectively on steep inclines and roads covered with ice.
● Unlike the parking brake, hill-start assist control is not intended to hold the vehicle
stationary for an extended period of time. Do not attempt to use hill-start assist control to hold the vehicle on an incline, as doing so may lead to an accident.
■ When the VSC is activated
The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may cause an
accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
295
WARNING
■ When the TRAC/VSC systems are turned off
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4
Driving
Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As these
are the systems to help ensure vehicle stability and driving force, do not turn the
TRAC/VSC systems off unless necessary.
■ Expert mode precautions (GS F)
● Do not use on public roads.
● Use only when the road conditions and safety of the surrounding area can be
ensured.
● Proper use of expert mode requires a professional level of driving skill. When using
expert mode, always check the road conditions and surrounding area and drive more
carefully than usual.
■ Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the specified size, brand, tread pattern and total load
capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recommended tire inflation pressure level.
The ABS, TRAC and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires are
installed on the vehicle.
Contact your Lexus dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.
■ Handling of tires and the suspension
Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the driving
assist systems, and may cause a system to malfunction.
296
4-6. Driving tips
Winter driving tips
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the prevailing weather conditions.
Preparation for winter (GS350/GS300)
● Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures.
• Engine oil
• Engine coolant
• Washer fluid
● Have a service technician inspect the condition of the battery.
● Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of tire chains for
the rear tires.*
Ensure that all tires are the specified size and brand, and that chains match the size of
the tires.
*: Tire chains cannot be mounted on vehicles with front and rear tires of differing sizes
and vehicles with LDH and 19-inch tires.
Preparation for winter (GS F)
● Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures.
• Engine oil
• Engine coolant
• Washer fluid
● Have a service technician inspect the condition of the battery.
● Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires.
Ensure that all tires are the specified size and brand.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-6. Driving tips
297
Before driving the vehicle
Perform the following according to the driving conditions:
● Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour
warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
● To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan, remove any
snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in front of the windshield.
● Check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accumulated on
the exterior lights, vehicle’s roof, chassis, around the tires or on the brakes.
● Remove any snow or mud from the bottom of your shoes before getting in the
vehicle.
When driving the vehicle
Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a safe distance between you and the vehicle
ahead, and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road conditions.
● Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P without setting the parking
brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being released. If
the vehicle is parked without setting the parking brake, make sure to block the
wheels.
Failure to do so may be dangerous because it may cause the vehicle to move
unexpectedly, possibly leading to an accident.
● If the vehicle is parked without setting the parking brake, confirm that the shift
lever cannot be moved out of P*.
*: The shift lever will be locked if it is attempted to be shifted from P to any other position
without depressing the brake pedal. If the shift lever can be shifted from P, there may
be a problem with the shift lock system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer immediately.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Driving
When parking the vehicle
4
298
4-6. Driving tips
Selecting tire chains (GS350/GS300)

Vehicles with front and rear tires of the same size except for the vehicles with
LDH and 19 inch tires
Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the tire chains.
Chain size is regulated for each tire size.
1
Side chain
(0.12 in. [3 mm] in diameter)
2
Cross chain
(0.16 in. [4 mm] in diameter)

Vehicles with front and rear tires of differing sizes and vehicles with LDH and
19 inch tires
Tire chains cannot be mounted.
Snow tires should be used instead.
Selecting tire chains (GS F)
Tire chains cannot be mounted.
Snow tires should be used instead.
Regulations on the use of tire chains
Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary depending on location and type
of road. Always check local regulations before installing chains.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
4-6. Driving tips
299
Shifting the windshield wiper position
If heavy snow or icy condition is expected, shift the rest position manually.
Grip the hook section of the wiper arm firmly when shifting the wiper position.
■ To rest position
Raise the wiper in line with the windshield.
You can stand the wipers up for the
rest position.
★: More than 3.9 in. (10 cm)
■ To retract position
Lower the wipers by pressing on the
upper part of the hook section.
4
Driving
■ Tire chain installation
Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains:
● Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.
● Install tire chains on the rear tires. Do not install tire chains on the front tires.
● Install tire chains on rear tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains after driving 1/4
⎯ 1/2 mile (0.5 ⎯ 1.0 km).
● Install tire chains following the instructions provided with the tire chains.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
300
4-6. Driving tips
WARNING
■ Driving with snow tires
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious injury.
● Use tires of the specified size.
● Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.
● Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires
being used.
● Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.
■ Driving with tire chains (GS350/GS300 with front and rear tires of the same size
except for the vehicles with LDH and 19 inch tires)
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may
cause death or serious injury.
● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used, or 30
mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.
● Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.
● Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting operations
that cause sudden engine braking.
● Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is maintained.
● Do not use LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) system. (if equipped)
NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing snow tires
Request repairs or replacement of snow tires from Lexus dealers or legitimate tire
retailers.
This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of the
tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.
■ Fitting tire chains (GS350/GS300 with front and rear tires of the same size except
for the vehicles with LDH and 19 inch tires)
The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly when tire
chains are fitted.
■ When standing the windshield wipers up
Raise the wipers in line with the windshield. (→P. 299)
Failure to do so may result in damage to the wipers and/or the hood.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
301
Interior features
5-1. Remote Touch screen
Remote Touch/12.3-inch
display ......................................... 302
5-2. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Front automatic
air conditioning system........ 308
Rear air conditioning
system ...........................................319
Heated steering wheel/
seat heaters/seat
ventilators...................................322
5-3. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list..........................327
• Interior lights ......................... 328
• Personal lights ...................... 328
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
5
5-4. Using the storage features
List of storage features ............330
• Glove box ................................ 331
• Console box............................ 331
• Cup holders ...........................332
• Auxiliary boxes .....................333
Trunk features .............................334
5-5. Using the other interior
features
Other interior features ............338
• Sun visors ................................338
• Vanity mirrors .......................338
• Clock ........................................339
• Ashtrays...................................339
• Power outlets.........................340
• Armrest....................................340
• Rear sunshade/
rear door sunshades............ 341
• Trunk storage
extension .................................343
• Coat hooks.............................344
• Assist grips..............................344
Garage door opener ...............345
LEXUS Enform Safety
Connect......................................352
302
5-1. Remote Touch screen
Remote Touch/12.3-inch display∗
The Remote Touch can be used to operate the Remote Touch screens.
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the
“NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
Remote Touch operation
∗: If equipped
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
5-1. Remote Touch screen
1
303
“∧•∨” button
Press this button to change map scale and scroll through lists.
2
Back button
Press this button to display the previous screen.
3
“MENU” button
Press this button to display the “Menu” screen.
4
Remote Touch knob
Move in the desired direction to select a function, letter and screen button.
Press the knob to enter the selected function, letter or screen button.
5
“ENTER” buttons
Press this button to enter the selected function, letter or screen button.
6
“HOME” button (vehicles with 8-inch display)
Press this button to display the home screen.
7
“MAP” button (vehicles with 12.3-inch display)
Press this button to display the vehicle’s current position.
■ Using the Remote Touch knob
Select: Move the knob in the
desired direction.
2
Enter: Press the knob or “ENTER”
button.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
5
Interior features
1
304
5-1. Remote Touch screen
■ Screen display during low temperatures
When the ambient temperature is extremely low, screen response may be delayed even
if the Remote Touch is operated.
WARNING
■ When using the Remote Touch
● Do not allow fingers, fingernails or hair to become caught in the Remote Touch as this
may cause an injury.
● Be careful when selecting the Remote Touch in extreme temperatures as it may
become very hot or cold due to the temperature inside the vehicle.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the Remote Touch
● Do not allow the Remote Touch to come into contact with food, liquid, stickers or lit
cigarettes as doing so may cause it to change color, emit a strange odor or stop functioning.
● Do not subject the Remote Touch to excessive pressure or strong impact as the knob
may bend or break off.
● Do not allow coins, contact lenses or other such items to become caught in the
Remote Touch as this may cause it to stop functioning.
● Items of clothing may rip if they become caught on the Remote Touch knob.
● If your hand or any object is on the Remote Touch knob when the engine switch is
turned to ACCESSORY mode, the Remote Touch knob may not operate properly.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
5-1. Remote Touch screen
305
“Menu” screen
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch to display the “Menu” screen.
The display may differ depending on the type of the system.
12.3-inch display: When an interruption screen is being displayed on the side display,
the “Menu” screen will be shown on the main display.

Vehicles with 8-inch display
Switch

Vehicles with 12.3-inch display
Function
Select to display the compass mode screen.*1
Select to display the radio control screen.*1
Select to display the media control screen.*1
Select to display the hands-free operation screen.*1
Select to display the “LEXUS App Suite” screen.*1, 2
Select to display the “Information” screen.*1
Select to display the air conditioning control screen. (→P. 308)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Interior features
Select to display the “Destination” screen.*1
5
306
5-1. Remote Touch screen
Switch
Function
Select to display the “Setup” screen.*1
“Display”
Select to adjust the contrast and brightness of the screens, turn the
screen off, etc.*1
*1: Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
*2: If equipped
12.3-inch display operation
■ Full screen display
The following functions can be displayed full screen:
● Initial screen*
● Map screen*
● “Menu” screen (→P. 305)
*: Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
■ Split-screen display
Different information can be displayed on the left and right of the screen. For
example, air conditioning system screen can be displayed and operated while
the fuel consumption information screen is being displayed. The large screen
on the left of the display is called the main display, and the small screen to the
right is called the side display.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
5-1. Remote Touch screen
307
12.3-inch display function
For details of the functions and operation of the main display, refer to the respective section.
■ Display the side display

Basic screens
The following functions can be displayed and operated on the side display.
Select the desired button.
1
Navigation system*
2
Audio*
3
Phone*
4
Vehicle information (→P. 130)
5
Air conditioning system
(→P. 312)
To turn off the side display, press the “MAP” button on Remote Touch to display the
map screen, and then press
.
If the item displayed on the main display is full screen display compatible (→P. 306),
it will be displayed full screen.
Interruption screens
Each of the following screens is displayed automatically in accordance with
conditions.
• Intuitive parking assist* (if equipped)
• Phone*
• Destination Assist*
• Driving mode (→P. 273)
*: Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Interior features

5
308
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Front automatic air conditioning system
Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select
the air conditioning operation screen.
to display
Vehicles with 12.3-inch display: The air conditioning system can be displayed
and operated on the side display. (→P. 306)
The display and button positions will differ depending on the type of the system.
Control panel
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
309
■ Adjusting the temperature setting
Press “∧”on
to increase the temperature and “∨” to decrease the tem-
perature.

Without rear air conditioning system
When “DUAL” on the control screen is selected or the passenger’s side temperature control button is pressed, the temperature for the driver and passenger seats can be adjusted separately.

With rear air conditioning system
When “3-ZONE” on the control screen is selected or the passenger’s side
temperature control button is pressed, the temperature for the driver’s, front
passenger’s and rear seats (→P. 319) can be adjusted separately.
The air conditioning system switches between individual and simultaneous
modes each time 3-ZONE is selected.
■ Adjusting the fan speed setting
Press
to increase the fan speed and
to decrease the fan speed.
5
Press the “OFF” button to turn the fan off.
To change the air outlets, press
.
The air outlets used are switched each time the button is pressed. (→P. 310)
■ S-FLOW mode
Press
.
When
is pressed, the airflow changes as follows.
Without rear air conditioning system: Air flows to the front seats only.*
With rear air conditioning system:
Air flows to the front seats only, and if the passenger seat is unoccupied, the set
temperature, outside humidity and temperature inside the cabin are assessed, and
air flows to the driver seat only.*
*: Air may also flow to the rear seats depending on the situation.
■ Other functions
● Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes (→P. 314)
● Defogging the windshield (→P. 314)
● Defogging the rear window and outside rear view mirrors (→P. 314)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Interior features
■ Change the airflow mode
310
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Control screen

Without rear air conditioning system

With rear air conditioning system
1
Adjust the left-hand side temperature setting
2
Select the air flow to the feet and operate the windshield defogger
3
Adjust the fan speed setting
4
Select the air flow mode* (the front seats)
5
Function on/off indicators on the option control screen
6
Display the option control screen (→P. 311)
7
Adjust the right-hand side temperature setting
8
Set eco air conditioning mode (→P. 317)
Air conditioning and heater output is limited to prioritize fuel economy.
9
Adjust the temperature for the driver’s and front passenger’s seats separately (DUAL mode) (→P. 309)
10
Set cooling and dehumidification function on/off
11
Select to set automatic mode on/off
12
Select the air flow mode* (the left-hand side)
13
Select the air flow mode* (the right-hand side)
14
Display the rear air conditioning operation screen (→P. 312)
15
Adjust the temperature for the driver’s, front passenger’s and rear seats
(→P. 319) separately (3-ZONE mode) (→P. 309)
To adjust or select settings, move the Remote Touch knob to select the
screen button, and then press the Remote Touch knob or the “ENTER” button of Remote Touch to enter the selected function.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
*:
311
⎯ Air flows to the upper body
⎯ Air flows to the upper body and feet
⎯ Air flows to the feet
■ Option control screen
Select
on the control screen to display the option control screen. The
functions can be switched on and off.
When the function is on, the indicator illuminates on the control screen.
(→P. 310)
1
Prevent ice from building up on
the windshield and wiper blades
(if equipped) (→P. 314)
2
Remove pollen from the air
(Micro dust and pollen filter)
(→P. 314)
5
Interior features
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
312
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Side display (vehicles with 12.3-inch display)

Without rear air conditioning system
1
Adjust the left-hand side temperature setting
2
Select the air flow mode (the front seats)
3
Adjust the fan speed setting
4
Adjust the right-hand side temperature setting
5
Adjust the temperature for the driver’s and front passenger’s seats separately
(DUAL mode) (→P. 309)
6
Set cooling and dehumidification function on/off
7
Select to set automatic mode on/off
8
Select the air flow mode (the left-hand side)
9
Select the air flow mode (the right-hand side)
10
Adjust the temperature for the driver’s, front passenger’s and rear seats
(→P. 319) separately (3-ZONE mode) (→P. 309)

With rear air conditioning system
■ Rear air conditioning control screen (with rear air conditioning system)
1
Adjust the rear seat temperature
setting
2
Disabling the switches on the rear
armrest
3
Turn the fan off (rear seat)
4
Select to set automatic mode on/
off (rear seat)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
313
Air conditioning control
■ Using the automatic mode
1
Press
2
Press
or select “AUTO” on the control screen.
to switch to automatic air intake mode.
The air conditioning system automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes.
3
Adjust the temperature setting. (→P. 309)
To stop the operation, press the “OFF” button.
Air outlets and fan speed for the driver and passenger seats may be adjusted separately depending on the temperature setting.
When the front seat heaters and ventilators/rear seat heaters are set to AUTO
mode, the system is operated automatically according to the set temperature, outside temperature, etc.
■ Automatic mode indicator
If the fan speed setting or air flow modes are operated, the automatic mode
indicator goes off. However, automatic mode for functions other than that
operated is maintained.
5
Interior features
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
314
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Other functions
■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press
.
The mode switches among
(recirculated air mode), automatic and
(outside air mode) modes each time the button is pressed.
When the system is switched to automatic mode, the air conditioning system operates automatically.
■ Defogging the windshield
Defoggers are used to defog the windshield and front side windows.
Press
.
Set the outside/recirculated air mode button to outside air mode if the recirculated
air mode is used. (It may switch automatically.)
To defog the windshield and the side windows early, turn the air flow and temperature up.
To return to the previous mode, press
again when the windshield is
defogged.
■ Defogging the rear window and outside rear view mirrors
Defoggers are used to defog the rear window and to remove raindrops, dew and frost
from the outside rear view mirrors.
Press
.
The defoggers will automatically turn off after 15 to 60 minutes. The operation
time changes according to the ambient temperature and vehicle speed.
■ Windshield wiper de-icer (if equipped)
This feature is used to prevent ice from building up on the windshield and
wiper blades.
Select
on the option control screen.
The windshield wiper de-icer will automatically turn off after approximately 15
minutes.
■ Micro dust and pollen filter
Pollen is removed from the air and the air flows to the upper part of the body.
Select on the
option control screen.
Usually the system will turn off automatically.
In order to prevent the windshield from fogging up when the outside air is cold, the
dehumidification function may operate.
The pollens are filtered out even if the micro dust and pollen filter is turned off.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
315
Changing the rear seat settings (with rear air conditioning system)
Select
screen.
on the control screen to display the rear air conditioning control
■ Using the automatic mode
1
Select “REAR AUTO” on the screen.
The air conditioning system will operate, and air outlets and speed will be set automatically.
When the rear seat heaters are set to automatic mode, the system is operated
automatically according to the set temperature, outside temperature, etc.
2
Adjust the temperature setting.
To stop the operation, select “REAR OFF”.
■ Adjusting the temperature setting
Select
ture.
to increase the temperature and
to decrease the tempera-
The air conditioning system switches between individual and simultaneous modes
each time “3-ZONE” on the control screen is selected.
■ Disabling the switches on the rear armrest.
.
Rear seat heater switches (→P. 323) are also locked.
Air outlets
■ Location of air outlets
The air outlets and air volume changes
according to the selected air flow mode.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Interior features
Select
5
316
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets

Front center outlets and front side
outlets

Rear seat outlets
1
Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down.
2
Turn the knob to open or close the vent.
■ Registering air conditioning settings to electronic keys
● Unlocking the vehicle using an electronic key and turning the engine switch to IGNI-
TION ON mode will recall that key’s registered air conditioning settings.
● When the engine switch is turned off, the current air conditioning settings will automat-
ically be registered to the electronic key that was used to unlock the vehicle.
● The system may not operate correctly if more than one electronic key is in the vicinity or
if the smart access system with push-button start is used to unlock a passenger door.
● Settings for the electronic key and the corresponding door can be changed. Contact
your Lexus dealer.
■ Using automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting and the ambient conditions.
Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow immediately
after
is pressed.
Cool air may blow around the upper body even when the heater is on due to sunlight.
■ Fogging up of the windows
● The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high. Turning “A/C” on
will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the windshield effectively.
● If you turn “A/C” off, the windows may fog up more easily.
● The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.
■ Outside/recirculated air mode
● When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the outside/recirculated air mode button to the recirculated air mode. This is effective in preventing outside air from entering the vehicle interior. During cooling operation, setting the
recirculated air mode will also cool the vehicle interior effectively.
● Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on the temperature setting or the inside temperature.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
317
■ When the outside temperature exceeds 75°F (24°C) and the air conditioning system
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
5
Interior features
is on
● In order to reduce the air conditioning power consumption, the air conditioning system
may switch to recirculated air mode automatically. This may also reduce fuel consumption.
● Recirculated air mode is selected as a default mode when the engine switch is turned
on.
● It is possible to switch to outside air mode at any time by pressing
.
■ Automatic mode for air intake control
In automatic mode, the system detects exhaust gas and other pollutants and automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes.
When the dehumidification function is off, and the fan is operating, turning automatic
mode on will activate the dehumidification function.
■ Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode
In the Eco drive mode, the air conditioning system is controlled as follows to prioritize
fuel efficiency:
● Engine speed and compressor operation controlled to restrict heating/cooling capacity
● Fan speed restricted when automatic mode is selected
To improve air conditioning performance, perform the following operations:
● Turn off eco air conditioning mode
● Adjust the fan speed
● Turn off Eco drive mode (→P. 273)
■ Eco air conditioning mode
When Eco drive mode is selected using the drive mode select switch, eco air conditioning mode turns on.
When a drive mode other than Eco drive mode is selected, eco air conditioning mode
may turn off.
■ When the S-FLOW mode operates
If air flows to the driver’s seat only, the temperature setting for the front passenger’s seat
is not displayed.
■ When the outside temperature is low
The dehumidification function may not operate even when “A/C” on the option control
screen is selected.
■ Ventilation and air conditioning odors
● To let fresh air in, set the air conditioning system to the outside air mode.
● During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be emitted from the
vents.
● To reduce potential odors from occurring:
• It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode prior
to turning the vehicle off.
• The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time immediately
after the air conditioning system is started in automatic mode.
318
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Air conditioning filter
→P. 408
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. exhaust gas sensor sensitivity) can be changed.
(Customizable features: →P. 545)
WARNING
■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up
● Do not use
during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause
the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.
● Do not place anything on the instrument
panel which may cover the air outlets. Otherwise, air flow may be obstructed, preventing
the windshield defoggers from defogging.
■ To prevent burns
● Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces when the outside rear view mirror defog-
gers are on.
● Vehicles with windshield wiper de-icer: Do not touch the glass at lower part of the
windshield or to the side of the front pillars when the windshield wiper de-icer is on.
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine is
stopped.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
319
Rear air conditioning system∗
Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.
Control panel
5
Set automatic mode on/off
Turn the fan off
■ Adjusting the temperature setting
2
Press “∧” on
3
Change the airflow mode
4
Adjust the temperature setting
to increase the temperature and “∨” to decrease the
temperature.
■ Changing the air outlets
Press
.
The air outlets change as follows each time
is pressed.
: Air flows to the upper body.
: Air flows to the upper body and feet.
: Air flows to the feet.
∗: If equipped
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Interior features
1
320
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Using automatic air conditioning system
1
Press
.
The air conditioning system will operate, and air outlets and fan speed will be adjusted
automatically.
“AUTO” will be displayed on the control panel.
2
Adjust the temperature setting.
When the rear seat heaters are set to “AUTO” mode, the system is operated automatically according to the set temperature, outside temperature, etc.
To stop the operation, press the “OFF” button.
Air outlets
■ Location of air outlets
The air outlets and air volume
changes according to the selected
air flow mode.
■ Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets
1
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
2
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
321
■ Button lock function
To prevent inadvertent operation, the buttons on
the rear armrest can be locked. Press
until you hear a beep to lock the buttons. Pressing
again until you hear a beep will
release the lock.
The indicator appears on the display when the
buttons are locked.
■ Rear control panel illumination off function
Control panel illumination on the rear armrest
can be turned off. Press
until you hear a
beep to turn the illumination off. Pressing
again until you hear a beep will turn the illumination on.
NOTICE
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine is
off.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Interior features
■ To prevent battery discharge
5
322
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Heated steering wheel∗/seat heaters∗/seat ventilators∗
Heated steering wheel and seat heaters heat the side grips of the steering
wheel and seats, respectively. Seat ventilators maintain good airflow by blowing air from the seats.
WARNING
● Care should be taken to prevent injury if anyone in the following categories comes in
contact with the steering wheel or seats when the heater is on:
• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically challenged
• Persons with sensitive skin
• Persons who are fatigued
• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold
remedies, etc.)
● Observe the following precautions to prevent the minor burns or overheating:
• Do not cover the seat with a blanket or cushion when using the seat heater.
• Do not use seat heater more than necessary.
NOTICE
● To prevent damage to the seat heaters/seat ventilators, do not put heavy objects that
have an uneven surface on the seat and do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.)
into the seat.
● To prevent battery discharge, do not use the functions when the engine is off.
Heated steering wheel (If equipped)
Turns the heated steering wheel on/off
The indicator light comes on when the
heater is operating.
● The heated steering wheel can be used when the engine switch is in IGNITION ON
mode.
● The heated steering wheel will automatically turn off after about 30 minutes.
∗: If equipped
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
323
Seat heaters (if equipped)/seat ventilators (if equipped)
■ Front seat heaters and ventilators (if equipped)/rear seat heaters (if
equipped)

Front seats
1
Seat heater switches

Rear seats
The indicator light (yellow) on the switch comes on when the seat heater is operating.
2
Seat ventilator switches (front seats only)
The indicator light (green) on the switch comes on when the seat ventilator is operating.
3
Level indicator lights
“AUTO” indicator lights
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Interior features
The seat heater temperature level or the seat ventilator fan speed level (for front seats
only) is displayed.
4
5
324
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
● Modes and indicators
The mode can be changed by pressing the switch.
Mode
“AUTO” indicator light
Level indicator lights
Off
Off
Off
Automatic*
On
3 to 1, or off
Hi
Off
3
Mid
Off
2
Lo
Off
1
*: When automatic mode is selected, the level automatically changes depending on the
air conditioning settings.
■ Seat heaters (without seat ventilators) (if equipped)
1
Seat heater switches
2
Level indicator lights
The seat heater temperature level is
displayed.
● Modes and indicators
The mode changes each time the switch is pressed as follows:
Mode
Level indicator lights
Automatic operation*
Off
Off
⎯
Hi
3
Hi → Mid → Lo
Mid
2
Mid → Lo
Lo
1
Lo
*: The mode changes automatically depending on the amount of time that has elapsed.
The amount of time until the mode changes varies depending on the interior temperature when the seat heater was operated and other factors.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
325
■ Seat ventilators (without seat heaters) (if equipped)
1
Seat ventilator switches
2
Level indicator lights
The seat ventilator fan speed level is
displayed.
● Modes and indicators
The mode changes each time the switch is pressed as follows:
Mode
Level indicator lights
Off
Off
Hi
3
Mid
2
Lo
1
5
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Seat heater control (vehicles without automatic mode)
The seat heater automatically changes operations. If the engine switch is turned off while
the seat heater is operating, the starting operation of the heater differs depending on the
amount of time that elapses before it is turned back on.
Current operation
Starting operation mode and amount of time
elapsed until engine switch in IGNITION ON mode
0 to 15 minutes
Over 15 minutes
Hi
Hi
Hi
Mid
Mid
Hi
Lo
Lo
Hi
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Interior features
■ The seat heaters/seat ventilators can be used when
326
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Automatic operation of the seat heater during Eco drive mode
If the driving mode select switch is switched to Eco drive mode in cold temperatures, the
seat heater may be automatically operated to assist heating performance.
■ Automatic operation during S-FLOW mode
The front seat heater and ventilator or the rear seat heater may automatically turn off
when S-FLOW mode is turned on during automatic mode. (→P. 309)
■ Button lock function (vehicles with rear control panel)
To prevent inadvertent operation, some buttons on the rear armrest can be locked.
(→P. 321)
■ When the switch is disabled (vehicles with rear control panel)
When the rear control panel switch cannot be operated even though the button lock
function is released, check whether the switch is disabled due to selecting
on
Remote Touch screen. (→P. 315)
■ Rear control panel illumination off function (vehicles with rear control panel)
Control panel illumination on the rear armrest can be turned off. (→P. 321)
■ Customization
The automatic mode settings for the front seat heaters and ventilators or the rear seat
heaters can be changed. (Customizable features: →P. 545)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
5-3. Using the interior lights
327
Interior lights list
5
Outer foot lights
2
Shift lever light
3
Front interior light
6
Rear personal lights
Rear interior light
(→P. 328)
(→P. 328)
7
Ornament lights
4
Front personal lights (→P. 328)
8
Door courtesy lights
5
Inside door handle lights
9
Power window switch lights
10
Footwell lights
When the instrument panel light control switch is turned to minimum and the tail lights
are on, the inside door handle lights, the ornament lights and the footwell lights will
turn off. (→P. 89, 97)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Interior features
1
328
5-3. Using the interior lights
Interior lights
1
Turns the lights on/off
The rear interior light is also turned on/
off.
2
Turns the door position on/off
Personal lights
■ Front
Turns the light on/off
■ Rear
Turns the light on/off
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
5-3. Using the interior lights
329
● Illuminated entry system: The lights automatically turn on/off according to engine
switch mode, the presence of the electronic key, whether the doors are locked/
unlocked, and whether the doors are opened/closed.
● If the interior lights remain on when the engine switch is turned off, the lights will go off
automatically after 20 minutes.
● Setting (e.g. the time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed.
(Customizable features: →P. 545)
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge, do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the
engine is off.
5
Interior features
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
330
5-4. Using the storage features
List of storage features
1
Cup holders
(→P. 332)
4
Auxiliary boxes
(→P. 333)
2
Glove box
(→P. 331)
5
Console box
(→P. 331)
3
Auxiliary boxes (if equipped)
(→P. 333)
Ashtrays (if equipped) (→P. 339)
WARNING
● Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this may cause
the following when cabin temperature becomes high:
• Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact with other
stored items.
• Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other stored
items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas, causing a fire
hazard.
● When driving or when the storage compartments are not in use, keep the lids closed.
In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerving, an accident may occur due to an
occupant being struck by an open lid or the items stored inside.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
5-4. Using the storage features
331
Glove box
1
Open (press the button)
2
Unlock with the mechanical key
3
Lock with the mechanical key
● The glove box light turns on when the tail lights are on.
● The trunk opener main switch is located in the glove box. (→P. 145)
● The insert inside the glove box can be removed.
● An SRS knee airbag for the front passenger’s seat is built into the glove box door.
(→P. 41)
Console box
Using with half-open
Grip the knob to release the lock,
and slide the armrest as far back.
2
Using with fully open
Grip the knob to release the lock,
and lift the armrest to open.
● The tray slides forward/backward and can be
removed.
● The console box light turns on when the tail lights are on.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
5
Interior features
1
332
5-4. Using the storage features
WARNING
When using the console box with half-open, do not apply too much load on the armrest. Doing so may damage the armrest and may cause you to injure yourself.
Cup holders
■ Front
To open, press down and release the
cup holder lid.
■ Rear
To open, pull down the armrest and
press in and release the rear cup
holder on the armrest.
● Front cup holder: The cup holder insert may
be removed for cleaning.
● Rear cup holder: When stowing the cup holder, stow the cup holder with the armrest
down. The cup holder cannot be stowed if the armrest is not down.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
5-4. Using the storage features
333
WARNING
Do not place anything other than cups or beverage cans in the cup holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden
braking, causing injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the rear cup holder, stow the cup holder before stowing the armrest.
Auxiliary boxes

Type A

Type B
5

Pull up the lever to release the lock
and lift the lid.
Type C (if equipped)
Open the lid.
WARNING
Type C: Do not use the auxiliary box as an ashtray.
Doing so may cause a fire.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Interior features
Press in the button.
334
5-4. Using the storage features
Trunk features
Cargo hooks
Raise the hooks when needed.
The cargo hooks are provided for
securing loose items.
WARNING
To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks to their stowed positions when not in use.
Luggage hook
Pull the strap when using the hook.
NOTICE
Do not hang any object heavier than 11 lb. (5 kg) on the luggage hook.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
5-4. Using the storage features
335
First-aid kit storage net
Luggage mat
■ Center

Type A

Type B
5
Interior features
Pull the strap upwards to lift up the
luggage mat.
Pull the lever upwards to lift up the
luggage mat.
The lever can be hooked on the luggage hook.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
336

5-4. Using the storage features
Type C
Pull the strap upwards to lift up the
luggage mat.
■ Left side
Pull the strap upwards when lifting
the luggage mat up.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
5-4. Using the storage features
337
Warning reflector storage belt (if equipped)
1
Loosen the belt
2
Tighten the belt
To prevent damage to the warning reflector
storage belt when it is not in use, fold the belt (as
shown in 1 ) and secure it with the clip ( 2 ).
5
Interior features
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
338
5-5. Using the other interior features
Other interior features
Sun visors
1
To set the visor in the forward position, flip it down.
2
To set the visor in the side position,
flip down, unhook, and swing it to the
side.
3
To use the side extender, place the
visor in the side position, then slide it
backward.
Vanity mirrors
Slide the cover to open.
The light turns on when the cover is
opened.
NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge, do not leave the vanity lights on for extended periods
while the engine is off.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
5-5. Using the other interior features
339
Clock
The GPS clock’s time is automatically
adjusted by utilizing GPS time information.
For details, refer to “NAVIGATION
SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
Ashtrays (if equipped)
Open the ashtray lid.
To remove the ashtray, pull the ashtray
lid upwards.
5
● Keep the ashtray closed when not in use. In the event of sudden braking or sudden
swerving, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the open ashtray or ash flying out.
● To prevent fire
• Fully extinguish matches and cigarettes before putting them in the ashtray, then
make sure the ashtray is fully closed.
• Do not place paper or any other type of flammable object in the ashtray.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Interior features
WARNING
340
5-5. Using the other interior features
Power outlets
Please use as a power supply for electronic goods that use less than 12 V DC /
10 A (power consumption of 120 W).

Front

Rear
Open the lid.
The power outlets can be used when the engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
NOTICE
● To avoid damaging the power outlets, close the power outlet lids when the power out-
lets are not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlets may cause a short circuit.
● To prevent battery discharge, do not use the power outlets longer than necessary
when the engine is off.
Armrest
Fold down the armrest for use.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the armrest, do not apply too much load on the armrest.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
5-5. Using the other interior features
341
Rear sunshade (if equipped)/rear door sunshades (if equipped)
■ Rear sunshade
The rear sunshade can be raised and lowered by operating the button shown
below.

From the front seats

From the rear seats (if equipped)
5
Pull up the lever to release the lock.
2
Slide the armrest.
3
Raise/lower
■ Rear door sunshades
Pull the tab of the rear door sunshade and hook the shade on using
the anchors.
To retract the rear door sunshade,
unhook the shade and retract it
slowly.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Interior features
1
342
5-5. Using the other interior features
● The rear sunshade can be used when the engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
● The rear sunshade can be operated for approximately 1 minute even after the engine
switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off.
● Reverse operation feature: To ensure adequate rear visibility, the rear sunshade auto-
matically lowers when the shift lever is shifted to R.
However, the rear sunshade is raised again if any of the following occurs:
• The button is pressed again.*
• Shift the shift lever into P.
• The shift lever is shifted out of R, and the vehicle reaches a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h).
If the engine is off when the rear sunshade has been lowered due to the reverse operation feature, it will not be raised even when the engine is turned on again and the vehicle reaches a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h). To raise the sunshade again, press the button.
*: Occasionally, the reverse function may not be carried out after the switch has been
pressed. Repeat the above operation to operate the function.
● Vehicles with rear control panel: To prevent inadvertent operation, some buttons on the
rear armrest can be locked. (→P. 321)
● Vehicles with rear control panel: Control panel illumination on the rear armrest can be
turned off. (→P. 321)
● Time elapsed before the reverse operation feature activates can be changed.
(Customizable features: →P. 545)
WARNING
When the rear sunshade is being operated, do not place fingers or other objects in the
fastener section or in the opening.
They may get caught, causing injury.
NOTICE
● To prevent battery discharge, do not operate the rear sunshade when the engine is
off.
● Observe the following precautions to ensure normal operation of the rear sunshade
and rear door sunshades.
• Do not place excessive load on the motor or other components of the rear sunshade.
• Do not place objects where they may hinder opening and closing operations.
• Do not attach items to the rear sunshade and rear door sunshades.
• Keep the opening clean and clear of obstructions.
• Do not operate the rear sunshade continuously for long periods of time.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
5-5. Using the other interior features
343
Trunk storage extension
Long objects can be loaded into the vehicle by utilizing the trunk space and rear
seat area.
1
Fold down the armrest.
2
Fold down the handle and open the
armrest door.
The armrest door can be locked and
unlocked using the mechanical key.
1
Unlock
2
Lock
Ensure that the armrest door is closed when not in use.
In the event of sudden braking, items stored in the trunk may be thrown forward into
the cabin, resulting in injury.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Interior features
WARNING
5
344
5-5. Using the other interior features
Coat hooks
The coat hooks are provided with the
rear assist grips.
WARNING
Do not hang coat hangers or other hard or sharp objects on the hook. If the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy, these items may become projectiles, causing death or serious injury.
Assist grips
An assist grip installed on the ceiling
can be used to support your body while
sitting on the seat.
WARNING
Do not use the assist grip when getting in or out of the vehicle or rising from your seat.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the assist grip, do not hang any heavy object or put a heavy load
on the assist grip.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
5-5. Using the other interior features
345
Garage door opener
The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage doors, gates,
entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, security systems, and other
devices.
Programming HomeLink®
The HomeLink® wireless control system in your vehicle has 3 buttons which can
be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the programming methods on the following pages to determine the method which is appropriate for the
device.
1
HomeLink® indicator light
2
Garage door operation indicators
3
HomeLink® icon
Illuminates while HomeLink® is operating.
4
Buttons
● During programming, it is possible that garage doors, gates, or other
devices may operate. For this reason, make sure that people and objects
are clear of the garage door or other devices to prevent injury or other
potential harm.
● It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the remote control
transmitter for more accurate programming.
● Garage door opener motors manufactured after 1995 may be equipped
with rolling code protection. If this is the case, you may need a stepladder
or other sturdy, safe device to reach the “Learn” or “Smart” button on the
garage door opener motor.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Interior features
■ Before programming HomeLink®
5
346
5-5. Using the other interior features
■ Programming HomeLink®
Steps 1 through 3 must be performed within 60 seconds, otherwise the
indicator light will stop flashing and programming will not be able to be completed.
1
Press and release the HomeLink® button you want to program and check
that the HomeLink® indicator light flashes (orange).
2
Point the remote control transmitter for the device at the rear view
mirror, 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm)
from the HomeLink® buttons.
Keep the HomeLink® indicator light
in view while programming.
3
Program a device.

Programming a device other than an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)
Press and hold the remote control transmitter button until the HomeLink®
indicator light changes from slowly flashing orange to rapidly flashing
green (rolling code) or continuously lit green (fixed code), then release the
button.

Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Programming a device
in the Canadian market
Press and release the remote control transmitter button at 2 second intervals, repeatedly, until the HomeLink® indicator light changes from slowly
flashing (orange) to rapidly flashing (green) (rolling code) or continuously
lit (green) (fixed code).
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
5-5. Using the other interior features
347
4
Test the HomeLink® operation by pressing the newly programmed button
and observing the indicator light:
● Indicator light illuminates: Programming of a fixed code device has completed. The garage door or other device should operate when a HomeLink® button is pressed and released.
● Indicator light flashes rapidly: The garage door opener motor or other
device is equipped with a rolling code. To complete programming, firmly
press and hold the HomeLink® button for 2 seconds then release it.
● If the garage door or other device does not operate, proceed to “Programming a rolling code system”.
5
Repeat the steps above to program another device for any of the remaining
HomeLink® buttons.
■ Programming a rolling code system
2 or more people may be necessary to complete rolling code programming.
1
Locate the “Learn” or “Smart”
button on the garage door
opener motor in the garage.
2
Press and release the “Learn” or
“Smart” button.
Perform 3 within 30 seconds
after performing 2 .
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
5
Interior features
This button can usually be found
where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the unit. The name and
color of the button may vary by manufacturer. Refer to the owner’s manual supplied with the garage door
opener motor for details.
348
5-5. Using the other interior features
3
Press and hold the desired
HomeLink® button (inside the
vehicle) for 2 seconds and
release it. Repeat this sequence
(press/hold/release) up to 3
times to complete programming.
If the garage door opener motor
operates when the HomeLink®
button is pressed, the garage
door opener motor recognizes
the HomeLink® signal.
■ Enabling 2-way communication with a garage door (only available for com-
patible devices)
When enabled, 2-way communication allows you to check the status of the
opening and closing of a garage door through indicators in your vehicle.
2-way communication is only available if the garage door opener motor used
is a compatible device. (To check device compatibility, refer to www.HomeLink.com.)
1
Within 5 seconds after programming the garage door opener has been
completed, if the garage door opener motor is trained to HomeLink®,
both garage door operation indicators will flash rapidly (green) and the
light on the garage door opener motor will blink twice, indicating that 2way communication is enabled.
If the indicators do not flash, perform 2 and 3 within the first 10 presses of
the HomeLink® button after programming has been completed.
2
Press a programmed HomeLink® button to operate a garage door.
3
Within 1 minute of pressing the HomeLink® button, after the garage door
operation has stopped, press the “Learn” or “Smart” button on the garage
door opener motor. Within 5 seconds of the establishment of 2-way communication with the garage door opener, both garage door operation indicators in the vehicle will flash rapidly (green) and the light on the garage
door opener motor will blink twice, indicating that 2-way communication is
enabled.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
5-5. Using the other interior features
349
■ Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button
When the following procedure is performed, buttons which already have
devices registered to them can be overwritten:
1
With one hand, press and hold the desired HomeLink® button.
2
When the HomeLink® indicator starts flashing (orange), continue to hold
the HomeLink® button and perform “Programming HomeLink®” 1 (it
takes 20 seconds for the HomeLink® indicator to start flashing).
Operating HomeLink®
Press the appropriate HomeLink® button. The HomeLink® indicator light
should turn on.
Garage door operation indicators
The status of the opening and closing of
a garage door is shown by the indicators.
1
Opening
2
Closing
5
Color
Status
Orange (flashing)
Currently opening/closing
Green
Opening/closing has completed
Red (flashing)
Feedback signals cannot be received
The indicators can operate within approximately 820 ft. (250 m) of the
garage door. However, if there are obstructions between the garage door and
the vehicle, such as houses and trees, feedback signals from the garage door
may not be received.
To recall the previous door operation status, press and release either HomeLink® buttons
and
or
and
last recorded status will be displayed for 3 seconds.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
simultaneously. The
Interior features
This function is only available if the
garage door opener motor used is a
compatible device. (To check device
compatibility, refer to www.HomeLink.com.)
350
5-5. Using the other interior features
Erasing the entire HomeLink® memory (all three codes)
Press and hold the 2 outside buttons for
10 seconds until the HomeLink® indicator light changes from continuously
lit (orange) to rapidly flashing (green).
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase
the programs stored in the HomeLink®
memory.
■ Codes stored in the HomeLink® memory
● The registered codes are not erased even if the battery cable is disconnected.
● If learning failed when registering a different code to a HomeLink® button that already
has a code registered to it, the already registered code will not be erased.
■ Before programming
● Install a new battery in the transmitter.
● The battery side of the transmitter must be pointed away from the HomeLink®.
■ Certification for the garage door opener

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, NATO Germany, Guam and Puerto Rico
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
5-5. Using the other interior features

351
For vehicles sold in Canada
■ When support is necessary
Visit on the web at www.homelink.com/lexus or call 1-800-355-3515.
WARNING
■ When programming a garage door or other remote control device
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
5
Interior features
The garage door or other device may operate, so ensure people and objects are out of
danger to prevent potential harm.
■ Conforming to federal safety standards
Do not use the HomeLink® compatible transceiver with any garage door opener or
device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards.
This includes any garage door that cannot detect an interfering object. A door or
device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury.
■ When operating or programming HomeLink®
Never allow a child to operate or play with the HomeLink® buttons.
352
5-5. Using the other interior features
LEXUS Enform Safety Connect∗
Safety Connect is a subscription-based telematics service that uses Global
Positioning System (GPS) data and embedded cellular technology to provide
safety and security features to subscribers. Safety Connect is supported by
Lexus’ designated response center, which operates 24 hours per day, 7 days
per week.
Safety Connect service is available by subscription on select, telematics hardware-equipped vehicles.
By using the Safety Connect service, you are agreeing to be bound by the
Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and its Terms and Conditions, as
in effect and amended from time to time, a current copy of which is available
at Lexus.com. All use of the Safety Connect service is subject to such thenapplicable Terms and Conditions.
System components
1
“SOS” button
2
LED light indicators
3
Microphone
∗: If equipped
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
5-5. Using the other interior features
353
Services
Subscribers have the following Safety Connect services available:
● Automatic Collision Notification*
Helps drivers receive necessary response from emergency service providers.
(→P. 354)
*: U.S. Patent No. 7,508,298 B2
● Stolen Vehicle Location
Helps drivers in the event of vehicle theft. (→P. 354)
● Emergency Assistance Button (“SOS”)
Connects drivers to response-center support. (→P. 354)
● Enhanced Roadside Assistance
Provides drivers various on-road assistance. (→P. 355)
Subscription
After you have signed the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and are
enrolled, you can begin receiving services.
■ Safety Connect Services Information
● Phone calls using the vehicles Bluetooth® technology will not be possible during Safety
Connect.
● Contact with the Safety Connect response center is dependent upon the telematics
device being in operative condition, cellular connection availability, and GPS satellite
signal reception, which can limit the ability to reach the response center or receive
emergency service support. Enrollment and Telematics Subscription Service Agreement required. A variety of subscription terms is available; charges vary by subscription
term selected.
● Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance and Stolen Vehicle Location
will function in the United States, including Hawaii and Alaska, and in Canada, and
Enhanced Roadside Assistance will function in the United States (except Hawaii) and in
Canada. No Safety Connect services will function outside of the United States in countries other than Canada.
● Safety Connect services are not subject to section 255 of the Telecommunications Act
and the device is not TTY compatible.
■ Languages
The Safety Connect response center will offer support in multiple languages. The Safety
Connect system will offer voice prompts in English and Spanish. Please indicate your language of choice when enrolling.
■ When contacting the response center
You may be unable to contact the response center if the network is busy.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
5
Interior features
A variety of subscription terms is available for purchase. Contact your Lexus
dealer, call 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) or push the “SOS” button in
your vehicle for further subscription details.
354
5-5. Using the other interior features
Safety Connect LED light Indicators
When the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, the red indicator
light comes on for 2 seconds then turns off. Afterward, the green indicator light
comes on, indicating that the service is active.
The following indicator light patterns indicate specific system usage conditions:
● Green indicator light on = Active service
● Green indicator light flashing = Safety Connect call in process
● Red indicator light (except at vehicle start-up) = System malfunction (contact
your Lexus dealer)
● No indicator light (off) = Safety Connect service not active
Safety Connect services
■ Automatic Collision Notification
In case of either airbag deployment or severe rear-end collision, the system is
designed to automatically call the response center. The responding agent
receives the vehicle’s location and attempts to speak with the vehicle occupants to assess the level of emergency. If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emergency, contacts the
nearest emergency services provider to describe the situation, and requests
that assistance be sent to the location.
■ Stolen Vehicle Location
If your vehicle is stolen, Safety Connect can work with local authorities to
assist them in locating and recovering the vehicle. After filing a police report,
call the Safety Connect response center at 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-2553987) and follow the prompts for Safety Connect to initiate this service.
In addition to assisting law enforcement with recovery of a stolen vehicle,
Safety-Connect-equipped vehicle location data may, under certain circumstances, be shared with third parties to locate your vehicle. Further information is available at Lexus.com.
■ Emergency Assistance Button (“SOS”)
In the event of an emergency on the road, push the “SOS” button to reach the
Safety Connect response center. The answering agent will determine your
vehicle’s location, assess the emergency, and dispatch the necessary assistance required.
If you accidentally press the “SOS” button, tell the response-center agent that you
are not experiencing an emergency.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
5-5. Using the other interior features
355
■ Enhanced Roadside Assistance
Enhanced Roadside Assistance adds GPS data to the already included warranty-based Lexus roadside service.
Subscribers can press the “SOS” button to reach a Safety Connect responsecenter agent, who can help with a wide range of needs, such as: towing, flat
tire, fuel delivery, etc. For a description of the Roadside Assistance services
and their limitations, please see the Safety Connect Terms and Conditions,
which are available at Lexus.com.
Safety information for Safety Connect
Important! Read this information before using Safety Connect.
■ Exposure to radio frequency signals
The Safety Connect system installed in your vehicle is a low-power radio
transmitter and receiver. It receives and also sends out radio frequency (RF)
signals.
Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic evaluations of
the relevant scientific literature. Over 120 scientists, engineers, and physicians from universities, and government health agencies and industries
reviewed the available body of research to develop the ANSI Standard
(C95.1).
The design of Safety Connect complies with the FCC guidelines in addition to
those standards.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
5
Interior features
In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) adopted
RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for mobile wireless phones. Those
guidelines are consistent with the safety standards previously set by the following U.S. and international standards bodies.
● ANSI (American National Standards Institute) C95.1 [1992]
● NCRP (National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement)
Report 86 [1986]
● ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection)
[1996]
356
5-5. Using the other interior features
■ Certification for Lexus Enform
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
357
Maintenance and care
6
6-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior ................358
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior..................362
6-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements...365
General maintenance.............. 367
Emission inspection
and maintenance (I/M)
programs....................................370
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions..................................371
Hood ............................................... 373
Positioning a floor jack ............ 374
Engine compartment ............... 376
Tires .................................................393
Tire inflation pressure...............403
Wheels ...........................................406
Air conditioning filter .............. 408
Electronic key battery............... 410
Checking and replacing
fuses................................................412
Headlight aim (vehicles with
single-beam headlights)........ 416
Light bulbs...................................... 418
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
358
6-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior
Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condition:
● Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle body, wheel
●
●
●
●
wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt and dust.
Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois.
For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with
water.
Wipe away any water.
Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle body is cool.
■ CFRP (Carbon Fiber Reinforced Plastic) part (GS F)
CFRP is used for the parts shown in the illustration.
● As the CFRP parts may change color if they
are exposed to ultraviolet rays for extended
periods of time, Lexus recommends that your
vehicle be stored in a place where it will not be
exposed to direct sunlight.
● Do not use wax that contains abrasives.
● CFRP parts may get scratched when using an
automatic car wash.
■ Self-restoring coat*
The vehicle body has a self-restoring coating that is resistant to small surface scratches
caused in a car wash etc.
● The coating lasts for 5 to 8 years from when the vehicle is delivered from the plant.
● The restoration time differs depending on the depth of the scratch and outside temperature. The restoration time may become shorter when the coating is warmed by
applying warm water.
● Deep scratches caused by keys, coins, etc. cannot be restored.
● Do not use wax that contain abrasives.
*: CFRP parts (GS F) do not have a self-restoring coat.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
6-1. Maintenance and care
359
■ Automatic car washes
● Fold the mirrors before washing the vehicle. Start washing from the front of the vehicle.
Make sure to extend the mirrors before driving.
● Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and harm your
vehicle’s paint.
● Rear spoiler (if equipped) may not be washable in some automatic car washes. There
may also be an increased risk of damage to vehicle.
■ High-pressure car washes
● Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the windows.
● Before using the car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed prop-
erly.
■ Notes for a smart access system with push-button start
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
6
Maintenance and care
If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range, the
door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the following correction procedures to wash the vehicle:
● Place the key in a position 6 ft. (2 m) or more separate from the vehicle while the vehicle is being washed. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)
● Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart access system with
push-button start. (→P. 152)
■ Aluminum wheels
● Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent.
● Wash detergent off with water immediately after use.
● To protect the paint from damage, make sure to observe the following precautions.
• Do not use acidic, alkaline or abrasive detergent
• Do not use hard brushes
• Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, such as after driving or parking in hot weather
■ Brake
● Brake caliper coating (GS350/GS300 with orange brake calipers for F SPORT models, and GS F)
• When using detergent, use neutral detergent.
Do not use hard brushes or abrasive cleaners, as they will damage the coating.
• Do not use detergent on the brake calipers when they are hot.
• Wash detergent off immediately after use.
● GS F: Rust may form if the vehicle is parked with wet brake pads or disc rotors, causing
them to stick. Before parking the vehicle after it is washed, drive slowly and apply the
brakes several times to dry the parts.
■ Bumpers
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
360
6-1. Maintenance and care
■ Front side windows water-repellent coating (if equipped)
● The following precautions can extend the effectiveness of the water-repellent coating.
• Remove any dirt, etc. from the front side windows regularly.
• Do not allow dirt and dust to accumulate on the windows for a long period.
Clean the windows with a soft, damp cloth as soon as possible.
• Do not use wax or glass cleaners that contain abrasives when cleaning the windows.
• Do not use any metallic objects to remove condensation build up.
● When the water-repellent performance has become insufficient, the coating can be
repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer.
WARNING
■ When washing the vehicle
Do not apply water to the inside of the engine compartment. Doing so may cause the
electrical components etc. to catch fire.
■ When cleaning the windshield (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)
Turn off AUTO mode of the wiper to prevent
the wiper from operating. (→P. 223)
If AUTO mode is selected, the wipers may
operate unexpectedly in the following situations, and may result in hands being caught or
other serious injuries and cause damage to the
wiper blades.
● When the upper part of the windshield where the raindrop sensor is located is
touched by hand
● When a wet rag or similar is held close to the raindrop sensor
● If something bumps against the windshield
● If you directly touch the raindrop sensor body or if something bumps into the raindrop
sensor
■ Precautions regarding the exhaust pipes and rear bumper diffusers
Exhaust gases cause the exhaust pipes and rear bumper diffusers to become quite hot.
When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipes and rear bumper diffusers
until they have cooled sufficiently, as touching hot exhaust pipes and rear bumper diffusers can cause burns.
■ Precaution regarding the rear bumper with Blind Spot Monitor (if equipped)
If the paint of the rear bumper is chipped or scratched, the system may malfunction. If
this occurs, consult your Lexus dealer.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
6-1. Maintenance and care
361
NOTICE
■ Application of coatings to the vehicle body (GS F)
• Traction related parts
• Suspension parts
• Steering parts
• Brake parts
● GS F: Do not point the nozzle of a high pres-
sure washer at the areas shown in the illustration, as high pressure water may damage the
oil coolers.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
6
Maintenance and care
Do not apply any kind of coating to the vehicle body as doing so may damage the paint
or reduce its durability.
■ To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and components (aluminum
wheels etc.)
● Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:
• After driving near the sea coast
• After driving on salted roads
• If coal tar, pollen or tree sap is present on the paint surface
• If dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings are present on the paint surface
• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron powder or chemical substances
• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled with dust or mud
• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface
● If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.
● To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place with low
humidity when storing the wheels.
■ Cleaning the exterior lights
● Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.
This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
● Do not apply wax to the surfaces of the lights.
Wax may cause damage to the lenses.
■ When using an automatic car wash (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)
Turn off AUTO mode of the wiper to prevent the wiper from operating. (→P. 223)
If AUTO mode is selected, the wipers may operate and the wiper blades may be damaged.
■ When using a high-pressure car wash
● When washing the vehicle, do not let water from the high-pressure washer directly hit
the camera or the area around the camera. Due to the shock from high-pressure
water, it is possible that the device may not operate normally.
● Do not bring the nozzle tip close to boots (rubber or resin manufactured cover), connectors or the following parts. The parts may be damaged if they come into contact
with high-pressure water.
362
6-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior
The following procedures will help protect your vehicle’s interior and keep it
in top condition:
Protecting the vehicle interior
● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a cloth
dampened with lukewarm water.
● If dirt cannot be removed, wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with neutral
detergent diluted to approximately 1%.
Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off remaining
traces of detergent and water.
Cleaning the areas with satin-finish metal accents
● Remove dirt using a soft cloth or synthetic chamois dampened in a baking
soda (sodium bicarbonate) solution.
Use a solution of approximately 9% baking soda dissolved in water.
● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture.
Cleaning the leather areas
● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
● Wipe off any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with diluted
detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent.
● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all remain-
ing traces of detergent.
● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture.
Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and ventilated area.
Cleaning the synthetic leather areas
● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
● Wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with neutral detergent diluted to
approximately 1%.
● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off remaining
traces of detergent and water.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
6-1. Maintenance and care
363
Cleaning the artificial leather (Alcantara®*) areas
● Brush the surfaces using a soft brush.
Do not brush hard as doing so may cause damage.
● Wipe the surfaces clean with a soft cloth that has been dampened in cold or
lukewarm water and squeezed out.
● Allow the artificial leather (Alcantara®*) to dry in a shaded and ventilated
area.
*: “Alcantara®” is a registered trademark of Alcantara S.p.A.
■ Caring for leather areas
Lexus recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain
the quality of the vehicle’s interior.
■ Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush to
apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not use water. Wipe dirty surfaces and let
them dry. Excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible.
■ Seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the belts
periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
■ When cleaning the carpeted portions of the glove box, console box, etc.
If a strong adhesive tape is used, there is a possibility that the surface of the carpet could
be damaged.
6
WARNING
● Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle.
Doing so may cause electrical components, etc. to malfunction or catch fire.
● Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet. (→P. 43)
An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly,
resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)
Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off the windshield, obstructing the driver’s view and leading to an accident, resulting in death or
serious injury.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Maintenance and care
■ Water in the vehicle
364
6-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■ Cleaning detergents
● Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehicle interior
or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces:
• Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, alkaline or
acidic solutions, dye, and bleach
• Seats: Alkaline or acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, and alcohol
● Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel’s or other interior part’s
painted surface may be damaged.
■ Preventing damage to leather surfaces
Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather
surfaces:
● Remove any dust or dirt from leather surfaces immediately.
● Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time. Park the
vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.
● Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or containing wax on the upholstery, as they
may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly.
■ Water on the floor
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.
Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into contact
with electrical components such as the audio system above or under the floor of the
vehicle. Water may also cause the body to rust.
■ When cleaning the inside of the windshield (vehicles with Lexus Safety System+)
Do not allow glass cleaner to contact the lens. Also, do not touch the lens. (→P. 234)
■ Cleaning the inside of the rear window
● Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to the
rear window defogger heater wires or antenna. Use a cloth dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes running
parallel to the heater wires or antenna.
● Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
6-2. Maintenance
365
Maintenance requirements
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance are essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform regular checks.
Lexus recommends the following maintenance:
General maintenance
General maintenance should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by
yourself or by a Lexus dealer.
Scheduled maintenance
Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified intervals according to
the maintenance schedule.
For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the “Warranty and Service Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Scheduled Maintenance”.
Do-it-yourself maintenance
You can perform some maintenance procedures by yourself.
Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage.
■ Repair and replacement
It is recommended that genuine Lexus parts be used for repairs to ensure performance
of each system. If non-Lexus parts are used in replacement or if a repair shop other than
a Lexus dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
6
Maintenance and care
The use of Lexus repair manuals is recommended.
For details about warranty coverage, refer to the separate “Owner’s Guide”, “Warranty and Service Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet”.
366
6-2. Maintenance
■ Resetting the message indicating maintenance is required (U.S.A. only)
After the required maintenance is performed according to the maintenance schedule,
please reset the message.
To reset the message, follow the procedure described below:
1
Press
or
of the meter control switch and select
2
Press
.
or
of the meter control switch and select “Vehicle Settings”. Then press
3
Press
or
of the meter control switch and select “Scheduled Maintenance”.
Then press .
Select “Yes” and press .
A message is displayed on the multi-information display.
4
5
.
■ Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Lexus dealer
● Lexus technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest ser-
vice information. They are well informed about the operations of all systems on your
vehicle.
● Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your vehicle is
under warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it.
WARNING
■ If your vehicle is not properly maintained
Improper maintenance could result in serious damage to the vehicle and possible
death or serious injury.
■ Handling of the battery
● Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area.
● Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by component
wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash any affected area
immediately.
● Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds
which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after handling. (→P. 390)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
6-2. Maintenance
367
General maintenance
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at
the intervals specified in the “Warranty and Service Guide” or “Owner’s
Manual Supplement”. It is recommended that any problem you notice should
be brought to the attention of your Lexus dealer or qualified service shop for
advice.
Engine compartment
Items
Check points
Check the battery fluid level and connections.
(→P. 390)
Brake fluid
Is the brake fluid at the correct level? (→P. 389)
Engine coolant
Is the engine coolant at the correct level?
(→P. 386)
Engine oil
Is the engine oil at the correct level? (→P. 381)
Exhaust system
There should not be any fumes or strange sounds.
Radiator/condenser
The radiator and condenser should be free from foreign objects. (→P. 388)
Washer fluid
Is there sufficient washer fluid? (→P. 392)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
6
Maintenance and care
Battery
368
6-2. Maintenance
Vehicle interior
Items
Check points
Accelerator pedal
• The accelerator pedal should move smoothly
(without uneven pedal effort or catching).
Automatic transmission “Park”
mechanism
• When parked on a slope and the shift lever is in P,
is the vehicle securely stopped?
Brake pedal
• Does the brake pedal move smoothly?
• Does the brake pedal have appropriate clearance
from the floor? (→P. 527)
• Does the brake pedal have the correct amount of
free play? (→P. 527)
Brakes
• The vehicle should not pull to one side when the
brakes are applied.
• The brakes should work effectively.
• The brake pedal should not feel spongy.
• The brake pedal should not get too close to the
floor when the brakes are applied.
Head restraints
• Do the head restraints move smoothly and lock
securely?
Indicators/buzzers
• Do the indicators and buzzers function properly?
Lights
• Do all the lights come on?
• Are the headlights aimed correctly?* (→P. 416)
Parking brake
• Moves smoothly?
• When parked on a slope and the parking brake is
on, is the vehicle securely stopped?
Seat belts
• Do the seat belts operate smoothly?
• The seat belts should not be damaged.
Seats
• Do the seat controls operate properly?
Steering wheel
• Does the steering wheel rotate smoothly?
• Does the steering wheel have the correct amount
of free play?
• There should not be any strange sounds coming
from the steering wheel.
*: Vehicles with single-beam headlights
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
6-2. Maintenance
369
Vehicle exterior
Items
Check points
Doors/trunk
• Do the doors/trunk operate smoothly?
Engine hood
• Does the engine hood lock system work properly?
Fluid leaks
• There should not be any signs of fluid leakage
after the vehicle has been parked.
Tires
• Is the tire inflation pressure correct?
• The tires should not be damaged or excessively
worn.
• Have the tires been rotated according to the
maintenance schedule?
• The wheel nuts should not be loose.
Windshield wipers
• The wiper blades should not show any signs of
cracking, splitting, wear, contamination or deformation.
• The wiper blades should clear the windshield
without streaking or skipping.
WARNING
■ If the engine is running
Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing
maintenance checks.
6
Maintenance and care
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
370
6-2. Maintenance
Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M)
programs
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include OBD
(On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of
the emission control system.
If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the emission
control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test and may need to be
repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer to service the vehicle.
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test in the following situations:
● When the battery is disconnected or discharged
Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased.
Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may not be completely set.
● When the fuel tank cap is loose
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on indicating a temporary malfunction
and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
When the malfunction indicator lamp still remains on after several driving trips
The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the vehicle is driven
40 or more times.
If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
Contact your Lexus dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
371
Do-it-yourself service precautions
If you perform maintenance by yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedure as given in these sections.
Items
Parts and tools
Battery condition
(→P. 390)
Brake fluid
(→P. 389)
• Warm water
• Baking soda
• Grease
• Conventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts)
• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
level • Rag or paper towel
Engine/intercooler
coolant level
(→P. 386)
• Funnel (used only for adding brake fluid)
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality
ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite
and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid
technology
For the U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 50%
coolant and 50% deionized water.
For Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 55%
coolant and 45% deionized water.
• Funnel (used only for adding coolant)
• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding engine oil)
Fuses (→P. 412)
• Fuse with same amperage rating as original
Headlight aim*
(→P. 416)
• Phillips-head screwdriver
Light bulbs
(→P. 418)
• Bulb with same number and wattage rating as original
• Phillips-head screwdriver
• Wrench
Radiator and condenser (→P. 388)
⎯
Tire inflation pres- • Tire pressure gauge
sure (→P. 403)
Washer fluid
(→P. 392)
• Flathead screwdriver
• Compressed air source
• Water or washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use)
• Funnel (used only for adding water or washer fluid)
*: Vehicles with single-beam headlights
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Maintenance and care
Engine oil level
(→P. 381)
6
372
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
WARNING
The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly,
become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury, observe
the following precautions.
■ When working on the engine compartment
● Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt.
● Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driving
as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.
● Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper and rags, in the engine
compartment.
● Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the battery. Fuel and
battery fumes are flammable.
● Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.
■ When working near the electric cooling fans or radiator grille
Be sure the engine switch is off.
With the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode, the electric cooling fans may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high.
(→P. 388)
■ Safety glasses
Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting in
your eyes.
NOTICE
■ If you remove the air cleaner filter
Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt
in the air.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
373
Hood
Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.
1
Pull the hood lock release lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.
2
Pull up the auxiliary catch lever and
lift the hood.
6
■ Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.
If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion and cause
an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Maintenance and care
WARNING
374
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Positioning a floor jack
When using a floor jack, follow the instructions in the manual provided with
the jack and perform the operation safely.
When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack correctly.
Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.
◆ Front
1
2WD models
◆ Rear

GS350/GS300
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
2
AWD models
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

375
GS F
NOTICE
■ When using a jack at the rear of the vehicle (GS F)
Do not set the jack in either of the positions
indicated by the illustration.
6
Maintenance and care
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
376
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine compartment

GS350
1
Fuse boxes
2
Battery
3
Engine oil level dipstick
(→P. 381)
(→P. 412)
6
Brake fluid reservoir
(→P. 389)
(→P. 390)
4
Engine coolant reservoir
(→P. 386)
5
Engine oil filler cap
(→P. 383)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7
Washer fluid tank
(→P. 392)
8
Electric cooling fans
9
Condenser
(→P. 388)
10
Radiator
(→P. 388)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
GS300
1
Fuse boxes
2
Battery
3
4
5
(→P. 412)
6
Engine coolant reservoir
(→P. 386)
Intercooler coolant reservoir
(→P. 386)
7
Brake fluid reservoir
Engine oil level dipstick
(→P. 381)
8
Washer fluid tank
(→P. 392)
9
Condenser
(→P. 388)
Engine oil filler cap
10
Electric cooling fans
11
Radiator
(→P. 390)
(→P. 383)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
(→P. 389)
(→P. 388)
6
Maintenance and care

377
378
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

GS F
1
Fuse boxes
2
Battery
3
Engine oil level dipstick
(→P. 381)
(→P. 412)
6
Brake fluid reservoir
(→P. 389)
(→P. 390)
4
Engine coolant reservoir
(→P. 386)
5
Engine oil filler cap
(→P. 383)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7
Washer fluid tank
(→P. 392)
8
Electric cooling fans
9
Condenser
(→P. 388)
10
Radiator
(→P. 388)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
379
Engine compartment cover
■ Removing the engine compartment cover

GS350/GS300 (Right-hand side)

GS350/GS300 (Center)
6
GS F
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Maintenance and care

380
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Installing the clips
1
Push up center portion
2
Insert
3
Press
NOTICE
■ Checking the engine compartment cover after installation
Make sure that the cover is securely installed in its original position.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
381
Engine oil
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level on
the dipstick.
■ Checking the engine oil
1
Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine and turning
it off, wait more than 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of
the engine.
2
Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out.

GS350

GS F

GS300
6
Maintenance and care
3
Wipe the dipstick clean.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
382

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Reinsert the dipstick fully.
5
Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the oil level.
1
Low
2
Normal
3
Excessive
Flat dipstick

Non-flat dipstick
The shape of the dipstick may differ depending on the type of vehicle or engine.
6
Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
383
■ Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near the low level mark, add engine oil of the same
type as that already in the engine.

GS350

GS F

GS300
6
Engine oil selection
→P. 522, 524
Oil quantity (Low → Full)
1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp.qt.)
Items
Clean funnel
1
Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.
2
Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.
3
Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Maintenance and care
Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before adding
oil.
384
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Engine oil consumption
A certain amount of engine oil will be consumed while driving. In the following situations,
oil consumption may increase, and engine oil may need to be refilled in between oil
maintenance intervals.
● When the engine is new, for example directly after purchasing the vehicle or after
replacing the engine
● If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate viscosity is used
● When driving at high engine speeds or with a heavy load, or when driving while accelerating or decelerating frequently
● When leaving the engine idling for a long time, or when driving frequently through
heavy traffic
■ After changing the engine oil (GS350/GS300)
The engine oil maintenance data should be reset. Perform the following procedures:
1
Press
or
of the meter control switch and select
2
Press
.
or
of the meter control switch and select “Vehicle Settings”. Then press
3
Press
or
of the meter control switch and select “Oil Maintenance”. Then press
.
Select “Yes” and press .
A message is displayed on the multi-information display.
4
5
.
WARNING
■ Used engine oil
● Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin dis-
orders such as inflammation and skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash
thoroughly with soap and water.
● Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of
used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground.
Call your Lexus dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning
recycling or disposal.
● Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
385
NOTICE
■ To prevent serious engine damage
Check the oil level on a regular basis.
■ When replacing the engine oil
● Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
● Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.
● Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.
● Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.
6
Maintenance and care
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
386
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Coolant
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL”/“F” and “LOW”/“L”
lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.
■ Engine coolant reservoir
1
Reservoir cap
2
“FULL” line
3
“LOW” line

GS350

GS F

GS300
If the level is on or below the “LOW” line, add coolant up to the “FULL” line.
(→P. 509)
■ Intercooler coolant reservoir (GS300 only)
1
Reservoir cap
2
“F” line
3
“L” line
If the level is on or below the “L” line,
add coolant up to the “F” line.
(→P. 509)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
387
■ Coolant selection
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid
organic acid technology.
U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water.
(Minimum temperature: -31°F [-35°C])
Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45% deionized water.
(Minimum temperature: -44°F [-42°C])
For more details about coolant, contact your Lexus dealer.
■ If the coolant level drops within a short time of replenishing
Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant reservoir caps, drain cock and water
pump.
If you cannot find a leak, have your Lexus dealer test the cap and check for leaks in the
cooling system.
WARNING
■ When the engine is hot
Do not remove the engine coolant reservoir cap, the intercooler coolant reservoir cap
or the coolant inlet cap. (→P. 513)
The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is
removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.
6
NOTICE
Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water and
antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
■ If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging parts or paint.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Maintenance and care
■ When adding coolant
388
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Radiator and condenser
Check the radiator and condenser and clear away any foreign objects.
If either of the above parts is extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition, have your vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
WARNING
■ When the engine is hot
Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and cause serious injuries,
such as burns.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
389
Brake fluid
■ Checking fluid level
The brake fluid level should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on the
tank.

GS350/GS300

GS F
■ Adding fluid
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary item.
Fluid type
FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
Items
Clean funnel
6
■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air
WARNING
■ When filling the reservoir
Take care as brake fluid can harm your hands and eyes and damage painted surfaces. If
fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately. If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
NOTICE
■ If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear out or
when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, there may be a serious problem.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Maintenance and care
Excess moisture in the brake fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use
only newly opened brake fluid.
390
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Battery
Check the battery as follows.
■ Battery exterior
Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that there are no
loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.
1
Terminals
2
Hold-down clamp
■ Before recharging
When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive.
Therefore, observe the following before recharging:
● If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground
cable.
● Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and disconnecting
the charger cables to the battery.
■ After recharging/reconnecting the battery
The engine may not start. Follow the procedure below to initialize the system.
1 Shift the shift lever to P.
2 Open and close any of the doors.
3 Restart the engine.
● Unlocking the doors using the smart access system with push-button start may not be
possible immediately after reconnecting the battery. If this happens, use the wireless
remote control or the mechanical key to lock/unlock the doors.
● Start the engine with the engine switch in ACCESSORY mode. The engine may not
start with the engine switch turned off. However, the engine will operate normally from
the second attempt.
● The engine switch mode is recorded by the vehicle. If the battery is reconnected, the
vehicle will return the engine switch mode to the status it was in before the battery was
disconnected. Make sure to turn off the engine before disconnect the battery. Take
extra care when connecting the battery if the engine switch mode prior to discharge is
unknown.
If the engine will not start even after multiple attempts at both methods, contact your
Lexus dealer.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
391
WARNING
■ Chemicals in the battery
NOTICE
■ When recharging the battery
Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all accessories
are turned off.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
6
Maintenance and care
Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen
gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious injury, take
the following precautions while working on or near the battery:
● Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.
● Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.
● Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
● Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
● Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.
● Keep children away from the battery.
■ Where to safely charge the battery
Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a garage or
closed room where there is insufficient ventilation.
■ How to recharge the battery
Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The battery may explode if charged at a
quicker rate.
■ Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
● If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical
attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to
the nearest medical facility.
● If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention
immediately.
● If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and follow the procedure above if necessary.
● If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention immediately.
392
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Washer fluid
If any washer does not work or the warning message appears on the multi-information display, the washer tank may be empty. Add washer fluid.

GS350/GS300

GS F
WARNING
■ When adding washer fluid
Do not add washer fluid when the engine is hot or running as washer fluid contains
alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.
NOTICE
■ Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces, as well as damaging
the pump leading to problems of the washer fluid not spraying.
■ Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bottle.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
393
Tires
Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and treadwear.
Checking tires
Check if the treadwear indicators are showing on the tires. Also check the tires
for uneven wear, such as excessive wear on one side of the tread.
Check the spare tire condition and pressure if not rotated.
New tread
2
Worn tread
3
Treadwear indicator
The location of treadwear indicators is shown by a “TWI” or “Δ” mark, etc., molded
into the sidewall of each tire.
Replace the tires if the treadwear indicators are showing on a tire.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
6
Maintenance and care
1
394
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tire rotation

Vehicles with front and rear tires of the same size
Rotate the tires in the order shown.
To equalize tire wear and extend tire life,
Lexus recommends that tire rotation is
carried out at the same interval as tire
inspection.
Do not fail to initialize the tire pressure
warning system after tire rotation.

Front
Vehicles with front and rear tires of differing sizes
Tires cannot be rotated.
Tire pressure warning system
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before
serious problems arise.
● If the tire pressure drops below a predetermined level, the driver is warned by
the multi-information display and a warning light. (→P. 434, 441)
● The tire pressure detected by the
tire pressure warning system can be
displayed on the multi-information
display. (→P. 100, 108)
The illustration used is intended as an
example, and may differ from the image
that is actually displayed on the multiinformation display.
◆ Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
must also be installed.
When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed, new ID
codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and the tire
pressure warning system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve
and transmitter ID codes registered by your Lexus dealer. (→P. 396)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
395
◆ Initializing the tire pressure warning system
■ The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the following circum-
stances:
● When rotating the tires.
● When the tire inflation pressure is changed such as when changing traveling speed or load weight.
When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire inflation
pressure is set as the benchmark pressure.
■ How to initialize the tire pressure warning system
1
Park the vehicle in a safe place and turn the engine switch off.
Initialization cannot be performed while the vehicle is moving.
2
Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure
level. (→P. 528)
Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure
level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on this pressure level.
3
Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.
4
Press
or
on the meter control switch and select
5
Press
or
on the meter control switch and select “Vehicle Settings”.
Then press
Press
or
on the meter
control switch and select “TPMS”.
Then press and hold
until a
message is displayed.
The message will be displayed on the
multi-information display and the tire
pressure warning light will blink
slowly 3 times.
When the message disappears, initialization is complete.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
6
Maintenance and care
6
.
.
396
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
◆ Registering ID codes
The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a unique ID
code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code. Have the ID code registered by your Lexus
dealer.
■ When to replace your vehicle’s tires
Tires should be replaced if:
● The treadwear indicators are showing on a tire.
● You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric, and
bulges indicating internal damage
● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or location of
a cut or other damage
If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus dealer.
■ Replacing tires and wheels
If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered, the tire
pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20 minutes, the
tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute and stays on to indicate a system malfunction.
■ Tire life
Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if it has seldom
or never been used or damage is not obvious.
■ Routine tire inflation pressure checks
The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure checks.
Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily vehicle checks.
■ When rotating the tires
Make sure that the engine switch is off. If the tires are rotated while the engine switch is in
IGNITION ON mode, the tire position information will not be updated.
If this accidentally occurs, either turn the engine switch to off and then to IGNITION ON
mode, or initialize the system after checking that the tire pressure is properly adjusted.
■ Low profile tires (except 225/50R17 tires)
Generally, low profile tires will wear more rapidly and tire grip performance will be
reduced on snowy and/or icy roads when compared to standard tires. Be sure to use
snow tires or tire chains on snowy and/or icy roads and drive carefully at a speed appropriate for road and weather conditions. (→P. 298)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
397
■ Maximum load of tire
Check that the maximum load of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross
Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is
greater.
For the GAWR, see the Certification Label. For
the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit
at maximum cold tire inflation pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire. (→P. 535)
■ Tire types
● Summer tires
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
6
Maintenance and care
Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving under
dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as
snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For
driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended.
When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
● All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for
driving in most winter conditions as well as for use year-round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy
or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.
● Snow tires
For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If
you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the
originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make
sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without
first checking local regulations for possible restrictions. Snow tires should be installed
on all wheels. (→P. 296)
■ If the tread on snow tires wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm)
The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost.
398
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Situations in which the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly
● In the following cases, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used.
A tire has been replaced with a tire that is not an OE (Original Equipment) tire.
A tire has been replaced with a tire that is not of the specified size.
Tire chains etc. are equipped.
An auxiliary-supported run-flat tire is equipped.
If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed.
If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, particularly around the wheels or wheel
housings.
• If the tire inflation pressure is extremely higher than the specified level.
• If wheel without the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter are used.
• If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not registered
in the tire pressure warning computer.
● Performance may be affected in the following situations.
• Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
• When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless
communication device
If tire position information is not correctly displayed due to the radio wave conditions,
the display may be corrected by driving and changing the radio wave conditions.
● When the vehicle is parked, the time taken for the warning to start or go off could be
extended.
● When tire inflation pressure declines rapidly for example when a tire has burst, the
warning may not function.
■ The initialization operation
● Make sure to carry out initialization after adjusting the tire inflation pressure.
Also, make sure the tires are cold before carrying out initialization or tire inflation pressure adjustment.
● If you have accidentally turned the engine switch off during initialization, it is not necessary to manually restart the initialization again, as initialization will restart automatically
the next time the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.
● If you accidentally perform initialization when initialization is not necessary, adjust the
tire inflation pressure to the specified level when the tires are cold, and conduct initialization again.
■ When initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed
Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the following cases, the settings have not been recorded and the system will not operate properly. If repeated
attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings are unsuccessful, have the vehicle
inspected by your Lexus dealer.
● The initialization message is not displayed on the multi-information display when performing initialization.
● After carrying out the initialization procedure, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1
minute then stays on after driving for 20 minutes.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
399
■ Tire pressure warning system certification

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, Guam, Puerto Rico and NATO Germany
● Transmitter
● Initiator
6
Maintenance and care
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
400
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
For vehicles sold in Canada
● Transmitter

● Initiator
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
401
WARNING
■ When inspecting or replacing tires
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train as well as dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns.
Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.
● Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Lexus.
● Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply tires).
● Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.
● Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle.
Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.
● Vehicles with spare tire: Do not tow if your vehicle has a spare tire installed.
● Vehicles with emergency tire puncture repair kit: Do not tow anything if a tire that has
been repaired using the emergency tire puncture repair kit is installed. The load on
the tire may cause unexpected damage to the tire.
■ When initializing the tire pressure warning system
Do not initialize tire inflation pressure without first adjusting the tire inflation pressure to
the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light may not come on even if
the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is
actually normal.
■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
● People with implantable cardiac pacemakers,
● Users of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pacemakers,
cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves.
Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical
devices.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
6
Maintenance and care
cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators
should not come within 17.7 in. (450 mm) of
the tire pressure warning system initiators.
The radio waves may affect the operation of
such devices.
402
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves, transmitters and
tire valve caps
● When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may be damaged if not handled correctly.
● Make sure to install the tire valve caps. If the tire valve caps are not installed, water
could enter the tire pressure warning valves and the tire pressure warning valves
could be bound.
● When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than those specified.
The cap may become stuck.
■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your Lexus dealer or
other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. (→P. 394)
■ Driving on rough roads
Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes.
These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning
ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may cause damage to the tires
themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body.
■ Low profile tires (except 225/50R17 tires)
Low profile tires may cause greater damage than usual to the tire wheel when sustaining impact from the road surface. Therefore, pay attention to the following:
● Be sure to use proper tire inflation pressure. If tires are under-inflated, they may be
damaged more severely.
● Avoid potholes, uneven pavement, curbs and other road hazards. Failure to do so
may lead to severe tire and wheel damage.
■ If tire inflation pressure of each tire becomes low while driving
Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
403
Tire inflation pressure
Tire inflation pressure
The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure and tire size are displayed on
the tire and loading information label.
(→P. 528)
6
Maintenance and care
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
404
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Inspection and adjustment procedure
1
Tire valve
2
Tire pressure gauge
1
Remove the tire valve cap.
2
Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.
3
Read the pressure using the gauge gradations.
4
If the tire inflation pressure is not at the recommended level, adjust the pressure.
If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to deflate.
5
After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and adjustment,
apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage.
6
Put the tire valve cap back on.
■ Tire inflation pressure check interval
You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month.
Do not forget to check the spare.
■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure
Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:
● Reduced fuel economy
● Reduced driving comfort and poor handling
● Reduced tire life due to wear
● Reduced safety
● Damage to the drive train
If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
405
■ Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure
When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:
● Check only when the tires are cold.
If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or has not been driven for more than
1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading.
● Always use a tire pressure gauge.
It is difficult to judge if a tire is properly inflated based only on its appearance.
● It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving as heat is generated
in the tire. Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after driving.
● Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.
WARNING
■ Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance
Keep your tires properly inflated.
If the tires are not properly inflated, the following conditions may occur which could
lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury:
● Excessive wear
● Uneven wear
● Poor handling
● Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
● Air leaking from between tire and wheel
● Wheel deformation and/or tire damage
● Greater possibility of tire damage while driving (due to road hazards, expansion
joints, sharp edges in the road, etc.)
■ When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure
Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on.
If a valve cap is not installed, dirt or moisture may get into the valve and cause an air
leak, resulting in decreased tire inflation pressure.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Maintenance and care
NOTICE
6
406
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Wheels
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced. Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause a loss of handling control.
Wheel selection
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent
to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width and inset*.
Replacement wheels are available at your Lexus dealer.
*: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.
Lexus does not recommend using the following:
● Wheels of different sizes or types
● Used wheels
● Bent wheels that have been straightened
● Steel wheels (2WD F SPORT models only)
Aluminum wheel precautions
● Use only Lexus wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with your alumi-
num wheels.
● When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the wheel nuts are
still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).
● Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire chains.
● Use only Lexus genuine balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber
hammer when balancing your wheels.
■ When replacing wheels
The wheels of your vehicle are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advance warning in the event
of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters must be installed. (→P. 394)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
407
WARNING
■ When replacing wheels
● Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the Owner’s
Manual, as this may result in a loss of handling control.
● Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire. Doing
so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury.
● 2WD F SPORT models: Do not install steel wheels.
The wheel contact surface could be damaged, and the wheel could come off while
driving, which could lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Use of defective wheels prohibited
Do not use cracked or deformed wheels.
Doing so could cause the tire to leak air during driving, possibly causing an accident.
NOTICE
■ Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
● Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Lexus dealer or other qualified
service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure warning valves
and transmitters at your Lexus dealer.
● Ensure that only genuine Lexus wheels are used on your vehicle.
Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with non-genuine wheels.
6
Maintenance and care
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
408
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency.
Removal method
1
Turn the engine switch off.
2
Open the glove box. Lift up the side
with the stay, disconnect the stay
tabs and remove the partition by
pulling horizontally.
3
Press the tabs and remove the filter
cover.
4
Press the tabs and remove the filter
case.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
5
409
Remove the air conditioning filter
from the filter case and replace it
with a new one.
The “↑UP” marks shown on the filter
and the filter case should be pointing up.
■ Changing interval
Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In
dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement may be required. (For
scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner’s Manual Supplement”
or “Scheduled Maintenance”.)
■ If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically
The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.
■ Air conditioning filter with deodorizing function
When fragrances are placed in your vehicle, the deodorizing effect may become significantly weakened in a short period.
When an air conditioning odor comes out continuously, replace the air conditioning filter.
NOTICE
■ When using the air conditioning system
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Maintenance and care
Make sure that a filter is always installed.
Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the system.
6
410
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Electronic key battery
Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted.
You will need the following items:
● Flathead screwdriver
● Small flathead screwdriver
● Lithium battery CR2032
Replacing the battery
1
Take out the mechanical key.
2
Remove the cover.
To prevent damage to the key, cover the
tip of the screwdriver with a rag.
3
Remove the depleted battery.
Insert a new battery with the “+” terminal facing up.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
411
■ Use a CR2032 lithium battery
● Batteries can be purchased at your Lexus dealer, local electrical appliance shops or
camera stores.
● Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
● Dispose of used batteries according to local laws.
■ When the card key battery needs to be replaced (if equipped)
The battery for the card key is available only at Lexus dealers. Your Lexus dealer can
replace the battery for you.
■ If the electronic key battery is depleted
The following symptoms may occur:
● The smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control will not
function properly.
● The operational range will be reduced.
WARNING
■ Removed battery and other parts
These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they can cause choking. Keep away
from children. Failure to do so could result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ For normal operation after replacing the battery
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
6
Maintenance and care
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents:
● Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
● Do not touch or move any other component inside the remote control.
● Do not bend either of the battery terminals.
412
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Checking and replacing fuses
If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown. If
this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.
1
Turn the engine switch off.
2
Open the fuse box cover.

Engine compartment (type A fuse
box)

Push the tab in and lift the lid off.

Driver’s side instrument panel
Remove the lid.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Engine compartment (type B fuse
box)
Push the tab in and lift the lid off.

Passenger’s side instrument panel
Remove the lid.
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

413
Trunk
Push the tab in and lift the lid off.
Remove the lid.
3
Remove the fuse with the pullout
tool.
Only type A fuse can be removed using
the pullout tool.
6
Maintenance and care
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
414
4
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Check if the fuse is blown.
1
Normal fuse
2
Blown fuse
Type A and B:
Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of an appropriate amperage rating. The
amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.
Type C and D:
Contact your Lexus dealer.

Type A

Type B

Type C

Type D
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
415
■ After a fuse is replaced
● If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need
replacement. (→P. 418)
● If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■ If there is an overload in a circuit
The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.
■ When replacing light bulbs
Lexus recommends that you use genuine Lexus products designed for this vehicle.
Because certain bulbs are connected to circuits designed to prevent overload, non-genuine parts or parts not designed for this vehicle may be unusable.
WARNING
■ To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause damage to the vehicle, and possibly a fire or injury.
● Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than that indicated, or use any other
object in place of a fuse.
● Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
● Do not modify the fuses or fuse boxes.
NOTICE
6
■ Before replacing fuses
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Maintenance and care
Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible.
416
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Headlight aim (vehicles with single-beam headlights)
Vertical movement adjusting bolts
1
Adjustment bolt A
2
Adjustment bolt B
Before checking the headlight aim
1
Make sure the vehicle has a full tank of gasoline and the area around the
headlight is not deformed.
2
Park the vehicle on level ground.
3
Sit in the driver’s seat.
4
Bounce the vehicle several times.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
417
Adjusting the headlight aim
1
Using a Phillips-head screwdriver,
turn bolt A in either direction.
Remember the turning direction and the
number of turns.
2
Turn bolt B the same number of turns
and in the same direction as step 1 .
If the headlight cannot be adjusted using
this procedure, take the vehicle to your
Lexus dealer to adjust the headlight aim.
6
Maintenance and care
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
418
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Light bulbs
You may replace the following bulbs by yourself. The difficulty level of replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb replacement seems difficult to perform, contact your Lexus dealer.
For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your Lexus
dealer.
Preparing for light bulb replacement
Check the wattage of the light bulb to be replaced. (→P. 531)
Removing the engine compartment covers
→P. 379
Bulb locations
1
Front turn signal light (vehicles with single-beam headlights)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
419
Replacing light bulbs
■ Front turn signal light (vehicles with single-beam headlights)
1
For the left side only: Remove the
bolt and move the washer fluid
filler opening.
2
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
3
Remove the light bulb.
6
Maintenance and care
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
420
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
After installing the bulb base, secure the cord with the clips and if replacing the left
side bulb, make sure to install the bolt for the washer fluid filler opening in its original position.

Right side

Left side
■ Replacing the following bulbs
If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by your Lexus
dealer.
● Headlights
● Parking lights/daytime running lights
● Front side marker lights
● Front turn signal lights (vehicles with triple-beam headlights)
● Side turn signal lights
● Stop/tail lights
● Stop lights
● Rear side marker lights
● Rear turn signal lights
● Back-up lights
● High mounted stoplight
● License plate lights
● Outer foot lights
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
421
■ LED Lights
The lights other than the front turn signal light (vehicles with single-beam headlights) and
outer foot lights each consist of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your
vehicle to your Lexus dealer to have the light replaced.
■ Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens
Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a
malfunction. Contact your Lexus dealer for more information in the following situations:
● Large drops of water have built up on the inside of the lens.
● Water has built up inside the headlight.
■ When replacing light bulbs
→P. 415
WARNING
■ Replacing light bulbs
● Turn off the lights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turning off the
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
6
Maintenance and care
lights.
The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.
● Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. When it is unavoidable to hold the glass portion, use and hold with a clean dry cloth to avoid getting
moisture and oils on the bulb.
Also, if the bulb is scratched or dropped, it may blow out or crack.
● Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failure to do so may result
in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.
■ To prevent damage or fire
● Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.
● Check the wattage of the bulb before installing to prevent heat damage.
422
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
423
When trouble arises
7-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers...................424
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an
emergency.................................425
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7
7-2. Steps to take in an
emergency
If your vehicle needs
to be towed................................ 426
If you think
something is wrong................432
Fuel pump shut off system......433
If a warning light turns on or
a warning buzzer
sounds..........................................434
If a warning message is
displayed.......................................441
If you have a flat tire (vehicles
with spare tire) ......................... 472
If you have a flat tire (vehicles
without spare tire)...................483
If the engine will not start ........ 497
If the parking brake cannot
be released................................499
If the electronic key does not
operate properly...................... 501
If the vehicle battery is
discharged.................................504
If your vehicle overheats.........509
If the vehicle becomes
stuck .............................................. 515
424
7-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers
The emergency flashers are used to warn other drivers when the vehicle has
to be stopped in the road due to a breakdown, etc.
Press the switch.
All the turn signal lights will flash.
To turn them off, press the switch once
again.
■ Emergency flashers
If the emergency flashers are used for a long time while the engine is not operating, the
battery may discharge.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7-1. Essential information
425
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency
Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in
the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following procedure:
Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly depress it.
1
Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the effort required to
slow the vehicle.
2
Shift the shift lever to N.

If the shift lever is shifted to N
3
After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
4
Stop the engine.

If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N
3
Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce vehicle speed as
much as possible.
4
To stop the engine, press and hold
the engine switch for 2 consecutive
seconds or more, or press it briefly 3
times or more in succession.
Press and hold for 2 seconds or more
or press briefly 3 times or more
Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
WARNING
■ If the engine has to be turned off while driving
Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the brake pedal
harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn. Decelerate as much as possible before turning off the engine.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
When trouble arises
5
7
426
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle needs to be towed
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your
Lexus dealer or commercial towing service, using a wheel-lift type truck or
flatbed truck.
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial and
local laws.
Situations when it is necessary to contact dealers before towing
The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact your
Lexus dealer or commercial towing service before towing.
● The engine is running but the vehicle does not move.
● The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.
Towing with a sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck to
prevent body damage.
Towing with a wheel-lift type truck

From the front
Use a towing dolly under the rear
wheels.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)

From the rear
Use a towing dolly under the front
wheels.
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
427
Using a flatbed truck
If your vehicle is transported by a flatbed truck, it should be tied down at the locations shown in the illustration.

GS350/GS300

GS F
If you use chains or cables to tie down your vehicle, the angles shaded in black
must be 45°.
Do not overly tighten the tie downs or the vehicle may be damaged.

GS350/GS300

GS F
7
If a tow truck is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily
towed using cables or chains secured to the emergency towing eyelets. This
should only be attempted on hard surfaced roads for at most 50 miles (80 km)
at under 18 mph (30 km/h).
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle’s
wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
When trouble arises
Emergency towing
428
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Emergency towing procedure
1
Take out the towing eyelet. (→P. 473, 485)
2
Remove the eyelet cover using a flathead screwdriver.
To protect the bodywork, place a rag between the screwdriver and the vehicle body
as shown in the illustration.


3
GS350/GS300
(except F SPORT models)
GS F
Insert the towing eyelet into the hole
and tighten partially by hand.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)

GS350/GS300
(F SPORT models)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
4
Tighten down the towing eyelet
securely using a wheel nut wrench
or hard metal bar.
5
Securely attach cables or chains to the towing eyelet.
429
Take care not to damage the vehicle body.
6
Enter the vehicle being towed and start the engine.
If the engine does not start, turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.
7
Shift the shift lever to N and release the parking brake.
When the shift lever cannot be shifted: →P. 208
■ While towing
If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not function,
making steering and braking more difficult.
■ Wheel nut wrench
Wheel nut wrench is installed in trunk. (→P. 473, 485)
7
When trouble arises
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
430
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When towing the vehicle
2WD models:
Be sure to transport the vehicle with all four
wheels raised off the ground. If the vehicle is
towed with the tires contacting the ground, the
drivetrain and related parts may be damaged
or an accident may occur due to a change in
direction of the vehicle.
AWD models:
Be sure to transport the vehicle with all four
wheels raised off the ground. If the vehicle is
towed with the tires contacting the ground, the
drivetrain or related parts may be damaged,
the vehicle may fly off the truck.
■ While towing
● When towing using cables or chains, avoid sudden starts, etc. which place excessive
stress on the towing eyelets, cables or chains. The towing eyelets, cables or chains
may become damaged, broken debris may hit people, and cause serious damage.
● Do not turn the engine switch off.
There is a possibility that the steering wheel is locked and cannot be operated.
■ Installing towing eyelets to the vehicle
Make sure that towing eyelets are installed securely.
If not securely installed, towing eyelets may come loose during towing.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
431
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing using a wheel-lift type truck
● Do not tow the vehicle from the rear when the engine switch is off. The steering lock
mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels straight.
● When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the oppo-
site end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could be damaged while being towed.
■ To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing with a sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.
■ To prevent damage to the vehicle during emergency towing
Do not secure cables or chains to the suspension components.
■ Recreational towing (behind motor home, etc.)
Never dinghy tow your vehicle to prevent causing serious damage to the transfer (AWD models) and transmission.
7
When trouble arises
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
432
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you think something is wrong
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs
adjustment or repair. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
Visible symptoms
● Fluid leaks under the vehicle.
(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
● Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
● Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points higher than normal.
Audible symptoms
● Changes in exhaust sound
● Excessive tire squeal when cornering
● Strange noises related to the suspension system
● Pinging or other noises related to the engine
Operational symptoms
● Engine missing, stumbling or running roughly
● Appreciable loss of power
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road
● Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches the floor
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
433
Fuel pump shut off system
To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or when an airbag
inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops the supply of fuel to
the engine.
Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is activated.
1
Turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY mode or turn it off.
2
Restart the engine.
NOTICE
■ Before starting the engine
Inspect the ground under the vehicle.
If you find that fuel has leaked onto the ground, the fuel system has been damaged and
is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.
7
When trouble arises
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
434
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer
sounds
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights comes on or
flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then goes off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system. However, if this continues to occur,
have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
Warning light and warning buzzer list
Warning light
Warning light/Details/Actions
(U.S.A.)
Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)
• Low brake fluid
• Malfunction in the brake booster system
→ Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your
Lexus dealer. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.
(Canada)
(If equipped)
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Charging system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system
→ Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your
Lexus dealer.
Malfunction indicator lamp
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The electronic engine control system;
• The electronic throttle control system; or
• The electronic automatic transmission control system
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
SRS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The SRS airbag system;
• The front passenger occupant classification system; or
• The seat belt pretensioner system
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
ABS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The ABS; or
• The brake assist system
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning light
435
Warning light/Details/Actions
Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)
Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
PCS warning light
(Flashes or illuminates)
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the PCS (Pre-Collision System) or that
the system is temporarily unavailable due to the vehicle being
extremely hot/cold, or dirt around a front sensor, etc.
(→P. 248, 441)
→ Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display. (→P. 248, 441)
If the PCS (Pre-Collision System) or VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) system is disabled, the PCS warning light will illuminate.
→ P. 291
Slip indicator
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The VSC system;
• The TRAC system; or
• The hill-start assist control system
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
The light will flash when the VSC or TRAC system is operating.
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
(Flashes)
“AFS OFF” indicator
Indicates a malfunction in the adaptive front-lighting system
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Brake hold operated indicator
Indicates a malfunction in the brake hold system
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
7
When trouble arises
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
436
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning light
(Flashes)
(U.S.A.)
Warning light/Details/Actions
Parking brake indicator
Indicates a malfunction in the parking brake system
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
(Flashes)
(Canada)
Brake system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the parking brake system
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
(GS F only)
Open door warning light (warning buzzer)*1
Indicates that a door or the trunk is not fully closed
→ Check that all the doors and the trunk are closed.
Low fuel level warning light
Except F SPORT models of GS350/GS300, and GS F: Indicates
remaining fuel is approximately 2.6 gal. (10.0 L, 2.2 Imp.gal.) or
less
F SPORT models of GS350/GS300: Indicates remaining fuel is
approximately 2.6 gal. (9.9 L, 2.2 Imp.gal.) or less
→ Refuel the vehicle.
Seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer)*2
Warns the driver and/or front passenger to fasten their seat belts
→ Fasten the seat belt.
If the front passenger’s seat is occupied, the front passenger’s
seat belt also needs to be fastened to make the warning light
(warning buzzer) off.
Master warning light
A buzzer sounds and the warning light comes on and flashes to
indicate that the master warning system has detected a malfunction.
→ P. 441
Tire pressure warning light
When the light comes on:
Low tire inflation pressure such as
• Natural causes (→P. 438)
• Flat tire (→P. 472, 483)
→ Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level.
The light will turn off after a few minutes. In case the light does
not turn off even if the tire inflation pressure is adjusted, have the
system checked by your Lexus dealer.
When the light comes on after blinking for 1 minute:
Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system
→ Have the system checked by your Lexus dealer.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning light
(If equipped)
437
Warning light/Details/Actions
LKA warning light
The warning light comes on and a warning message is displayed to
indicate that the LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) system is not available
temporarily or has detected a malfunction.
→ P. 451, 452
*1: Open door warning buzzer:
→P. 441
*2: Driver’s seat belt buzzer:
The driver’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the driver that his or her seat belt is not
fastened. Once the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, the buzzer
sounds for 6 seconds. If the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h), the buzzer
sounds once. If the seat belt is still unfastened after 24 seconds, the buzzer will sound
intermittently for 10 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will
sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds.
Front passenger’s seat belt buzzer:
The front passenger’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the front passenger that his or
her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds once if the vehicle reaches a speed of
12 mph (20 km/h). If the seat belt is still unfastened after 24 seconds, the buzzer will
sound intermittently for 10 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer
will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds.
7
When trouble arises
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
438
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ SRS warning light
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front impact sensors, side
impact sensors (front door), side impact sensors (front), side impact sensors (rear),
driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch, front passenger occupant
classification system, “AIR BAG ON” indicator light, “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light,
front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, airbags,
interconnecting wiring and power sources. (→P. 43)
■ Front passenger detection sensor, seat belt reminder and warning buzzer
If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection sensor
may cause the warning light to flash and the warning buzzer to sound even if a passenger
is not sitting in the seat.
■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving
First check the following:
● Is the fuel tank empty?
If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.
● Is the fuel tank cap loose?
If it is, tighten it securely.
The light will go off after several driving trips.
If the light does not go off even after several trips, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as
possible.
■ Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)
When the battery charge becomes insufficient or the voltage temporarily drops, the
electric power steering system warning light may come on and the warning buzzer may
sound.
■ When the tire pressure warning light comes on
Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level. Initializing the tire
pressure warning system will not turn off the tire pressure warning light.
■ The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes
The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes such as natural air
leaks and tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting
the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes).
■ When a tire is replaced with a spare tire
The compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will not turn off even though the flat
tire has been replaced with the spare tire.
■ Conditions that the tire pressure warning system may not function properly
→P. 398
■ If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute
If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute when the
engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
439
■ Warning buzzer
In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard because of noisy place or an audio sound.
■ Customization
The vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer can be disabled.
(Customizable features: →P. 545)
WARNING
■ If both the ABS and the brake system warning lights remain on
Stop your vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact your Lexus dealer. The vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking, and the ABS system may fail, which
could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■ When the electric power steering system warning light comes on
The steering wheel may become extremely heavy.
If the steering wheel becomes heavier than usual when operating, hold firmly and operate using more force than usual.
■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on
Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause a loss of
vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.
● Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pressure
immediately.
● If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If a tire is flat, change it
with the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Lexus dealer.
● Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose
control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
■ If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur
The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.
7
When trouble arises
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
440
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
WARNING
■ Maintenance of the tires
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label). (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly
under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning
light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light).
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
(tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not
be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,
including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one
or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate
tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to continue to function
properly.
NOTICE
■ To ensure the tire pressure warning system operates properly
Do not install tires with different specifications or markers, as the tire pressure warning
system may not operate properly.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
441
If a warning message is displayed
If a warning is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm and perform
the following actions:


GS350/GS300
(except F SPORT models)

GS350/GS300
(F SPORT models)
GS F
7
Master warning light
The master warning light also comes on or flashes in order to indicate that a message
is currently being displayed on the multi-information display.
2
Multi-information display
If any of the warning light comes on again after the following actions have been
performed, contact your Lexus dealer.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
When trouble arises
1
442
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message and warning buzzer list
Warning message
Details/Actions
Indicates that there is a high possibility of a frontal collision, or that the pre-collision braking function is operating
At the same time,
will appear on the head-up
display.
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Avoid the collision by decelerating using the brakes
or taking other evasive actions.
(If equipped)
Indicates that your vehicle is nearing the vehicle ahead
(in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)
At the same time,
will appear on the head-up display (the image flashes).
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Slow the vehicle by applying the brakes.
(If equipped)
Indicates that the vehicle has deviated from the lane
(while the LKA [Lane-Keeping Assist] system is operating)
The lane line on the side the vehicle has deviated from
flashes in amber.
At the same time,
will appear on the head-up
display (the image flashes).
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Check around the vehicle and back to inside of the
lane lines.
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the brake system
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer
immediately.
Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
(Flashes)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
443
Details/Actions
Indicates that hood or one or more of the doors or trunk
are not fully closed
The system also indicates which hood or doors or
trunk are not fully closed.
If the vehicle reaches a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h),
flashes and a buzzer sounds to indicate that
the hood or door(s) or trunk are not yet fully closed.
→ Make sure that hood or all doors or trunk are
closed.
(GS350/GS300)
(GS F)
Indicates a malfunction in the intuitive parking assist
All assist-sensors flash.
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
(If equipped)
7
(GS F)
(If equipped)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
When trouble arises
(GS350/GS300)
Indicates that intuitive parking assist sensor is dirty or
covered with ice
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Clean the sensor.
444
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
Details/Actions
Indicates an attempt was made to release the parking
brake with a door open or the front passenger’s seat belt
unfastened
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Close all doors and fasten the front passenger’s seat
belt before releasing the parking brake.
(Flashes)
Indicates that the driver’s door was opened with the shift
position in any position other than P
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Shift the shift position to P.
(Flashes)
Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
445
Details/Actions
Indicates that the vehicle is being driven at 3 mph (5 km/h)
or more with the parking brake still engaged.
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Release the parking brake.
(Flashes)
Indicates that the parking brake is engaged with the shift
position not in P
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Change the shift position to P.
(Flashes)
Indicates a malfunction in the brake hold system
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Depress the brake pedal to turn off the brake hold
system.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer
immediately.
7
(Flashes)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
When trouble arises
Indicates that the brake hold system is turned on while on
a steep slope
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Do not use only the brake hold system on steep
slopes. Be sure to also depress the brake pedal.
446
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in the parking brake system
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Press the parking brake switch. If the warning message is still displayed, have the vehicle inspected by
your Lexus dealer.
(Flashes)
(U.S.A.)
(Flashes)
(Canada)
(Flashes)
Indicates an attempt was made to release the parking
brake without depressing the brake pedal
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Release the parking brake while depressing the
brake pedal.
Indicates that the shift position was changed and DriveStart Control was operated while depressing the accelerator pedal
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Momentarily release the accelerator pedal.
(Flashes)
Indicates an attempt was made to shift to 1st gear with
the shift position in M while on a slippery surface
The vehicle will not shift down from 2nd gear.
A buzzer also sounds.
→ The vehicle will not shift down from 2nd gear.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
447
Details/Actions
Indicates that the LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) system has
determined that the driver does not have their hands on
the steering wheel while the steering control function is
on
If the driver operates the steering wheel only a small
amount, the system may be unable to detect the steering wheel operations and this warning may be displayed.
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Firmly hold the steering wheel.
(If equipped)
Indicates that steering control function is temporarily
canceled due to the LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) system
determining that the driver does not have their hands on
the steering wheel while the steering control function is
on
If the driver operates the steering wheel only a small
amount, the system may be unable to detect the steering wheel operations and this warning may be displayed.
→ Firmly hold the steering wheel.
(If equipped)
7
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Indicates an engine malfunction
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
When trouble arises
Indicates that the parking brake system is overheating
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Do not use the parking brake until the message disappears.
448
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
Details/Actions
Indicates an engine malfunction
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Indicates an engine malfunction
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The SRS airbag system;
• The front passenger occupant classification system;
or,
• The seat belt pretensioner system
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The ABS; or
• The brake assist system
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and
contact your Lexus dealer. Continuing to drive the
vehicle may be dangerous.
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
449
Details/Actions
Indicates that the engine coolant temperature is too high
A buzzer also sounds.
→ P. 509
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system.
→ Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and
contact your Lexus dealer. Continuing to drive the
vehicle may be dangerous.
(GS350/GS300 only)
7
(If equipped)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
When trouble arises
Indicates that the radar sensor is dirty or covered with
ice
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Clean the sensor.
450
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
Details/Actions
Indicates that the dynamic radar cruise control system
cannot be used temporarily due to bad weather
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Use the radar cruise control system when it
becomes available again.
(If equipped)
Indicates that the radar cruise control system brake control function is temporarily unavailable
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Depress the brake.
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the smart access system with
push-button start
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
(Flashes)
Indicates that a Blind Spot Monitor sensor or the surrounding area on the bumper is dirty or covered with ice
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Clean the sensor and its surrounding area on the
bumper.
(If equipped)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
451
Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in the cruise control system or
dynamic radar cruise control system (if equipped)
Press the “ON/OFF” button once to deactivate the
system, and then press the button again to reactivate
the system.
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
Indicates a malfunction in the dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range
Depress the brake pedal.
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
(If equipped)
7
(If equipped)
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
The operation conditions of the camera sensor (temperature, etc.) are not met.
→ When the operation conditions of the camera sensor (temperature, etc.) are met, the following systems will become available.
• PCS (Pre-Collision System)
• LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) system
• Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range
• Automatic High Beam
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
When trouble arises
Indicates a malfunction in the LKA (Lane-Keeping
Assist) system
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
452
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
(If equipped)
(If equipped)
Details/Actions
Indicates that the system is temporarily unavailable due
to a malfunction in a sensor other than the camera sensor
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Turn the LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) system off, wait
for a little while, and then turn the LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) system back on.
Dirt, rain, condensation, ice, snow, etc., are present on
the windshield in front of the camera sensor.
The following systems may be suspended until the
problem shown in the message is resolved.
• PCS (Pre-Collision System)
• LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) system
• Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range
• Automatic High Beam
→ Turn the system off, remove any dirt, rain, condensation, ice, snow, etc., from the windshield, and then
turn the system back on.
Indicates a malfunction in the PCS (Pre-Collision System)
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
453
Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in the BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
system
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
(If equipped)
Indicates abnormal engine oil pressure
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and
contact your Lexus dealer.
7
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
When trouble arises
Indicates that the automatic transmission fluid temperature is too high
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and
contact your Lexus dealer.
454
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in the AWD system
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
(AWD models only)
Indicates a malfunction in the VGRS (Variable Gear
Ratio Steering)
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the DRS (Dynamic Rear
Steering)
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the electronically controlled
brake system
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and
contact your Lexus dealer. Continuing to drive in
this condition is dangerous.
(GS350/GS300 only)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
455
Details/Actions
Indicates an attempt was made to engage the parking
brake while driving
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Press the parking brake switch. If the warning message is still displayed, have the vehicle inspected by
your Lexus dealer.
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Indicates a malfunction in the parking brake system
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Press the parking brake switch. If the warning message is still displayed, have the vehicle inspected by
your Lexus dealer.
Indicates that LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) system cannot
be used due to the vehicle speed being too high
→ Slow down.
(If equipped)
7
When trouble arises
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
456
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
Details/Actions
Indicates that the engine switch is turned off or turned to
ACCESSORY mode and the driver’s door is opened
while the lights are turned on
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Turn the lights off.
(Flashes)
Indicates that the moon roof is not fully closed (with the
engine switch off, and the driver’s door open)
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Close the moon roof.
(Flashes)
Indicates that the windows are not fully closed (with the
engine switch off, and the driver’s door open)
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Close all the windows.
(Flashes)
Indicates that the windows and the moon roof are not
fully closed (with the engine switch off, and the driver’s
door open)
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Close all the windows and the moon roof.
(Flashes)
Indicates a malfunction in the brake hold system
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer
immediately.
(Flashes)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
457
Details/Actions
Indicates that the brake hold system cannot be turned off
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Depress the brake pedal.
Indicates that the brake hold system is not available
The reason the brake hold system is not available may
be displayed.
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Close the driver’s door.
→ Fasten the driver’s seat belt.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7
When trouble arises
Indicates that the brake hold system is unable to continue brake hold function
The reason the brake hold system is not continue may
be displayed.
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Depress the brake pedal.
→ Close the driver’s door.
→ Fasten the driver’s seat belt.
458
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
Details/Actions
Indicates that the parking brake is set automatically while
the brake hold system is holding the brakes
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Release the parking brake.
Indicates the AWD system has overheated
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Reduce the vehicle speed or stop the vehicle in a
safe place.
(Flashes)
(AWD models only)
Indicates the AWD system has overheated
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Reduce the vehicle speed or stop the vehicle in a
safe place.
(Flashes)
(AWD models only)
Indicates a malfunction in the TVD (Torque Vectoring
Differential) system
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
(GS F only)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
(GS F only)
459
Details/Actions
Indicates that the TVD (Torque Vectoring Differential)
system has overheated
This message may be displayed when driving under
extremely high load conditions such as the following:
• Continuously driving at high speeds or through
sharp turns
• If either right or left rear tire loses traction and spins
continuously
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Drive the vehicle for a while, while avoiding
extremely high load conditions.
Indicates a malfunction in the Drive-Start Control system
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer
immediately.
7
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
When trouble arises
Indicates a malfunction in the brake override system
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer
immediately.
460
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
Details/Actions
Indicates that engine oil level is low
This message may appear if the vehicle is stopped on a
slope. Move the vehicle to a level surface and check to
see if the message disappears.
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Check the level of engine oil, and add if necessary.
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The Automatic High Beam system (if equipped);
• The AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System) (if
equipped); or
• The LED headlight system
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
Indicates that the brake pads are worn out
A buzzer also sounds
→ Have the vehicle inspected visually by your Lexus
dealer.
(GS F for Canada only)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
461
Details/Actions
Indicates that the brake pads are worn out
A buzzer also sounds
→ Have the vehicle inspected visually by your Lexus
dealer.
(GS F for U.S.A. only)
Indicates that the accelerator and brake pedals are
being depressed simultaneously, and the brake override
system is operating.
→ Release the accelerator pedal and depress the
brake pedal. (→P. 183)
(Flashes)
7
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
When trouble arises
Indicates that the tire inflation pressure is low
→ Check the tire inflation pressure, and adjust to the
appropriate level.
462
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in the tire pressure warning system
→ Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn the engine
switch off then on again. If the tire pressure warning
indicator flashes for 1 minute then illuminates, there
is a malfunction in the system. Have the vehicle
inspected at your Lexus dealer.
Indicates that the tire position information cannot be recognized
→ Drive for a short while and check if the display
updates.
If the radio wave conditions improve, the display
may return to normal. If the tire pressure is still not
displayed after driving for several minutes, stop the
vehicle in a safe place, turn the engine switch off
then on again, and start driving. If the tire pressure is
still not displayed even after repeating this process
several times, have the vehicle inspected at your
Lexus dealer.
Indicates that the washer fluid level is low
→ Add washer fluid.
Except F SPORT models of GS350/GS300, and GS F:
Indicates that remaining fuel is approximately 2.6 gal.
(10.0 L, 2.2 Imp.gal.) or less
F SPORT models of GS350/GS300: Indicates remaining fuel is approximately 2.6 gal. (9.9 L, 2.2 Imp.gal.) or
less
→ Refuel the vehicle.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
463
Details/Actions
Indicates that the outside temperature is approximately
37°F (3°C) or lower
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Drive carefully, as the road may be icy.
(GS350/GS300 only)
(U.S.A. only)
(U.S.A. only)
Indicates that all maintenance according to the driven
distance on the maintenance schedule* should be performed soon.
Comes on approximately 4500 miles (7200 km)
after the message has been reset.
→ If necessary, perform maintenance.
Indicates that the engine oil and oil filter should be
changed
→ Have the engine oil and oil filter checked and/or
changed by your Lexus dealer. After changing the
engine oil, the oil change system should be reset.
(→P. 383)
Indicates that all maintenance is required to correspond
to the driven distance on the maintenance schedule*.
Comes on approximately 5000 miles (8000 km)
after the message has been reset. (The message will
not display properly unless the message has been
reset.)
→ Perform the necessary maintenance. Please reset
the message after the maintenance is performed.
(→P. 366)
*: Refer to the separate “Scheduled Maintenance” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”
for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7
When trouble arises
(GS350/GS300 only)
Indicates that the engine oil is scheduled to be changed
→ Check the engine oil and change if necessary. After
changing the engine oil, the oil change system
should be reset. (→P. 383)
(The indicator will not work properly unless the oil
maintenance data has been reset.)
464
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
Details/Actions
Indicates that the Automatic High Beam switch was
pressed while the low beams were on
→ Turn the high beam headlights on before pressing
the Automatic High Beam switch.
(If equipped)
Indicates that, since the VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
system was turned off, the pre-collision braking and precollision brake assist are stopped (The pre-collision
warning function will be operational)
→ Turn the VSC on. (→P. 291)
(If equipped)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
465
Details/Actions
Indicates that the PCS (Pre-Collision System) is temporarily unavailable
→ When conditions improve, the system resumes
operation. If this item is displayed continuously, have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
Air conditioning, heater and other operations are temporarily limited due to high power consumption
→ Turn off unnecessary electronic equipment to
reduce power consumption.
Please wait until the power supply returns to normal.
If this item is frequently displayed, have the vehicle
inspected at your Lexus dealer immediately.
(Flashes)
Indicates that part of the PCS (Pre-Collision System)
sensor is dirty, covered with ice, etc.
A buzzer also sounds.
→ Remove any dirt, ice, etc.
(If equipped)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
When trouble arises
(Flashes)
7
466
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ Warning message in radar cruise mode (if equipped)
In the following cases, the warning message may not be displayed even if vehicle-to-vehicle distance decreases:
● When your vehicle and the vehicle ahead are traveling at the same speed or the vehicle
ahead is traveling more quickly than your vehicle
● When the vehicle ahead is traveling at a very low speed
● Immediately after cruise control speed is set
● At the instant the accelerator pedal is depressed
■ Open door warning message (GS350/GS300 only)
The open door warning message continues to display until a door or the trunk is fully
closed, even if the engine switch is turned off. However, approximately 20 minutes after a
door or the trunk is not fully closed, the battery-saving function operates and the display
turns off even though a door or the trunk is not fully closed.
■ Warning buzzer
In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard because of noisy place or an audio sound.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Interior
buzzer
Once
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message
467
Details/Actions
The electronic key is not detected
when an attempt is made to start the
engine.
→ Start the engine with the electronic key present.
⎯
(Flashes)
The electronic key was carried outside the vehicle and a door other
than the driver’s door was opened
and closed while the engine switch
was in a mode other than off.
→ Bring the electronic key back
into the vehicle.
Once
3 times
(Flashes)
An attempt was made to exit the
vehicle with the electronic key and
lock the doors without first turning
the engine switch off when the shift
lever was in P.
→ Turn the engine switch off and
lock the doors again.
Continuous
(Displayed alternately)
(Flashes)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7
When trouble arises
Once
The driver’s door was opened and
closed while the electronic key was
not in the vehicle, the shift lever was
in P and the engine switch was not
turned off.
→ Turn the engine switch off or
bring the electronic key back
into the vehicle.
468
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Interior
buzzer
9 times
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message
Details/Actions
An attempt was made to drive when
the regular key was not inside the
vehicle.
→ Confirm that the electronic key
is inside the vehicle.
⎯
(Flashes)
Continuous
The driver’s door was opened when
the shift lever was not in P and the
engine switch was not turned off.
→ Shift the shift lever to P.
⎯
(Flashes)
Continuous
The driver’s door was opened and
closed while the electronic key was
not in the vehicle, the shift lever was
not in P and the engine switch was
not turned off.
→ Shift the shift lever to P.
→ Bring the electronic key back
into the vehicle.
Continuous
(Displayed alternately)
(Flashes)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Interior
buzzer
⎯
Once
Warning message
Details/Actions
Continuous
• An attempt was made to lock the
doors using the smart access system with push-button start while
the electronic key was still inside
the vehicle.
• An attempt was made to lock
either front door by opening a
door and putting the inside lock
button into the lock position, then
closing the door with the electronic key still inside the vehicle.
→ Retrieve the electronic key
from the vehicle and lock the
doors again.
⎯
• When the doors were unlocked
with the mechanical key and then
the engine switch was pressed,
the electronic key could not be
detected in the vehicle.
• The electronic key could not be
detected in the vehicle even after
the engine switch was pressed
two consecutive times.
→ Touch the electronic key to the
engine switch while depressing
the brake pedal.
⎯
An attempt was made to start the
engine with the shift lever in an
incorrect position.
→ Shift the shift lever to P and start
the engine.
(Flashes)
⎯
⎯
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Power was turned off due to the
automatic power off function.
→ Next time when starting the
engine, increase the engine
speed slightly and maintain that
level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the battery.
7
When trouble arises
Once
Exterior
buzzer
469
470
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Interior
buzzer
Once
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message
The electronic key has a low battery.
→ Replace the electronic key battery. (→P. 410)
⎯
(GS350/GS300)
Once
⎯
(GS F)
Once
⎯
(Flashes)
Once
Details/Actions
The driver’s door was opened and
closed with the engine switch turned
off and then the engine switch was
put in ACCESSORY mode twice
without the engine being started.
→ Press the engine switch while
depressing the brake pedal.
During an engine starting procedure in the event that the electronic
key was not functioning properly
(→P. 502), the engine switch was
touched with the electronic key.
→ Press the engine switch within
10 seconds of the buzzer sounding.
The steering lock could not be
released within 3 seconds of the
engine switch being pressed.
→ Press the engine switch while
depressing the brake pedal and
moving the steering wheel left
and right.
The engine switch has been turned
off with the shift lever in a position
other than P or N.
→ Shift the shift lever to P.
⎯
(Flashes)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Interior
buzzer
Once
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message
471
Details/Actions
After the engine switch has been
turned off with the shift lever in a
position other than P, the shift lever
has been shifted to P.
→ Turn the engine switch off.
⎯
(Flashes)
■ Warning buzzer
In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard because of noisy place or an audio sound.
7
When trouble arises
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
472
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you have a flat tire (vehicles with spare tire)
Your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire. The flat tire can be replaced with
the spare tire.
For details about tires: →P. 393
WARNING
■ If you have a flat tire
Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel beyond
repair, which could result in an accident.
Before jacking up the vehicle
● Stop the vehicle in a safe place on a hard, flat surface.
● Set the parking brake.
● Shift the shift lever to P.
● Stop the engine.
● Turn on the emergency flashers. (→P. 424)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
473
Location of the spare tire, jack and tools

Type A (GS350/GS300)
1
Jack handle
5
Wheel nut wrench
2
Parking brake release tool
6
Spare tire
3
Screwdriver
7
Jack
4
Towing eyelet
7
When trouble arises
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
474
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Type B (GS F)
1
Parking brake release tool
5
Spare tire
2
Screwdriver
6
Tool bag
3
Towing eyelet
7
Jack
4
Wheel nut wrench
8
Jack handle
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
475
WARNING
■ Using the tire jack
Observe the following precautions.
Improper use of the tire jack may cause the vehicle to suddenly fall off the jack, leading
to death or serious injury.
● Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and
removing tire chains.
● Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire.
Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires on
this vehicle.
● Put the jack properly in its jack point.
● Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported by the jack.
● Do not start the engine or drive the vehicle while the vehicle is supported by the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is inside.
● When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire.
● Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.
● When lowering the vehicle, make sure that there is no-one near the vehicle. If there
are people nearby, warn them vocally before lowering.
7
When trouble arises
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
476
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Taking out the jack and jack handle
1
Remove the center luggage mat. (→P. 335)
2
Remove the spacer and take out the jack handle.

Type A
3
Take out the jack.
1
For tightening
2
For loosening

Type B
Taking out the spare tire

Type A
1
Remove the center luggage mat. (→P. 335)
2
Loosen the center fastener that
secures the spare tire.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Type B
1
Remove the center luggage mat. (→P. 336)
2
Remove the center auxiliary box.
3
Loosen the center fastener that
secures the spare tire.
477
WARNING
■ When storing the spare tire
Be careful not to catch fingers or other body parts between the spare tire and the body
of the vehicle.
7
When trouble arises
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
478
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Replacing a flat tire
1
Chock the tires.
Flat tire
Front
Rear
Wheel chock positions
Left-hand side
Behind the rear right-hand side tire
Right-hand side
Behind the rear left-hand side tire
Left-hand side
In front of the front right-hand side tire
Right-hand side
In front of the front left-hand side tire
2
Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one
turn).
3
Turn the tire jack portion “A” by hand
until the notch of the jack is in contact with the jack point.
The jack point guides are located under
the rocker panel. They indicate the jack
point positions.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
4
Raise the vehicle until the tire is
slightly raised off the ground.
5
Remove all the wheel nuts and the
tire.
479
When resting the tire on the ground,
place the tire so that the wheel design
faces up to avoid scratching the wheel
surface.
WARNING
■ Replacing a flat tire
● Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immediately after the
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7
When trouble arises
vehicle has been driven.
After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around the brakes will
be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet or other body parts while
changing a tire, etc. may result in burns.
● Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the tire
to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.
• Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened, leading to
bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts
to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing a serious accident. Remove any oil or
grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
• Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m,
10.5 kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.
• When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifically designed for
that wheel.
• If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut threads or bolt holes
of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
480
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Installing the spare tire
1
Remove any dirt or foreign matter
from the wheel contact surface.
If foreign matter is on the wheel contact
surface, the wheel nuts may loosen
while the vehicle is in motion, causing
the tire to come off.
2
Install the spare tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by approximately the same amount.
When replacing an aluminum wheel
with a steel wheel, tighten the wheel
nuts until the tapered portion comes
into loose contact with the disc
wheel seat.
Tapered portion
Disc wheel
seat
When replacing an aluminum wheel
with an aluminum wheel, turn the
wheel nuts until the washers come
into contact with the disc wheel.
Disc wheel
Washer
3
Lower the vehicle.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
4
481
Firmly tighten each wheel nut two or
three times in the order shown in the
illustration.
Tightening torque:
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
5
Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools.
■ The spare tire
● GS350/GS300: The spare tire is identified by the label “TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
on the tire sidewall.
● Use the spare tire temporarily, and only in an emergency.
● Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure of the spare tire. (→P. 528)
■ When using the spare tire
WARNING
■ When using the spare tire
● Remember that the spare tire provided is specifically designed for use with your vehi-
cle. Do not use your spare tire on another vehicle.
● Do not use more than one spare tire simultaneously.
● Replace the spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible.
● Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting operations
that cause sudden engine braking.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7
When trouble arises
As the spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, low
inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be indicated by the tire pressure warning system. Also, if you replace the spare tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the
light remains on.
■ When the spare tire is equipped
The vehicle may become lower when driving with the spare tire compared to when driving with standard tires.
■ If you have a flat rear tire on a road covered with snow or ice (vehicles with front and
rear tires of the same size)
Install the compact spare tire on one of the front wheels of the vehicle. Perform the following steps and fit tire chains to the rear tires:
1 Replace a front tire with the compact spare tire.
2 Replace the flat rear tire with the tire removed from the front of the vehicle.
3 Fit tire chains to the rear tires.
482
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
WARNING
■ When the spare tire is attached
The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may not
operate correctly:
•
•
•
•
•
ABS & Brake assist
• LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist)
VSC
(if equipped)
TRAC
• Tire pressure warning system
Cruise control
• VDIM
Dynamic radar cruise control with
• Lexus parking assist monitor
full-speed range (if equipped)
• Intuitive parking assist (if equipped)
• PCS (Pre-Collision System)
• Navigation system (if equipped)
(if equipped)
• DRS (if equipped)
• EPS
• VGRS (if equipped)
• AFS (if equipped)
• LDH (if equipped)
• Adaptive Variable Suspension system
(if equipped)
Also, not only can the following system not be utilized fully, but it may even negatively
affect the drive-train components:
• AWD system
■ Speed limit when using the spare tire
Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a spare tire is installed on
the vehicle.
The spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failure to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.
■ After using the tools and jack
Before driving, make sure all the tools and jack are securely in place in their storage
location to reduce the possibility of personal injury during a collision or sudden braking.
NOTICE
■ Be careful when driving over bumps with the spare tire installed on the vehicle.
The vehicle may become lower when driving with the spare tire compared to when
driving with standard tires. Be careful when driving over uneven road surfaces.
■ Driving with tire chains and the spare tire
Do not fit tire chains to the spare tire.
Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance.
■ When replacing the tires
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter
may be damaged if not handled correctly.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
483
If you have a flat tire (vehicles without spare tire)
Your vehicle is not equipped with a spare tire, but instead is equipped with an
emergency tire puncture repair kit.
A puncture caused by a nail or screw passing through the tire tread can be
repaired temporarily with the emergency tire puncture repair kit.
WARNING
■ If you have a flat tire
Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel beyond
repair, which could result in an accident.
Driving with a flat tire may cause a circumferential groove on the side wall.
In such a case, the tire may explode when using a repair kit.
7
When trouble arises
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
484
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Before repairing the vehicle
● Stop the vehicle in a safe place on a hard, flat surface.
● Set the parking brake.
● Shift the shift lever to P.
● Stop the engine.
● Turn on the emergency flashers. (→P. 424)
● Check the degree of the tire damage.
A tire should only be repaired with
the emergency tire puncture repair
kit if the damage is caused by a nail
or screw passing through the tire
tread.
• Do not remove the nail or screw
from the tire. Removing the
object may widen the opening
and disenable emergency repair
with the kit.
• To avoid sealant leakage, move the vehicle until the area of the puncture, if
known, is positioned at the top of the tire.
■ A flat tire that cannot be repaired with the emergency tire puncture repair kit
In the following cases, the tire cannot be repaired with the emergency tire puncture
repair kit. Contact your Lexus dealer.
● When the tire is damaged due to driving without sufficient air pressure
● When the tire lost air pressure due to a crack or damage in the tire sidewall
● When the tire is visibly separated from the wheel
● When the cut or damage to the tread is 0.16 in. (4 mm) long or more
● When the wheel is damaged
● When two or more tires have been punctured
● When there is more than one hole or cut in the damaged tire
● When the sealant has expired
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
485
Location of the emergency tire puncture repair kit, jack and tools
1
Jack handle
5
Towing eyelet
2
Emergency tire puncture repair kit
6
Wheel nut wrench
3
Parking brake release tool
7
Jack*
4
Screwdriver
*:
Use of the jack (→P. 478)
7
When trouble arises
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
486
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Emergency tire puncture repair kit components
1
Bottle
5
Compressor
2
Hose
6
Stickers
3
Air pressure gauge
7
Power plug
4
Compressor switch
8
Air release cap
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
487
Taking out the emergency tire puncture repair kit
1
Remove the center luggage mat. (→P. 335)
2
Take out the emergency tire puncture repair kit.
Taking out the jack
1
Remove the center luggage mat. (→P. 335)
2
Remove the center auxiliary box.
3
Take out the jack.
For tightening
2
For loosening
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7
When trouble arises
1
488
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Emergency repair method
1
Remove the valve cap from the valve
of the punctured tire.
2
Remove the air release cap from the
hose.
You will use the air release cap again.
Therefore keep it in a safe place.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
3
489
Connect the hose to the valve.
Screw the end of the hose clockwise as
far as possible.
4
Make sure that the compressor
switch is off.
5
Remove the rubber stopper from the
compressor.
7

Connect the power plug to the power outlet socket.
Inside of console box
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)

Backside of console box
When trouble arises
6
490
7
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Connect the bottle to the compressor.
Connect by inserting the bottle straight
into the compressor, and make sure that
the protruding part of the bottle is properly aligned with the groove in the case.
8
Attach the 2 stickers as shown.
Remove any dirt and moisture from the
wheel before attaching the sticker.
If you are unable to apply the stickers,
inform the nearest your Lexus dealer
that sealant has been applied to the
puncture when having the tire repaired
or replaced.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
9
491
Check the specified tire inflation
pressure.
Tire inflation pressure is specified on the
label as shown. (→P. 528)
10
Start the engine. (→P. 197)
11
To inject the sealant and inflate the
tire, turn the compressor switch on.
12
Inflate the tire until the recommended pressure is reached.
1
2
The air pressure gauge will display the actual tire inflation pressure about 1 minute (15 minutes at
low temperature) after the switch
is turned on.
3
Inject to recommended pressure.
• Turn the compressor switch off
and then check the tire inflation
pressure. Being careful not to
over inflate, check and repeat the
inflation procedure until the specified tire inflation pressure is
reached.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7
When trouble arises
The sealant will be injected and
the pressure will spike to 44 psi
(300 kPa, 3.0 kgf/cm2 or bar) or
58 psi (400 kPa, 4.0 kgf/cm2 or
bar), and then gradually
decrease.
492
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
• If the tire inflation pressure is still lower than the specified point after inflation for
10 minutes (35 minutes at low temperature) with the switch on, the tire is too
damaged to be repaired. Turn the compressor switch off and contact your
Lexus dealer.
• If the tire inflation pressure exceeds the recommended level, let out some air to
adjust the tire inflation pressure. (→P. 494, 528)
13
With the compressor switch off, disconnect the hose from the valve on the tire
and then pull out the power plug from the power outlet socket.
Some sealant may leak when the hose is removed.
14
Install the valve cap onto the valve of the emergency repaired tire.
15
Attach the air release cap to the end
of the hose.
If the air release cap is not attached, the
sealant may leak and the vehicle may
get dirty.
16
Temporarily store the bottle in the trunk while it is connected to the compressor.
17
To spread the liquid sealant evenly within the tire, immediately drive safely for
about 3 miles (5 km) below 50 mph (80 km/h).
18
After driving for about 3 miles
(5 km), stop your vehicle in a safe
place on a hard, flat surface and
remove the air release cap from the
hose before reconnecting the repair
kit.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
19
493
Turn the compressor switch on and
wait for several seconds, and then
turn it off. Check the tire inflation
pressure.
1
If the tire inflation pressure is under
19 psi (130 kPa, 1.3 kgf/cm2 or
bar): The puncture cannot be
repaired. Contact your Lexus
dealer.
2
If the tire inflation pressure is 19 psi (130 kPa, 1.3 kgf/cm2 or bar) or higher,
but less than the recommended level: Proceed to step 20 .
3
If the tire inflation pressure is the recommended level: Proceed to step 21 .
20
Turn the compressor switch on to inflate the tire until the recommended tire
inflation pressure is reached. Drive for about 3 miles (5 km) and then perform
step 18 .
21
Attach the air release cap to the end
of the hose.
If the air release cap is not attached, the
sealant may leak and the vehicle may
get dirty.
7
Store the bottle in the trunk while it is connected to the compressor.
23
Taking precautions to avoid sudden braking, sudden acceleration and sharp
turns, drive carefully at under 50 mph (80 km/h) to your Lexus dealer that is
less than 62 miles (100 km) away for tire repair or replacement.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
When trouble arises
22
494
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ Emergency tire puncture repair kit
● The sealant has a limited lifespan. The expiry date is shown on the bottle. The sealant
should be replaced before the expiry date. Contact your Lexus dealer for replacement.
● The sealant stored in the emergency tire puncture repair kit can be used only once to
temporarily repair a single tire. If the sealant has been used and need to be purchased,
contact your Lexus dealer.
● The sealant can be used when the outside temperature is from -40 °F (-40 °C) to
140 °F (60 °C).
● The repair kit is exclusively designed for size and type of tires originally installed on your
vehicle. Do not use it for tires that a different size than the original ones, or for any other
purposes.
● If the sealant gets on your clothes, it may stain.
● If the sealant adheres to a wheel or the surface of the vehicle body, the stain may not be
removable if it is not cleaned at once. Immediately wipe away the sealant with a wet
cloth.
● During operation of the repair kit, a loud operation noise is produced. This does not
indicate a malfunction.
● Do not use the emergency tire puncture repair kit to check or to adjust the tire pressure.
■ If the tire is inflated to more than the recommended level
1 Disconnect the hose from the valve.
2 Install the air release cap to the end of the
hose and push the protrusion on the air
release cap into the tire valve to let some air
out.
Disconnect the hose from the valve, remove the air release cap from the hose and then
reconnect the hose.
4 Turn the compressor switch on and wait for several seconds, and then turn it off. Check
that the air pressure indicator shows the recommended level. (→P. 528)
If the air pressure is lower than the recommended level, turn the compressor switch on
again and repeat the inflation procedure until the recommended pressure is reached.
■ The valve of a tire that has been repaired
● After a tire is repaired with the emergency tire puncture repair kit, the valve should be
replaced.
● After a tire is repaired with the emergency tire puncture repair kit, even if the tire inflation pressure is at the recommended level, the tire pressure warning light may come
on/flash.
■ Note for checking the emergency tire puncture repair kit
Check the sealant expiry date occasionally.
The expiry date is shown on the bottle.
Do not use sealant whose expiry date has already passed. Otherwise, repairs conducted
using the emergency tire puncture repair kit may not be performed properly.
3
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
495
WARNING
■ Caution while driving
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7
When trouble arises
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause an accident.
● The emergency tire puncture repair kit is made exclusively for your vehicle. Do not
use it on other vehicles.
● Do not use the emergency tire puncture repair kit for tires that are a different size
than the specified ones or for any other purpose. Doing so may cause the tires to not
be repaired properly.
■ Precautions for use of the sealant
● Ingesting the sealant is hazardous to your health. If you ingest sealant, consume as
much water as possible, and then immediately consult a doctor.
● If sealant gets in eyes or adheres to skin, immediately wash it off with water. If discomfort persists, consult a doctor.
■ When fixing the flat tire
● Stop your vehicle in a safe and flat area.
● Do not touch the wheels or the area around the brakes immediately after the vehicle
has been driven.
After the vehicle has been driven, the wheels and the area around the brakes may be
extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet or other body parts may result in
burns.
● Connect the valve and hose securely with the tire installed on the vehicle.
● If the hose is not properly connected to the valve, air leakage may occur or sealant
may be sprayed out.
● If the hose comes off the valve while inflating the tire, there is a risk that the hose will
move abruptly due to air pressure.
● After inflation of the tire has completed, the sealant may splatter when the hose is disconnected or some air is let out of the tire.
● Follow the operation procedure to repair the tire. If the procedures not followed, the
sealant may spray out.
● Keep back from the tire while it is being repaired, as there is a chance of it bursting
while the repair operation is being performed. If you notice any cracks or deformation of the tire, turn off the compressor switch and stop the repair operation immediately.
● The repair kit may overheat if operated for a long period of time. Do not operate the
repair kit continuously for more than 35 minutes.
● Parts of the repair kit become hot during operation. Be careful handling the repair kit
during and after operation. Do not touch the metal part connecting the bottle and the
compressor. It will be extremely hot.
● Do not attach the vehicle speed warning sticker to an area other than the one indicated. If the sticker is attached to an area where an SRS airbag is located, such as the
pad of the steering wheel, it may prevent the SRS air bag from operating properly.
496
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
WARNING
■ Driving to spread the liquid sealant evenly
● Drive the vehicle carefully at a low speed. Be especially careful when turning and cor-
nering.
● If the vehicle does not drive straight or you feel a pull through the steering wheel, stop
the vehicle and check the following:
• Tire condition. The tire may have separated from the wheel.
• Tire inflation pressure. If tire inflation pressure is 19 psi (130 kPa, 1.3 kgf/cm2 or
bar) or less, the tire may be severely damaged.
NOTICE
■ When performing an emergency repair
● Perform the emergency repair without removing the nail or screw that has punctured
the tread of the tire. If the object that has punctured the tire is removed, repair by the
emergency tire puncture repair kit may not be possible.
● The repair kit is not waterproof. Make sure that the repair kit is not exposed to water,
such as when it is being used in the rain.
● Do not put the repair kit directly onto dusty ground such as sand at the side of the
road. If the repair kit vacuums up dust etc., a malfunction may occur.
■ Handling the emergency tire puncture repair kit
● The repair kit power source should be 12 V DC suitable for vehicle use. Do not connect the repair kit to any other source.
● If gasoline splatters on the repair kit, the repair kit may deteriorate. Take care not to
allow gasoline to contact it.
● Store the emergency tire puncture repair kit in the trunk.
The kit may be thrown around during sudden braking and so forth, damaging the kit.
● Store the repair kit in the trunk out of reach of children.
● Do not disassemble or modify the repair kit. Do not subject parts such as the air pressure indicator to impacts. This may cause a malfunction.
■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your Lexus dealer or
other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. (→P. 394)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
497
If the engine will not start
If the engine will not start even though correct starting procedures are being
followed (→P. 197), consider each of the following points:
The engine will not start even though the starter motor operates normally.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.
Refuel the vehicle.
● The engine may be flooded.
Try to restart the engine again following correct starting procedures.
(→P. 197)
● There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system. (→P. 72)
The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and headlights
are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● The battery may be discharged. (→P. 504)
● The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.
The starter motor does not turn over
The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and headlights
do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.
● The battery may be discharged. (→P. 504)
● There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system.
Contact your Lexus dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair procedures
are unknown.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7
When trouble arises
The engine starting system may be malfunctioning due to an electrical problem
such as electronic key battery depletion or a blown fuse. However, an interim
measure is available to start the engine. (→P. 498)
498
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Emergency start function
When the engine does not start, the following steps can be used as an interim
measure to start the engine if the engine switch is functioning normally.
1
Press the parking brake switch to check that the parking brake is set.
(→P. 211)
Parking brake indicator will come on.
2
Shift the shift lever to P.
3
Turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY mode.
4
Press and hold the engine switch for about 15 seconds while depressing the
brake pedal firmly.
Even if the engine can be started using the above steps, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
499
If the parking brake cannot be released
In the event that the battery is discharged or switch operation does not
release the parking brake, the parking brake can be released manually using
the procedure below. This procedure should be performed only if necessary,
such as in an emergency.
If the switch cannot be operated even when the battery is normal, the parking
brake system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your
Lexus dealer immediately.
Before releasing the parking brake manually
● Shift the shift lever to P.
● Turn the engine switch off.
● Check that the parking brake indicator is off.
● Chock the tires.
Releasing the parking brake manually
1
Take out the parking brake release
tool and the screwdriver from the
trunk. (→P. 473, 485)
Fit the parking brake release tool into
the screwdriver handle.
Vehicles with spare tire: Take out the spare tire. (→P. 476)
Vehicles without spare tire: Remove the center auxiliary box. (→P. 487)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
When trouble arises
2
7
500
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
3
Remove the plug.
4
Insert the tool and press it down
firmly while turning it counterclockwise until it stops.
■ Manual operation of the parking brake
The parking brake cannot be set manually.
WARNING
■ When releasing the parking brake manually
● Shift the shift lever to P, turn the engine switch off and chock the tires. Failure to do so
may cause the vehicle to move, resulting in an accident.
● Turn the engine switch off and check that the parking brake indicator is off. Failure to
do so may cause the system to operate and turn the inserted parking brake release
tool, resulting in an injury.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
501
If the electronic key does not operate properly
If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted
(→P. 152) or the electronic key cannot be used because the battery is
depleted, the smart access system with push-button start and wireless
remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors and trunk can be
opened and the engine can be started by following the procedure below.
Locking and unlocking the doors, unlocking the trunk and key linked
functions
■ Doors
Use the mechanical key (→P. 133)
in order to perform the following
operations:
1
Locks all the doors
2
Closes the windows and moon
roof* (turn and hold)
3
Unlocks the door
Turning the key rearward unlocks the
driver’s door. Turning the key once
again within 5 seconds unlocks the
other doors.
4
Opens the windows and moon roof* (turn and hold)
■ Trunk
Turn the mechanical key clockwise
to open.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
When trouble arises
*: This setting must be customized at your Lexus dealer.
7
502
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Starting the engine
1
Ensure that the shift lever is in P and depress the brake pedal.
2
Touch the Lexus emblem side of the electronic key to the engine switch.
When the electronic key is detected, a buzzer sounds and the engine switch will turn
to IGNITION ON mode.
When the smart access system with push-button start is deactivated in customization
setting, the engine switch will turn to ACCESSORY mode.

GS350/GS300
3
Firmly depress the brake pedal and check that

GS F
and a message (GS F
only) are shown on the multi-information display.
4
Press the engine switch.
In the event that the engine still cannot be started, contact your Lexus dealer.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
503
■ Stopping the engine
Shift the shift lever to P and press the engine switch as you normally do when stopping
the engine.
■ Replacing the key battery
As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the electronic
key battery be replaced immediately when the battery is depleted. (→P. 410)
■ Alarm
If the trunk is opened using the mechanical key when the alarm system is set, the alarm
may be triggered. (→P. 74)
■ Changing engine switch modes
Release the brake pedal and press the engine switch in step 3 above.
The engine does not start and modes will be changed each time the switch is
pressed.(→P. 198)
■ When the electronic key does not work properly
● Make sure that the smart access system with push-button start has not been deactivated in the customization setting. If it is off, turn the function on.
(Customizable features: →P. 545)
● Check if battery-saving mode is set. If it is set, cancel the function. (→P. 151)
WARNING
■ When using the mechanical key and operating the power windows or moon roof
Operate the power window or moon roof after checking to make sure that there is no
possibility of any passenger having any of their body parts caught in the window or
moon roof.
Also, do not allow children to operate the mechanical key. It is possible for children and
other passengers to get caught in the power window or moon roof.
7
When trouble arises
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
504
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle battery is discharged
The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehicle’s battery is discharged.
You can also call your Lexus dealer or a qualified repair shop.
If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a 12-volt
battery, you can jump start your vehicle by following the steps below.
1
Confirm that the electronic key is being carried.

GS350/GS300

GS F
When connecting the jumper (or booster) cables, depending on the situation, the
alarm may activate and doors locked. (→P. 75)
2
Open the hood. (→P. 373)
3
GS300/GS F: Remove the engine cover.

GS300

GS F
Raise the front of the engine cover to
remove the front clips, and then raise
the rear of the engine cover to
remove the rear clips.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
4
505
Connect the jumper cables according to the following procedure:

GS350

GS300
7
When trouble arises
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
506
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

GS F
1
Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to the positive (+) battery terminal
on your vehicle
2
Connect the clamp on the other end of the positive cable to the positive (+)
battery terminal on the second vehicle
3
Connect a negative cable clamp to the negative (-) battery terminal on the
second vehicle
4
Connect the clamp at the other end of the negative cable to a solid, stationary, unpainted metallic point away from the battery and any moving parts,
as shown in the illustration.
5
Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed slightly and
maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the battery of
your vehicle.
6
Open and close any of the doors of your vehicle with the engine switch off.
7
Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start the engine of your
vehicle by turning the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.
8
Once the engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the exact reverse
order from which they were connected.
Once the engine starts, have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer as soon
as possible.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
507
■ Starting the engine when the battery is discharged
The engine cannot be started by push-starting.
■ To prevent battery discharge
● Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is off.
● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a low
speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic.
■ Charging the battery
The electricity stored in the battery will discharge gradually even when the vehicle is not
in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of certain electrical appliances. If
the vehicle is left for a long time, the battery may discharge, and the engine may be
unable to start. (The battery recharges automatically during driving.)
■ When recharging or replacing the battery
● In some cases, it may not be possible to unlock the doors using the smart access system
with push-button start when the battery is discharged. Use the wireless remote control
or the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors.
● The engine may not start on the first attempt after the battery has recharged but will
start normally after the second attempt. This is not a malfunction.
● The engine switch mode is memorized by the vehicle. When the battery is reconnected, the system will return to the mode it was in before the battery was discharged.
Before disconnecting the battery, turn the engine switch off.
If you are unsure what mode the engine switch was in before the battery discharged, be
especially careful when reconnecting the battery.
7
When trouble arises
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
508
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
WARNING
■ Avoiding battery fires or explosions
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable gas
that may be emitted from the battery:
● Make sure each jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not
unintentionally in contact with any other than the intended terminal.
● Do not allow the other end of the jumper cable connected to the “+” terminal to come
into contact with any other parts or metal surfaces in the area, such as brackets or
unpainted metal.
● Do not allow the + and - clamps of the jumper cables to come into contact with each
other.
● Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near the battery.
■ Battery precautions
The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts
contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling
the battery:
● When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to allow
any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body.
● Do not lean over the battery.
● In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immediately
wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be
received.
● Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and other battery-related parts.
● Do not allow children near the battery.
NOTICE
■ When handling jumper cables
When connecting the jumper cables, ensure that they do not become entangled in the
cooling fans or engine drive belt.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
509
If your vehicle overheats
The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating.
● The needle of the engine coolant temperature gauge (→P. 86, 92) enters the
red zone or a loss of engine power is experienced. (For example, the vehicle
speed does not increase.)
● “Engine Coolant Temp High Stop in a Safe Place See Owner’s Manual” is
shown on the multi-information display.
● Steam is coming from under the hood.
Correction procedures
1
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning system, and
then stop the engine.
2
If you see steam:
Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides.
If you do not see steam:
Carefully lift the hood.
3
After the engine has cooled down sufficiently, inspect the hoses and cooling
core (radiator) for any leaks.
1
Radiator
2
Cooling fans
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
When trouble arises
If a large amount of coolant leaks,
immediately contact your Lexus
dealer.
7
510
4
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL”/“F” and “LOW”/“L”
lines on the reservoir.
1
Engine coolant reservoir
2
“FULL”/“F”
3
“LOW”/“L”
4
Coolant inlet cap
5
Intercooler coolant reservoir

GS350

GS300
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)

GS F
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
5
511
Add coolant if necessary.
Water can be used in an emergency if coolant is unavailable.

GS350

GS300

GS F
7
Start the engine and turn the air conditioning system on to check that the radiator cooling fans operate and to check for coolant leaks from the radiator or
hoses.
The fans operate when the air conditioning system is turned on immediately after a
cold start. Confirm that the fans are operating by checking the fan sound and air flow.
If it is difficult to check these, turn the air conditioning system on and off repeatedly.
(The fans may not operate in freezing temperatures.)
7
If the fans are not operating:
Stop the engine immediately and contact your Lexus dealer.
If the fans are operating:
Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Lexus dealer.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
When trouble arises
6
512
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ When adding engine coolant (GS350/GS300)
Add coolant in accordance with the following procedure.
Remove caps A and B.
2 Add engine coolant through the inlet of cap A up to the “[AR/GR] B” line, and then
install cap A.
3 Add engine coolant through the inlet of cap B until it is full, and then install cap B.
GS300 only: When installing cap B, apply coolant to the O-ring on the end of cap B.
1
GS350
1
2
3
Cap A
Cap B
“[AR/GR] B” line (Target fill line)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
GS300
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
513
WARNING
■ When inspecting under the hood of your vehicle
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury such as burns.
● If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the steam
has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot.
● Keep hands and clothing (especially a tie, a scarf or a muffler) away from the fans and
belts. Failure to do so may cause the hands or clothing to be caught, resulting in serious injury.
● GS350: Do not loosen the coolant inlet cap
or the engine coolant reservoir cap while the
engine and radiator are hot.
High temperature steam or coolant could
spray out.
● GS F: Do not loosen the engine coolant res-
ervoir cap while the engine and radiator are
hot.
High temperature steam or coolant could
spray out.
● GS300: Do not loosen the coolant inlet cap,
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7
When trouble arises
the engine coolant reservoir cap or the intercooler coolant reservoir cap while the engine
and radiator are hot.
High temperature steam or coolant could
spray out.
514
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■ When adding engine coolant
Add coolant slowly after the engine has cooled down sufficiently. Adding cool coolant
to a hot engine too quickly can cause damage to the engine.
■ To prevent damage to the cooling system
Observe the following precautions:
● Avoid contaminating the coolant with foreign matter (such as sand or dust etc.).
● Do not use any coolant additive.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
515
If the vehicle becomes stuck
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes
stuck in mud, dirt or snow:
1
Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P.
2
Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the rear wheels.
3
Place wood, stones or some other material under the rear wheels to help provide traction.
4
Restart the engine.
5
Shift the shift lever to D or R and release the parking brake. Then, while exercising caution, depress the accelerator pedal.
■ When it is difficult to free the vehicle
Press
to turn off TRAC. (→P. 290)

GS350/GS300
7
When trouble arises
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
516
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

GS F
WARNING
■ When attempting to free a stuck vehicle
If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding
area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people. The vehicle may also
lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution.
■ When shifting the shift lever
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the transmission and other components
● Avoid spinning the rear wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more than nec-
essary.
● If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed, the vehicle
may require towing to be freed.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
517
Vehicle specifications
8
8-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.) ................... 518
Fuel information..........................532
Tire information ..........................535
8-2. Customization
Customizable features ............545
8-3. Initialization
Items to initialize.........................560
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
518
8-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
Dimensions and weight

GS350/GS300
Overall length
190.9 in. (4850 mm)
Overall width
72.4 in. (1840 mm)
Overall height*1
2WD
57.3 in. (1455 mm)
AWD
57.9 in. (1470 mm)
Wheelbase
Tread*
112.2 in. (2850 mm)
Front
62.0 in. (1575 mm)
Rear
62.6 in. (1590 mm)
61.4 in. (1560 mm)*2
1
Vehicle capacity weight
(Occupants + luggage)
825 lb. (370 kg)
*1: Unladen vehicle
*2: Vehicles with 265/35R19 tires

GS F
Overall length
193.5 in. (4915 mm)
Overall width
72.6 in. (1845 mm)
Overall height*
56.7 in. (1440 mm)
Wheelbase
112.2 in. (2850 mm)
Tread*
Front
61.2 in. (1555 mm)
Rear
61.4 in. (1560 mm)
Vehicle capacity weight
(Occupants + luggage)
*: Unladen vehicle
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
865 lb. (390 kg)
8-1. Specifications
519
Vehicle identification
■ Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle.
This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
This number is stamped on the top
left of the instrument panel and in the
engine compartment.

GS350

GS F

GS300
8
Vehicle specifications
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
520
8-1. Specifications
This number is also on the Certification Label.
■ Engine number
The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.

GS350

GS F
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)

GS300
8-1. Specifications
521
Engine

GS350
Model
3.5 L 6-cylinder (2GR-FKS)
Type
6-cylinder V type, 4-cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke
3.70 × 3.27 in. (94.0 × 83.0 mm)
Displacement
210.9 cu.in. (3456 cm3)
Valve clearance
Drive belt tension

Automatic adjustment
GS300
Model
2.0 L 4-cylinder with turbocharger (8AR-FTS)
Type
4-cylinder in line, 4-cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke
3.39 × 3.39 in. (86.0 × 86.0 mm)
Displacement
121.9 cu. in. (1998 cm3)
Valve clearance
Drive belt tension

Automatic adjustment
GS F
5.0 L 8-cylinder (2UR-GSE)
Type
8-cylinder V type, 4-cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke
3.70 × 3.52 in. (94.0 × 89.5 mm)
Displacement
303.2 cu. in. (4969 cm3)
Valve clearance
(engine cold)
Intake: 0.006 in. (0.15 mm)
Exhaust: 0.009 in. (0.22 mm)
Drive belt tension
Automatic adjustment
Fuel
Fuel type
Unleaded gasoline only
Octane Rating
91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher
Fuel tank capacity (Reference)
17.5 gal. (66.3 L, 14.6 Imp.gal.)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
8
Vehicle specifications
Model
522
8-1. Specifications
Lubrication system

GS350/GS300
GS350
2WD
AWD
6.0 qt.
(5.7 L, 5.0 Imp.qt.)
5.8 qt.
(5.5 L, 4.8 Imp.qt.)
6.8 qt.
(6.4 L, 5.6 Imp.qt.)
6.3 qt.
(6.0 L, 5.3 Imp.qt.)
GS300
Oil capacity
(Drain and refill ⎯
reference*)
With filter
Without filter
4.9 qt.
(4.6 L, 4.0 Imp.qt.)
4.5 qt.
(4.3 L, 3.8 Imp.qt.)
*: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing the engine
oil. Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes, and check the oil level
on the dipstick.
■ Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus
approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the following
grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multigrade engine oil
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
8-1. Specifications
523
Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20
SAE 0W-20 is the best choice for
good fuel economy and good starting in cold weather.
If SAE 0W-20 is not available, SAE
5W-20 oil may be used. However, it
must be replaced with SAE 0W-20
at the next oil change.
Outside temperature
Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example):
• The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold
startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of
the engine in cold weather.
• The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when the
oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a higher
value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or
under extreme load conditions.
How to read oil container label:
The International Lubricant Specification
Advisory
Committee
(ILSAC) Certification Mark is added
to some oil containers to help you
select the oil you should use.
8

GS F
With filter
Without filter
9.3 qt. (8.8 L, 7.7 Imp.qt.)
8.3 qt. (7.9 L, 7.0 Imp.qt.)
*: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing the engine
oil. Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes, and check the oil level
on the dipstick.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Vehicle specifications
Oil capacity
(Drain and refill — reference*)
524
8-1. Specifications
■ Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus
approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the following
grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity: SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is the best choice for
good fuel economy and good starting in cold weather.
If SAE 5W-30 is not available, SAE
10W-30 oil may be used. However,
it should be replaced with SAE 5W30 at the next oil change.
Outside temperature
Oil viscosity (5W-30 is explained here as an example):
• The 5W in 5W-30 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold
startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of
the engine in cold weather.
• The 30 in 5W-30 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when the
oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a higher
value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or
under extreme load conditions.
How to read oil container label:
The International Lubricant Specification
Advisory
Committee
(ILSAC) Certification Mark is added
to some oil containers to help you
select the oil you should use.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
8-1. Specifications
525
Cooling system
GS350
9.9 qt.(9.4 L, 8.3 Imp.qt.)
Engine coolant
9.5 qt.(9.0 L, 7.9 Imp.qt.)

Capacity
GS300
Intercooler
2.7 qt.(2.6 L, 2.3 Imp.qt.)

GS F
Coolant type
11.9 qt. (11.3 L, 9.9 Imp.qt.)
Use either of the following:
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based nonsilicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate
coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology
Do not use plain water alone.
Ignition system
GS350
GS300
GS F
Spark plug
Make
Gap
DENSO
FK20HBR8
0.031 in. (0.8 mm)
NGK
DILFR7K9G
0.04 in. (0.9 mm)
DENSO
FK20HBR-J8
0.031 in. (0.8 mm)
NOTICE
■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust the spark plug gap.
8
Vehicle specifications
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
526
8-1. Specifications
Electrical system
Battery
Open voltage at 68°F (20°C):
Charging rates
12.3 V or higher
(Voltage is checked 20 minutes after the engine
and all lights are turned off.)
5A
Automatic transmission
Fluid capacity*
GS350 (2WD)
10.0 qt. (9.5 L, 8.4 Imp.qt.)
GS350 (AWD)
10.6 qt. (10.0 L, 8.8 Imp.qt.)
GS300
9.2 qt. (8.7 L, 7.7 Imp.qt.)
GS F
11.8 qt. (11.2 L, 9.9 Imp.qt.)
Fluid type
Toyota Genuine ATF WS
*: The fluid capacity is the quantity of reference.
If replacement is necessary, contact your Lexus dealer.
NOTICE
■ Automatic transmission fluid type
Using transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause deterioration
in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the transmission of your vehicle.
Front differential (AWD models)
Oil capacity
0.74 qt. (0.70 L, 0.62 Imp.qt.)
Oil type and viscosity
Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil GL-5 or equivalent
Above 0°F (-18°C): SAE90
Below 0°F (-18°C): SAE80W or SAE80W-90
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
8-1. Specifications
527
Rear differential

GS350/GS300
Oil capacity
1.43 qt. (1.35 L, 1.19 Imp.qt.)
Oil type and viscosity
Vehicles without LSD (Limited Slip Differential):
Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LT
75W-85 GL-5 or equivalent*1
Vehicles with LSD (Limited Slip Differential):
Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LX 75W-85 GL-5
or equivalent*1

GS F
Torque transfer module*2
Differential
Left-hand side:
0.74 qt. (0.70 L, 0.62 Imp. qt.)
Right-hand side:
0.74 qt. (0.70 L, 0.62 Imp. qt.)
Oil capacity
1.43 qt. (1.35 L, 1.19 Imp. qt.)
Oil type and
viscosity
Toyota Genuine Differential gear
oil LT
Toyota Genuine ATF WS*3
75W-85 GL-5 or equivalent*1
*1: Your Lexus vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” at the factory.
Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” or an equivalent oil of
matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact your Lexus dealer
for further details.
*2: Torque transfer modules are located on the right and left sides of the rear differential
unit.
*
3
: Using torque transfer module fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause
deterioration of performance, vibration, or ultimately damage the TVD system of your
vehicle.
Pedal clearance*
GS350/GS300
4.0 in. (102 mm) Min.
GS F
4.4 in. (112 mm) Min.
Pedal free play
0.04 — 0.24 in. (1.0 — 6.0 mm)
Brake pad wear limit
0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake lining wear limit
0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Fluid type
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3
*: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 112.4 lbf (500 N, 51.0 kgf)
while the engine is running.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Vehicle specifications
Brakes
8
528
8-1. Specifications
Steering
Free play
Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)
Tires and wheels

GS350/GS300 (Type A)
Tire size
Tire inflation
pressure
(Recommended
cold tire inflation
pressure)
225/50R17 94W
Vehicle speed
Front tire
Rear tire
psi (kPa, kgf/cm2 psi (kPa, kgf/cm2
or bar)
or bar)
More than 118 mph
(190 km/h)
45 (310, 3.1)
45 (310, 3.1)
118 mph (190 km/h)
or less
35 (240, 2.4)
35 (240, 2.4)
Wheel size
17 × 7 1/2J
Wheel nut torque
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

GS350/GS300 (Type B)
Tire size
Tire inflation
pressure
(Recommended
cold tire inflation
pressure)
235/45R18 94Y
Vehicle speed
Front tire
Rear tire
psi (kPa, kgf/cm2 psi (kPa, kgf/cm2
or bar)
or bar)
More than 137 mph
(220 km/h)
45 (310, 3.1)
45 (310, 3.1)
137 mph (220 km/h)
or less
35 (240, 2.4)
35 (240, 2.4)
Wheel size
18 × 8J
Wheel nut torque
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
8-1. Specifications

GS350/GS300 (Type C)
Tire size
Tire inflation
pressure
(Recommended
cold tire inflation
pressure)
P235/45R18 94V
Vehicle speed
Front tire
Rear tire
psi (kPa, kgf/cm2 psi (kPa, kgf/cm2
or bar)
or bar)
More than 99 mph
(160 km/h)
45 (310, 3.1)
45 (310, 3.1)
99 mph (160 km/h)
or less
35 (240, 2.4)
35 (240, 2.4)
Wheel size
18 × 8J
Wheel nut torque
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

GS350/GS300 (Type D)
Tire size
Tire inflation
pressure
(Recommended
cold tire inflation
pressure)
235/40R19 96Y XL (front), 265/35R19 94Y (rear)
Vehicle speed
Front tire
Rear tire
psi (kPa, kgf/cm2 psi (kPa, kgf/cm2
or bar)
or bar)
More than 137 mph
(220 km/h)
45 (310, 3.1)
45 (310, 3.1)
137 mph (220 km/h)
or less
35 (240, 2.4)
36 (250, 2.5)
Wheel size
19 × 8J (235/40R19), 19 × 9J (265/35R19)
Wheel nut torque
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

529
GS350/GS300 (Type E)
Tire size
Vehicle speed
Front tire
Rear tire
psi (kPa, kgf/cm2 psi (kPa, kgf/cm2
or bar)
or bar)
More than 137 mph
(220 km/h)
45 (310, 3.1)
45 (310, 3.1)
137 mph (220 km/h)
or less
35 (240, 2.4)
36 (250, 2.5)
Wheel size
19 × 8J
Wheel nut torque
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Vehicle specifications
Tire inflation
pressure
(Recommended
cold tire inflation
pressure)
8
235/40R19 96Y XL
530

8-1. Specifications
GS350/GS300 (Type F)
Tire size
Tire inflation
pressure
(Recommended
cold tire inflation
pressure)
235/40R19 96V XL
Vehicle speed
Front tire
Rear tire
psi (kPa, kgf/cm2 psi (kPa, kgf/cm2
or bar)
or bar)
More than 99 mph
(160 km/h)
45 (310, 3.1)
45 (310, 3.1)
99 mph (160 km/h)
or less
35 (240, 2.4)
36 (250, 2.5)
Wheel size
19 × 8J
Wheel nut torque
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

GS350/GS300 (Compact spare tire)
Tire size
T155/70D17 110M, T145/70D18 107M
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
60 psi (420kPa, 4.2kgf/cm2 or bar)
Wheel size
17 × 4T (T155/70D17), 18 × 4T (T145/70D18)
Wheel nut torque
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
531
8-1. Specifications

GS F
255/35ZR19 (92Y) (front), 275/35ZR19 (96Y) (rear),
225/40ZR19 (93Y) XL (spare)*
Tire size
Vehicle speed
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended
More than 137 mph
cold tire inflation
(220 km/h)
pressure)
137 mph (220 km/h)
or less
Front tire
Rear tire
psi (kPa, kgf/cm2 psi (kPa, kgf/cm2
or bar)
or bar)
44 (300, 3.0)
44 (300, 3.0)
36 (250, 2.5)
36 (250, 2.5)
Tire inflation pressure
(spare)
(Recommended
42 psi (290kPa, 2.9kgf/cm2 or bar)
cold tire inflation
pressure)
Wheel size
19 × 9J (255/35ZR19), 19 × 10J (275/35ZR19),
19 × 8 1/2J (225/40ZR19)
Wheel nut torque
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
*: If equipped
Light bulbs
Light bulbs
Exterior
Interior
Bulb No.
W
Type
7444NA
28
A
W5W
5
B
Vanity lights
⎯
8
B
Trunk light
⎯
3.8
B
Front turn signal lights*
Outer foot lights
B: Wedge base bulbs (clear)
*: Vehicles with single-beam headlights
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Vehicle specifications
A: Wedge base bulbs (amber)
8
532
8-1. Specifications
Fuel information
You must only use unleaded gasoline.
Select premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 (Research
Octane Number 96) or higher required for optimum engine performance
and fuel economy.
If the octane rating is less than 91, damage to the engine may occur and may
void the vehicle warranty.
At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of ASTM
D4814 in the U.S.A..
■ Gasoline quality
In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you are
using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this does not
correct the problem, consult your Lexus dealer.
■ Gasoline quality standards
● Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.A., Europe and Japan have developed a specification for fuel quality called the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC), which is expected
to be applied worldwide.
● The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission levels. In
the U.S., category 4 has been adopted.
● The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and improves
customer satisfaction through better performance.
■ Recommendation of the use of gasoline containing detergent additives
● Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid the
build-up of engine deposits.
● All gasoline sold in the U.S.A. contains minimum detergent additives to clean and/or
keep clean intake systems, per EPA’s lowest additives concentration program.
● Lexus strongly recommends the use of Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. For more information on Top Tier Detergent Gasoline and a list of marketers, please go to the official
website www.toptiergas.com.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
8-1. Specifications
533
■ Recommendation of the use of low emissions gasoline
Gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol, as well as reformulated
gasolines, are available in some cities. These fuels are typically acceptable for use, providing they meet other fuel requirements.
Lexus recommends these fuels, since the formulations allow for reduced vehicle emissions.
■ Non-recommendation of the use of blended gasoline
● Use only gasoline containing up to 15% ethaDO NOT use gasoline connol.
DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline that taining more than 15% ethanol.
could contain more than 15% ethanol, including from any pump labeled E30, E50, E85
(30% ethanol)
(which are only some examples of fuel containing more than 15% ethanol).
(50% ethanol)
(85% ethanol)
● If you use gasohol in your vehicle, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than 91.
● Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.
■ Non-recommendation of the use of gasoline containing MMT
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
8
Vehicle specifications
Some gasoline contains an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing
MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens,
contact your Lexus dealer for service.
■ If your engine knocks
● Consult your Lexus dealer.
● You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.
534
8-1. Specifications
NOTICE
■ Notice on fuel quality
● Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used, the engine will be damaged.
● Do not use leaded gasoline.
Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic converters
causing the emission control system to malfunction.
● Do not use gasohol other than the type previously stated.
Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems.
● Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than the level previously stated may cause persistent heavy knocking.
At worst, this may lead to engine damage and will void the vehicle warranty.
■ Fuel-related poor driveability
If poor driveability (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.) is encountered after using a different type of fuel, discontinue the use of that type of fuel.
■ When refueling with gasohol
Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle’s paint.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
8-1. Specifications
535
Tire information
Typical tire symbols

Full-size tire

Compact spare tire
8
Vehicle specifications
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
536
8-1. Specifications
1
Tire size
(→P. 537)
2
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)
(→P. 537)
3
Location of treadwear indicators
(→P. 393)
4
Tire ply composition and materials
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands which form the
plies in a tire.
5
Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “RADIAL” is a bias-ply
tire.
6
TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly put into the tire. A tube type tire
has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.
7
Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure
(→P. 540)
8
Maximum cold tire inflation pressure
(→P. 540)
This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
9
Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows.
10
Summer tires or all season tires
(→P. 397)
An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is a summer
tire.
11
“TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” molded
on its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary emergency use only.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
8-1. Specifications
537
Typical DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Type A
1
DOT symbol*
2
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
3
Tire manufacturer’s identification mark
4
Tire size code
5
Manufacturer’s optional tire type code (3 or 4 letters)
6
Manufacturing week
7
Manufacturing year
8
Manufacturer’s code

Type B
*: The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
Tire size
■ Typical tire size information
The illustration indicates typical tire
size.
Tire use
(P = Passenger car,
T = Temporary use)
2
Section width (millimeters)
3
Aspect ratio
(tire height to section width)
4
Tire construction code (R = Radial, D = Diagonal)
5
Wheel diameter (inches)
6
Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)
7
Speed symbol (alphabet with one letter)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Vehicle specifications
1
8
538
8-1. Specifications
■ Tire dimensions
1
Section width
2
Tire height
3
Wheel diameter
Tire section names
1
Bead
2
Sidewall
3
Shoulder
4
Tread
5
Belt
6
Inner liner
7
Reinforcing rubber
8
Carcass
9
Rim lines
10
Bead wires
11
Chafer
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
8-1. Specifications
539
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation.
It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Lexus vehicles with
information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information.
■ DOT quality grades
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
■ Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test
course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as well on
the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use.
Performance may differ significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
■ Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
8
Vehicle specifications
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight
ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.
540
8-1. Specifications
■ Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s
resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test
wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grades of a tire assume that it is properly inflated and
not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term
Cold tire inflation pressure
Meaning
Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for
three hours or more, or has not been driven more than 1
mile or 1.5 km under that condition
Maximum inflation pres- The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire may
sure
be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire
Recommended
pressure
inflation Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those standard items
which may be replaced) of automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows, power
seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these items are
available as factory-installed equipment (whether
installed or not)
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment,
including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant,
and if so equipped, air conditioning and additional
weight optional engine
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
Maximum loaded vehicle
(b) Accessory weight
weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
Normal occupant weight
150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified
in the second column of Table 1* that follows
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
8-1. Specifications
Tire related term
541
Meaning
Occupant distribution
Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the
third column of Table 1* below
Production options weight
The combined weight of installed regular production
options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the
standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including
heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
battery, and special trim
Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated
Rim diameter
(Wheel diameter)
Nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation
Rim diameter and width
Rim type designation
The industry manufacturer’s designation for a rim by
style or code
Rim width
Nominal distance between rim flanges
Vehicle capacity weight The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68 kg)
(Total load capacity)
times the vehicle’s designated seating capacity
The load on an individual tire that is determined by disVehicle maximum load on tributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded
the tire
vehicle weight, and dividing by two
The load on an individual tire that is determined by disVehicle normal load on the tributing to each axle its share of curb weight, accessory
tire
weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in
accordance with Table 1* below), and dividing by two
The surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated
tire
Bead
The part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped
or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the
rim
Bead separation
A breakdown of the bond between components in the
bead
Bias ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to
the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially less
than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread
Carcass
The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber
which, when inflated, bears the load
Chunking
The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall
Cord
The strands forming the plies in the tire
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
8
Vehicle specifications
Weather side
542
8-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Cord separation
The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds
Cracking
Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of
the tire extending to cord material
CT
A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim
system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges
pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit on
the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the
rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire
Extra load tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher
inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire
Groove
The space between two adjacent tread ribs
Innerliner
The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire
that contains the inflating medium within the tire
Innerliner separation
The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the
carcass
(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white
lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or deeper than
the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire,
Intended outboard sidewall
or
(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire
that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle
Light truck (LT) tire
A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily
intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose
passenger vehicles
Load rating
The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given
inflation pressure
Maximum load rating
The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible
inflation pressure for that tire
Maximum permissible infla- The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may
tion pressure
be inflated
Measuring rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension
requirements
Open splice
Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord material
Outer diameter
The overall diameter of an inflated new tire
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
8-1. Specifications
Tire related term
543
Meaning
The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs
Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose
passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle
weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or less.
Ply
A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords
Ply separation
A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies
Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric
and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an
automotive wheel, provides the traction and contains
the gas or fluid that sustains the load
Radial ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to
the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread
Reinforced tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher
inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire
Section width
The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to
labeling, decoration, or protective bands
Sidewall
That portion of a tire between the tread and bead
Sidewall separation
The parting of the rubber compound from the cord
material in the sidewall
Snow tire
A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater
than 110, compared to the ASTM E-1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test as
described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method
for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line on
Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which is marked
with an Alpine Symbol (
) on at least one sidewall
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
8
Vehicle specifications
Overall width
544
8-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Test rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be
any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire
Tread
That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the
road
Tread rib
A tread section running circumferentially around a tire
Tread separation
Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass
Treadwear indicators
(TWI)
The projections within the principal grooves designed
to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the
tread
Wheel-holding fixture
The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly
securely during testing
*: Table 1 ⎯ Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities
Designated seating capac- Vehicle normal load, Num- Occupant distribution in a
ity, Number of occupants
ber of occupants
normally loaded vehicle
2 through 4
2
2 in front
5 through 10
3
2 in front, 1 in second seat
11 through 15
5
2 in front, 1 in second seat, 1
in third seat, 1 in fourth seat
16 through 20
7
2 in front, 2 in second seat,
2 in third seat, 1 in fourth
seat
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
8-2. Customization
545
Customizable features
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized
to your preferences. These preferences can be changed by using the meter
control switches, by using the Remote Touch, or at your Lexus dealer.
Customizing vehicle features
■ Changing by using the Remote Touch
1
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch.
2
Select
on the “Menu” screen and select “Vehicle”.
Various setting can be changed. Refer to the list of settings that can be changed for
details.
■ Changing by using the meter control switches
1
Press
2
Press
or
or
of the meter control switches, select
.
of the meter control switches, select the item or the
desired setting, and then press
.
To go back to the previous screen, press
.
8
Vehicle specifications
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
546
8-2. Customization
Customizable features
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions being
customized. Contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
1
Settings that can be changed using the Remote Touch
2
Settings that can be changed using the meter control switches
3
Settings that can be changed by your Lexus dealer
Definition of symbols: O = Available, — = Not available
■ Meters and multi-information display (→P. 100, 108)

GS350/GS300
Function
Language
Default
setting
English
Customized
setting
French
Spanish
1
2
3
O O —
miles
(MPG Imperial)
Units*1
miles
(MPG US) km (L/100 km) O O —
km (km/L)
Eco Driving Indicator Light
switch settings
On
(selflighting)
Off
— O —
Drive information 1
Desired status
screen*2
— O —
*3
— O —
*3
— O —
Current fuel
consumption
Drive information screen displayed on
the first screen of
Average
(Drive information 1)
fuel
economy
(after reset)
Drive information screen displayed on
the second screen of
(Drive information 2)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Distance
(range)
Average
speed
(after reset)
547
8-2. Customization
Function
Drive information screen displayed on
the third screen of
(Drive information 3)
Default
setting
Customized
setting
Average
fuel
economy
(after
refuel)
*3
— O —
1
2
3
Elapsed
time
(after start)
Pop-up display
On
Off
— O —
Accent color*4
Color 1
Color 2
O O —
Clock
12-hour
display
Needle*5
Blue
24-hour display — O —
Red
White
— O —
2000 to
6800 rpm*6
Rev indicator*5
5000 rpm
2000 to
6100 rpm*7
— O —
Off
Rev peak*
5
On
Off
— O —
*1: The default setting varies according to countries.
*2: Some status screens cannot be registered (indicated on the multi-information display)
*3: 2 of the following items: current fuel consumption, average fuel economy (after reset),
*4: Except F SPORT models
*5: F SPORT models
*6: GS350
*7: GS300
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
8
Vehicle specifications
average fuel economy (after refuel), average fuel economy (after start), average vehicle speed (after reset), average vehicle speed (after start), distance (driving range),
distance (after start), elapsed time (after reset), elapsed time (after start), blank
548
8-2. Customization

GS F
Function
Language
Default
setting
English
Customized
setting
French
Spanish
1
2
3
O O —
km (km/L)
Units*1
Eco Driving Indicator Light
switch settings
Drive information screen displayed on
the first screen of
(Drive information 1)
Drive information screen displayed on
the second screen of
(Drive information 2)
Drive information screen displayed on
the third screen of
(Drive information 3)
Pop-up display
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
miles
km (L/100 km) O O —
(MPG US)
miles (MPG
Imperial)
On
(selflighting)
Off
— O —
Drive information 1
Desired status
screen*2
— O —
*3
— O —
*3
— O —
*3
— O —
Off
— O —
Current fuel
economy
Average
fuel
economy
(after reset)
Distance
(driving
range)
Average
vehicle
speed
(after reset)
Average
fuel
economy
(after
refuel)
Elapsed
time
(after start)
On
549
8-2. Customization
Default
setting
Function
Customized
setting
1
2
3
Setting 1
Rev indicator
Setting 2
Setting 3
— O —
Off
Rev peak
On
Speed indicator
Off
Off
— O —
30 to 100 mph
(50 to 160 km/h) — O —
SPORT S
SPORT S
mode
screen
SPORT S+
SPORT S+
SPORT S mode — O —
mode
screen
screen
Drive mode gauges
SPORT S+
mode screen
— O —
Eco drive mode
screen
CUSTOMIZE
Normal
mode
screen
SPORT S mode
— O —
screen
SPORT S+
mode screen
*1: The default setting varies according to country.
*2: Some status screens cannot be registered (indicated on multi-information display).
*3: 2 of the following items: current fuel consumption, average fuel economy (after reset),
average fuel economy (after refuel), average fuel economy (after start), average vehicle speed (after reset), average vehicle speed (after start), distance (driving range),
distance (after start), elapsed time (after reset), elapsed time (after start), blank.
8
Vehicle specifications
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
550
8-2. Customization
■ LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist)* (→P. 249)
Default
setting
Customized
setting
Lane centering function
Off
On
— O —
Steering assist function
On
Off
— O —
(Steering
vibration)
(Buzzer)
Standard
High
— O —
Vehicle sway warning function
On
Off
— O —
Vehicle sway warning sensitivity
Standard
Function
Adjust alert type
Alert sensitivity
1
2
3
— O —
Low
High
— O —
*: If equipped
■ PCS (Pre-Collision System)* (→P. 238)
Function
PCS (Pre-Collision System)
Default
setting
Customized
setting
On
Off
(Far)
Adjust alert timing
(Middle)
(Near)
*: If equipped
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
1
2
3
— O —
— O —
551
8-2. Customization
■ BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)* (→P. 278)
Function
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
Default
setting
Customized
setting
On
Off
1
2
3
— O —
*: If equipped
■ AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System)* (→P. 217)
Function
AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System)
Default
setting
Customized
setting
On
Off
Default
setting
Customized
setting
1
2
3
— O —
*: If equipped
■ Door lock (→P. 137, 501)
Function
1
On
(Driver’s
door
Unlocking on second key turn
Off
(Allows all doors to be unlocked by turn- unlocked in
(All doors
ing the mechanical key twice in the one step, all unlocked in one —
doors
driver’s door)
step)
unlocked in
two steps)
2
3
— O
Off
Automatic door lock
Locking/unlocking of the trunk when all
doors are locked/unlocked
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Off
Shifting the
shift lever to Driver’s door is O — O
P
opened
On
Off
—
— O
8
Vehicle specifications
Automatic door unlock
Shifting the Vehicle speed
shift lever to
is approxiO — O
position
mately 12 mph
other than P (20 km/h) or
higher
552
8-2. Customization
■ Smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control
(→P. 132, 150)
Function
Operation signal
(Buzzers)
Operation signal
(Emergency flashers)
Default
setting
Customized
setting
1
2
3
Off
5
O — O
1 to 7
On
Off
O — O
Off
Time elapsed before automatic door
lock function is activated if a door is not
opened after being unlocked
60
seconds
Open door reminder buzzer (When
locking the vehicle)
On
30
seconds
O — O
120
seconds
Off
—
— O
■ Smart access system with push-button start (→P. 150)
Function
Default
setting
Customized
setting
1
2
Smart access system with push-button
start
On
Off
—
— O
Select doors to unlock
Driver’s
door
All the doors
O — O
Number of consecutive door lock operations
2 times
As many as
desired
—
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
3
— O
553
8-2. Customization
■ Wireless remote control (→P. 132)
Function
Wireless remote control
Unlocking operation
Default
setting
Customized
setting
1
2
On
Off
—
— O
3
On
(Driver’s
door
Off
unlocked in
(All doors
O — O
one step, all unlocked in one
doors
step)
unlocked in
two steps)
One short
press
Trunk unlocking operation
Push twice
Press and
hold (short) Press and hold
(long)
—
— O
Off
Alarm (panic mode)
On
Off
—
— O
Function
Default
setting
Customized
setting
1
2
Driver’s seat movement when exiting
the vehicle
Standard
Selecting the door linking driving position memory with door unlock operation
Driver’s
door
All doors
—
— O
Default
setting
Customized
setting
1
2
■ Front seats (→P. 158)
3
Off
O — O
Partial
8
Function
3
Off
Linked to
Automatic mirror folding and extending the locking/ Linked to oper—
operation*
unlocking of
ation of the
the doors
engine switch
— O
Linked mirror function when reversing
— O
*: If equipped
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
On
Off
—
Vehicle specifications
■ Outside rear view mirrors (→P. 171)
554
8-2. Customization
■ Power windows and moon roof (→P. 175, 178)
Default
setting
Customized
setting
1
2
Mechanical key linked operation
Off
On
—
— O
Wireless remote control linked operation
Off
On
(Open only)
—
— O
Buzzer sounds if operated using wireless remote control
On
Off
—
— O
Default
setting
Customized
setting
1
2
Standard
-2 to 2
Function
3
■ Automatic light control system (→P. 216)
Function
Light sensor sensitivity
3
O — O
Off
Time elapsed before the headlights
automatically turn off
30
seconds
60
seconds
O — O
90
seconds
Welcome light illumination control
On
Off
—
— O
Default
setting
Customized
setting
1
2
On
Off
■ Lights (→P. 216)
Function
Daytime running lights*
*: U.S.A. only
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
3
O — O
555
8-2. Customization
■ Intuitive parking assist*1, 2
Function
Default
setting
Customized
setting
Detection distance of the front center
sensor*3
Far
Near
O — O
Detection distance of the rear center
sensor
Far
Near
O — O
3
1 to 5
O — O
All sensors
displayed
Display off
O — O
Buzzer volume
Display setting
(when intuitive parking assist is operating)
1
2
3
*1: If equipped
*2: Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
*3: GS350/GS300
■ Driving mode select switch (vehicles with Adaptive Variable Suspension
system) (→P. 274)
Function
Default
setting
Customized
setting
Power
1
2
3
O —
—
Power train control
Normal
Chassis control
Normal
Sport
O —
—
Air conditioning operation
Normal
Eco
O —
—
Eco
8
Vehicle specifications
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
556
8-2. Customization
■ Automatic air conditioning system (→P. 308)
Function
A/C Auto switch operation
Exhaust gas sensor information
Default
setting
Customized
setting
On
Off
O — O
Standard
-3 to 3
O — O
1
2
3
■ Front seat heaters (without seat ventilators)* (→P. 324)
Function
Default
setting
Customized
setting
1
2
Automatic operation of front seat heater
Off
On
—
— O
1
2
3
*: If equipped
■ Front seat heaters and ventilators*1/rear seat heaters*2 (→P. 323)
Function
Default
setting
Adjustment of the front seat heater temperature or the ventilator fan speed
during automatic operation (individual
seat adjustment available)
Level 3
(standard)
Adjustment of the rear seat heater temperature during automatic operation
(individual seat adjustment available)
Level 3
(standard)
Level 1
(low) to
level 5
(high)
O — O
Rear seat heater start-up conditions
when the engine switch is in IGNITION
ON mode (individual seat adjustment
available)
Off
On
(AUTO)
O — O
*1: If both are equipped
*2: If equipped
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Customized
setting
3
Level 1 (low) to
level 5 (high) O — O
557
8-2. Customization
■ Illumination (→P. 327)
Function
Interior lights illumination control
Default
setting
Customized
setting
1
2
On
Off
—
— O
7.5
seconds
3
Time elapsed before the interior lights
turn off
15
seconds
Operation after the engine switch is
turned off
On
Off
—
— O
Operation when the doors are unlocked
On
Off
—
— O
Operation when you approach the vehicle with the electronic key on your person
On
Off
—
— O
Footwell lighting
On
Off
—
— O
Outer foot lights
On
Off
—
— O
30
seconds
O — O
Off
Time elapsed before the outer foot lights
turn off
15
seconds
7.5
seconds
O — O
30
seconds
Enable/disable operation of the outer
foot lights when you approach the vehicle with the electronic key on your person
On
Enable/disable operation of the outer
foot lights when the doors are unlocked
with the power door lock switch
On
—
— O
8
Off
—
— O
Vehicle specifications
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Off
558
8-2. Customization
■ Rear sunshade* (→P. 341)
Function
Reverse operation
Default
setting
Customized
setting
1
2
On
Off
—
— O
—
— O
3
0 second
Time elapsed before the reverse operation feature activates
0.7
seconds
0.9
seconds
1.2
seconds
*: If equipped
■ Seat belt reminder buzzer (→P. 436)
Function
Default
setting
Customized
setting
1
2
Speed-linked seat belt reminder function
On
Off
—
— O
3
■ Vehicle customization
● When the speed linked door locking function and shift position linked door locking
function are both on, the door lock operates as follows.
• When shifting the shift lever to any position other than P, all the doors will be locked.
• If the vehicle is started with all the doors locked, the speed linked door locking function would not operate.
• If the vehicle is started with any door unlocked, the speed linked door locking function will operate.
● When the smart access system with push-button start is off, the selecting door to
unlock cannot be customized.
● When the doors remain closed after unlocking the doors and the automatic door lock
function (time elapsed before the automatic door lock function is activated if a door is
not opened after being unlocked) activates, the signals will be generated in accordance
with the operation signal (buzzers) and the operation signal (emergency flashers) settings.
● Some settings can be changed using a switch or the Remote Touch screen. If a setting is
changed using a switch, the changed setting will not be reflected on the Remote Touch
screen until the engine switch is turned off and then to IGNITION ON mode.
■ When customizing using the Remote Touch
Stop the vehicle in a safe place, apply the parking brake, and shift the shift lever to P. Also,
to prevent battery discharge, leave the engine running while customizing the features.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
8-2. Customization
559
WARNING
■ During customization
As the engine needs to be running during customization, ensure that the vehicle is
parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage, exhaust
gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the vehicle. This
may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
NOTICE
■ During customization
To prevent battery discharge, ensure that the engine is running while customizing features.
8
Vehicle specifications
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
560
8-3. Initialization
Items to initialize
The following items must be initialized for normal system operation after such
cases as the battery being reconnected, or maintenance being performed on
the vehicle:
Item
Message indicating
nance is required*1
When to initialize
Reference
mainte- • After the maintenance is performed
P. 366
Oil maintenance*2
• After the maintenance is performed
P. 384
Tire pressure warning system
• When rotating the tires
• When changing the tire inflation
pressure by changing traveling
speed or load weight, etc.
P. 395
*1: U.S.A. only
*2: GS350/GS300
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
561
For owners
9
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners.....................................562
Seat belt instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French)..............................................563
SRS airbag instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French)..............................................565
Headlight aim instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French) (vehicles with
single-beam headlights)...................573
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
562
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free: 1-800-25LEXUS).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it
finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Lexus Division of Toyota
Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov ; or
write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC
20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
563
Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in
French)
The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted from
the seat belt section in this manual.
See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in English.
Utilisation adéquate des ceintures de sécurité
● Tirez sur la ceinture épaulière
jusqu’à ce qu’elle recouvre entièrement l’épaule; elle ne doit cependant
pas toucher le cou ni glisser de
l’épaule.
● Placez la ceinture abdominale le
plus bas possible sur les hanches.
● Réglez la position du dossier. Tenezvous assis bien au fond du siège, le
dos droit.
● Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de sécurité.
Guide de ceinture de sécurité (sièges latéraux arrière)
Pour les enfants ou les personnes de
taille inférieure à la moyenne, faites
glisser le guide de ceinture de sécurité
vers l’avant, de sorte que la ceinture
épaulière ne repose pas près du cou de
cette personne.
9
For owners
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
564
Entretien et soin
■ Ceintures de sécurité
Avec un chiffon ou une éponge, nettoyez à l’aide d’un savon doux et de l’eau
tiède. Vérifiez aussi les ceintures régulièrement pour vous assurer qu’elles ne
présentent pas d’usure excessive, d’effilochage ou de coupures.
AVERTISSEMENT
■ Dommages et usure de la ceinture de sécurité
Vérifiez périodiquement le système de ceintures de sécurité. Vérifiez qu’il n’y a pas de
coupures, d’effilochures ni de pièces desserrées. N’utilisez pas une ceinture de sécurité endommagée avant qu’elle ne soit remplacée. Les ceintures de sécurité endommagées ne peuvent pas protéger les occupants contre les blessures graves, voire
mortelles.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
565
SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in
French)
The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions extracted
from the SRS airbag section in this manual.
See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instructions in
English.
9
For owners
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
566
◆ Coussins gonflables SRS avant
1
Coussin gonflable SRS du conducteur/du passager avant
Peuvent aider à protéger la tête et la poitrine du conducteur et du passager
avant contre les impacts avec des composants intérieurs
2
Coussins gonflables SRS de protection des genoux
Peuvent aider à protéger le conducteur et le passager avant
Un coussin gonflable SRS de protection des genoux pour le siège du passager avant est intégré dans la porte de la boîte à gants.
◆ Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux et en rideau
3
Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux avant
Peuvent aider à protéger le torse des occupants des sièges avant
Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux arrière
Peuvent aider à protéger le torse des occupants des sièges latéraux arrière
4
Coussins gonflables SRS en rideau
● Peuvent aider à protéger principalement la tête des occupants des
sièges latéraux
● Peuvent empêcher les occupants d’tre éjectés du véhicule en cas de
tonneaux
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
567
Composants du système de coussins gonflables SRS
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Coussins gonflables latéraux avant
Lampe témoin SRS
Coussin gonflable du conducteur
Coussins gonflables latéraux arrière
Capteurs d’impact latéral (arrière)
Capteur de position du siège du
conducteur
Contacteur de boucle de ceinture
de sécurité du conducteur
Module de capteur de coussin gonflable
Contacteur de boucle de ceinture
de sécurité du passager avant
Capteurs d’impact avant
9
For owners
7
Système de classification de l’occupant du siège du passager avant
(ECU et capteurs)
Capteurs
d’impact
latéral
(portières avant)
Coussins gonflables de protection
des genoux
Coussin gonflable du passager
avant
Coussins gonflables en rideau
Voyants “AIR BAG ON” et “AIR
BAG OFF”
Dispositifs de tension et limiteurs de
force des ceintures de sécurité
Capteurs d’impact latéral (avant)
568
Votre véhicule est doté de COUSSINS GONFLABLES ÉVOLUÉS dont la conception s’appuie sur les normes de sécurité des véhicules à moteur américains
(FMVSS208). Le module de capteur de coussin gonflable (ECU) contrôle le
déploiement des coussins gonflables en fonction des informations obtenues des
capteurs et d’autres éléments affichés dans le diagramme des composants du
système ci-dessus. Ces informations comprennent des données relatives à la
gravité de l’accident et aux occupants. Au moment du déploiement des coussins
gonflables, une réaction chimique se produit dans les gonfleurs de coussin gonflable et les coussins gonflables se remplissent rapidement d’un gaz non toxique
pour aider à limiter le mouvement des occupants.
AVERTISSEMENT
■ Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS
Observez les précautions suivantes en ce qui concerne les coussins gonflables SRS.
Les négliger pourrait occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles.
● Le conducteur et tous les passagers du véhicule doivent porter leur ceinture de sécurité de la manière appropriée.
Les coussins gonflables SRS sont des dispositifs supplémentaires qui doivent être utilisés avec les ceintures de sécurité.
● Le coussin gonflable SRS du conducteur se déploie avec une force considérable et
peut occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, notamment lorsque le conducteur se trouve très près du coussin gonflable. La National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA), aux États-Unis, fait les recommandations suivantes :
La zone à risque du coussin gonflable du conducteur couvre 2 à 3 in. (50 à 75 mm)
de la zone de déploiement du coussin gonflable. Pour assurer une marge de sécurité
suffisante, restez à 10 in. (250 mm) du coussin gonflable. Cette distance est
mesurée depuis le centre du volant jusqu’à votre sternum. Si maintenant vous vous
tenez assis à moins de 10 in. (250 mm), vous pouvez changer votre position de conduite de plusieurs manières :
• Reculez votre siège à la position maximale vous permettant d’atteindre encore
aisément les pédales.
• Inclinez légèrement le dossier du siège.
Même si les véhicules sont conçus différemment, la plupart des conducteurs peuvent maintenir une distance de 10 in. (250 mm), même si le siège se trouve complètement vers l’avant, simplement en inclinant un peu le dossier du siège vers
l’arrière. Si la visibilité avant est moindre après avoir incliné le dossier de votre
siège, utilisez un coussin ferme et non glissant pour être assis plus haut ou relevez
le siège si cette option est disponible sur votre véhicule.
• Si votre volant est réglable en hauteur, inclinez-le vers le bas. Cela vous permet
d’orienter le coussin gonflable vers votre buste plutôt que vers votre tête et vers
votre cou.
Le siège doit être réglé de la manière recommandée ci-dessus par la NHTSA, tout
en gardant le contrôle des pédales et du volant, ainsi que la vue sur les commandes
du tableau de bord.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
569
AVERTISSEMENT
■ Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS
● Si la rallonge de ceinture de sécurité a été
reliée à la boucle des ceintures de sécurité
des sièges avant sans avoir aussi été attachée
à la plaque de blocage des ceintures de sécurité, les coussins gonflables SRS avant considéreront que le conducteur et le passager
avant portent tout de même leur ceinture de
sécurité même si les ceintures de sécurité ne
sont pas attachées. Les coussins gonflables
SRS avant peuvent alors ne pas s’activer correctement lors d’une collision, ce qui pourrait
occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, en cas de collision. Assurez-vous de
toujours porter la ceinture de sécurité avec la
rallonge de ceinture de sécurité.
● Le coussin gonflable SRS du passager avant se déploie également avec une force considérable et peut occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, notamment lorsque le passager avant se trouve très près du coussin gonflable. Le siège du passager
avant doit se trouver le plus loin possible du coussin gonflable et le dossier doit être
réglé de manière à ce que le passager avant soit assis bien droit.
● Le déploiement d’un coussin gonflable risque d’infliger des blessures graves, voire mortelles, aux bébés et aux enfants mal assis et/ou mal attachés. Un bébé ou un enfant trop
petit pour utiliser une ceinture de sécurité doit être correctement retenu à l’aide d’un
dispositif de retenue pour enfants. Lexus recommande vivement de placer et d’attacher
correctement tous les bébés et tous les enfants sur les sièges arrière du véhicule à l’aide
de dispositifs de retenue adaptés. Les sièges arrière sont plus sécuritaires pour les
bébés et les enfants que le siège du passager avant.
● N’installez jamais un dispositif de retenue pour enfants de type dos à la route sur le siège
du passager avant, même si le voyant “AIR BAG OFF” est allumé.
En cas d’accident, la force et la vitesse de déploiement du coussin gonflable du passager avant pourraient infliger à l’enfant des blessures graves, voire mortelles, si le dispositif de retenue pour enfants de type dos à la route était installé sur le siège du
passager avant.
● Ne vous asseyez pas sur le bord du siège et
ne vous appuyez pas sur la planche de bord.
9
For owners
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
570
AVERTISSEMENT
■ Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS
● Ne laissez pas un enfant se tenir face au cous-
sin gonflable SRS du passager avant ni s’asseoir sur les genoux d’un passager avant.
● Ne laissez pas les occupants des sièges avant
tenir des objets sur leurs genoux.
● Ne vous appuyez pas sur la portière ou sur le
brancard de pavillon, ni sur les montants
avant, latéraux ou arrière.
● Ne laissez personne s’agenouiller face à la
portière sur le siège du passager ni sortir la
tête ou les mains à l’extérieur du véhicule.
● Ne fixez et n’appuyez rien sur des zones
telles que la planche de bord, le tampon de
volant, la partie inférieure du tableau de bord
et la porte de la boîte à gants.
Ces objets peuvent se transformer en projectiles lorsque les coussins gonflables SRS du
conducteur, du passager avant et de protection des genoux se déploient.
● Ne fixez rien sur des zones telles que les
portières, le pare-brise, les glaces de
portières, les montants avant ou arrière, le
brancard de pavillon et la poignée de maintien.
(Sauf pour l’autocollant de limite de vitesse)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
571
AVERTISSEMENT
■ Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS
● N’accrochez pas de cintres ni d’autres objets rigides sur les crochets porte-vête-
ments. Tous ces objets pourraient se transformer en projectiles et vous occasionner
des blessures graves, voire mortelles, en cas de déploiement des coussins gonflables
SRS en rideau.
● Si un recouvrement de vinyle est placé sur la zone de déploiement du coussin gonflable SRS de protection des genoux, veillez à le retirer.
● N’utilisez pas d’accessoires recouvrant les parties du siège où les coussins gonflables
SRS latéraux se déploient, car ces accessoires pourraient entraver le déploiement
des coussins gonflables. De tels accessoires peuvent empêcher les coussins gonflables latéraux de se déployer correctement, rendre le système inopérant ou provoquer accidentellement le déploiement des coussins gonflables latéraux,
occasionnant des blessures graves, voire mortelles.
● Ne frappez pas et n’appliquez pas une pression importante à l’emplacement des
composants des coussins gonflables SRS.
Cela peut provoquer un mauvais fonctionnement des coussins gonflables SRS.
● Ne touchez à aucun composant des coussins gonflables SRS immédiatement après
leur déploiement (gonflage), car ils pourraient être chauds.
● Si vous avez de la difficulté à respirer après le déploiement des coussins gonflables
SRS, ouvrez une portière ou une glace pour laisser entrer l’air, ou quittez le véhicule
si vous pouvez le faire en toute sécurité. Dès que possible, nettoyez tous les résidus
afin d’éviter les irritations cutanées.
● Si les emplacements de stockage des coussins gonflables SRS, tels que le tampon de
volant, la porte de la boîte à gants et les garnitures des montants avant et arrière, sont
endommagés ou fissurés, faites-les remplacer par votre concessionnaire Lexus.
● Ne placez aucun objet, par exemple un coussin, sur le siège du passager avant. Cela
disperserait le poids du passager, ce qui empêcherait le capteur de le détecter correctement. Cela pourrait empêcher le déploiement des coussins gonflables SRS du
passager avant en cas de collision.
9
For owners
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
572
AVERTISSEMENT
■ Modification et mise au rebut des composants du système de coussins gonflables
SRS
Ne mettez pas votre véhicule au rebut et n’effectuez aucune des modifications suivantes sans d’abord consulter votre concessionnaire Lexus. Les coussins gonflables SRS
pourraient fonctionner de manière incorrecte ou se déployer (gonfler) accidentellement, ce qui serait susceptible d’occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles.
● Installation, retrait, démontage et réparation des coussins gonflables SRS
● Réparations, modifications, retrait ou remplacement du volant, du tableau de bord,
de la planche de bord, de la boîte à gants, des sièges ou du capitonnage des sièges,
des montants avant, latéraux et arrière, ou des brancards de pavillon
● Réparations ou modifications de l’aile avant, du pare-chocs avant ou du côté de
l’habitacle
● Installation d’une protection de calandre (barre safari, barre kangourou, etc.), de
lames de déneigement, de treuils ou d’un porte-bagages de toit
● Modifications du système de suspension du véhicule
● Installation d’appareils électroniques tels qu’un émetteur-récepteur radio ou un lecteur de CD
● Modifications à votre véhicule pour une personne aux capacités physiques réduites
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
573
Headlight aim instructions for Canadian owners (in
French) (vehicles with single-beam headlights)
The following is a French explanation of headlight aim instructions from the
headlight aim section in this manual.
Boulons de réglage vertical
1
Boulon de réglage A
2
Boulon de réglage B
Avant de vérifier la portée des phares
1
Assurez-vous que le réservoir de carburant du véhicule est plein et que la
partie de carrosserie située autour des phares n’est pas déformée.
2
Garez le véhicule sur un sol parfaitement horizontal.
3
Asseyez-vous sur le siège du conducteur.
4
Faites rebondir le véhicule à plusieurs reprises.
9
For owners
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
574
Réglage de la portée des phares
1
Tournez le boulon A vers la droite ou
vers la gauche à l’aide d’un tournevis
cruciforme.
Retenez le sens de rotation et le nombre
de tours.
2
Tournez le boulon B du même
nombre de tours et dans le même
sens qu’à l’étape 1 .
Si vous n’arrivez pas à régler vos phares
en suivant cette procédure, apportez le
véhicule chez votre concessionnaire
Lexus afin qu’il règle la portée des
phares.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
575
Index
What to do if...
(Troubleshooting)............................... 576
Alphabetical index................................ 580
For information regarding the equipment listed below, refer to the
“NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
• Audio system
• Navigation system
• Intuitive parking assist
• Lexus parking assist monitor
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
576
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
If you have a problem, check the following before contacting your Lexus
dealer.
The doors cannot be locked, unlocked, opened or closed
You lose your keys
● If you lose your mechanical keys, new genuine mechanical keys can be made
by your Lexus dealer. (→P. 134)
● If you lose your electronic keys, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly.
Contact your Lexus dealer immediately. (→P. 135)
The doors cannot be locked or unlocked
● Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted? (→P. 410)
● Is the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode?
When locking the doors, turn the engine switch off. (→P. 198)
● Is the electronic key left inside the vehicle?
When locking the doors, make sure that you have the electronic key on your
person.
● The function may not operate properly due to the condition of the radio wave.
(→P. 152)
The rear door cannot be opened
● Is the child-protector lock set?
The rear door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the lock is set.
Open the rear door from outside and then unlock the child-protector lock.
(→P. 140)
The trunk lid is closed with the electronic key left inside
● The function to prevent the electronic key from being left inside the trunk will
operate and you can open the trunk as usual. Take the key out from the trunk.
(→P. 145)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
577
If you think something is wrong
The engine does not start
● Did you press the engine switch while firmly depressing the brake pedal?
(→P. 197)
● Is the shift lever in P? (→P. 199)
● Is the electronic key anywhere detectable inside the vehicle? (→P. 150)
● Is the steering wheel unlocked? (→P. 199)
● Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted?
In this case, the engine can be started in a temporary way. (→P. 502)
● Is the battery discharged? (→P. 504)
The shift lever cannot be shifted from P even if you depress the brake
pedal
● Is the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode?
If you cannot release the shift lever by depressing the brake pedal with the
engine switch in IGNITION ON mode (→P. 208)
The steering wheel cannot be turned after the engine is stopped
● It is locked automatically to prevent theft of the vehicle. (→P. 199)
The windows do not open or close by operating the power window
switches
● Is the window lock switch pressed?
The power window except for the one at the driver’s seat cannot be operated
if the window lock switch is pressed. (→P. 175)
The engine switch is turned off automatically
● The auto power off function will be operated if the vehicle is left in ACCES-
SORY or IGNITION ON mode (the engine is not running) for a period of
time. (→P. 199)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
578
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
A warning buzzer sounds during driving
● The seat belt reminder light is flashing
Are the driver and the front passenger wearing the seat belts? (→P. 436)
● The parking brake indicator is on
Is the parking brake released? (→P. 211)
Depending on the situation, other types of warning buzzer may also sound.
(→P. 434, 441)
An alarm is activated and the horn sounds
● Did anyone inside the vehicle open a door during setting the alarm?
The sensor detects it and the alarm sounds. (→P. 74)
To stop the alarm, turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode or start the
engine.
A warning buzzer sounds when leaving the vehicle
● Is the electronic key left inside the vehicle or the moon roof opened?
Check the message on the multi-information display. (→P. 441)
A warning light turns on or a warning message is displayed
● When a warning light turns on or a warning message is displayed, refer to
P. 434, 441.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
579
When a problem has occurred
If you have a flat tire
● Vehicles with spare tire
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and replace the flat tire with the spare tire.
(→P. 472)
● Vehicles without spare tire
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and repair the flat tire temporarily with the
emergency tire puncture repair kit. (→P. 483)
The vehicle becomes stuck
● Try the procedure for when the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow.
(→P. 515)
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
580
Alphabetical index
Alphabetical index
A
A/C............................................................308
Air conditioning filter.......................408
Changing the rear seat
settings.................................................. 315
Front automatic air conditioning
system .................................................308
Micro dust and pollen filter............ 314
Rear air conditioning system......... 319
S-FLOW mode................................. 309
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System).......288
Function ................................................. 288
Warning light .......................................434
Warning message.............................. 441
Active Sound Control (ASC) ...........215
Adaptive Front-lighting System
(AFS) ........................................................217
Adaptive Variable Suspension
system (AVS)......................................289
AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting
System)....................................................217
Air conditioning filter..........................408
Air conditioning system.....................308
Air conditioning filter.......................408
Changing the rear seat
settings.................................................. 315
Front automatic air conditioning
system .................................................308
Micro dust and pollen filter............ 314
Rear air conditioning system......... 319
S-FLOW mode................................. 309
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Airbags.......................................................... 41
Airbag operating conditions ..........48
Airbag precautions
for your child ....................................... 44
Airbag warning light ........................ 434
Correct driving posture.................... 34
Curtain shield airbag
operating conditions .......................48
Curtain shield airbag
precautions .......................................... 46
Front passenger occupant
classification system......................... 52
General airbag precautions ........... 44
Locations of airbags.............................. 41
Modification and disposal
of airbags................................................47
Side airbag operating
conditions .............................................48
Side airbag precautions .................... 44
Side and curtain shield airbags
operating conditions .......................48
Side and curtain shield airbags
precautions .......................................... 44
SRS airbags ............................................... 41
Alarm ............................................................74
Alarm ...........................................................74
Warning buzzer.......................434, 441
Anchor brackets.......................................63
Antennas (smart access system
with push-button start) .....................150
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ...... 288
Function..................................................288
Warning light....................................... 434
Warning message...............................441
Alphabetical index
Approach warning............................... 265
Armrest ....................................................340
Armrest door ......................................... 343
ASC (Active Sound Control) ...........215
Ashtrays....................................................339
Assist grips .............................................. 344
Audio input*
Audio system*
Automatic headlight leveling
system ..................................................... 218
Automatic light control system.........216
Automatic transmission..................... 202
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P .................................. 208
M mode ................................................. 205
Paddle shift switches ........................204
AUX port*
Auxiliary boxes......................................333
AVS (Adaptive Variable
Suspension system)..........................289
B
581
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) ................278
Blind Spot Monitor function...........281
Rear Cross Traffic Alert
function................................................283
Bluetooth®*
Brake
Fluid ..........................................................389
Parking brake ..........................................211
Warning light...........................434, 436
Warning message...............................441
Brake assist............................................. 288
Brake Hold................................................213
Break-in tips .............................................183
Brightness control
Instrument panel light
control............................................ 89, 97
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) ................278
Blind Spot Monitor function...........281
Rear Cross Traffic Alert
function................................................283
C
Back-up lights
Replacing light bulbs........................420
Battery.......................................................390
Battery checking...................................390
If the vehicle battery is
discharged........................................ 504
Preparing and checking before
winter....................................................296
Warning light .......................................434
Card key ....................................................132
Care................................................358, 362
Aluminum wheels..............................359
Exterior ...................................................358
Interior..................................................... 362
Seat belts................................................363
Cargo capacity .......................................194
Cargo hooks .......................................... 334
CD player*
Chains....................................................... 298
*: Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA
SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
582
Alphabetical index
Child restraint system............................ 59
Booster seats, definition ....................59
Booster seats, installation.................. 67
Convertible seats, definition............59
Convertible seats, installation.........65
Front passenger occupant
classification system.........................52
Infant seats, definition..........................59
Infant seats, installation .......................65
Installing CRS
with LATCH anchors .....................64
Installing CRS with seat belts..........65
Installing CRS
with top tether strap.........................68
Child safety ................................................58
Airbag precautions..............................44
Battery precautions .............. 391, 508
Child restraint system.........................59
How your child should wear
the seat belt .................................37, 38
Installing child restraints.....................63
Moon roof precautions....................180
Power window lock switch............ 175
Power window precautions ...........177
Rear door child-protectors ........... 140
Removed electronic
key battery precautions.................. 411
Seat belt comfort guide ..................... 37
Seat belt extender precautions......40
Seat belt precautions ..........................62
Seat heater precautions..................322
Trunk precautions............................... 146
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Child-protectors ....................................140
Cleaning .......................................358, 362
Aluminum wheels..............................359
Exterior ...................................................358
Interior..................................................... 362
Seat belts................................................363
Clock.................................................87, 339
Coat hooks ..............................................344
Condenser..............................................388
Console box.............................................331
Console box light...................................331
Consumption screen............................128
Cooling system ..................................... 386
Engine overheating ......................... 509
Consumption screen............................ 127
Cruise control
Cruise control ..................................... 270
Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range ...................258
Cup holders............................................ 332
Curtain shield airbags............................42
Customizable features ...................... 545
D
Daytime running light system............ 217
Defogger
Front windshield...................................314
Outside rear view mirrors ..............314
Rear window..........................................314
Differential
Front differential .................................526
Rear differential................................... 527
Alphabetical index
Dimensions .............................................. 518
Dinghy towing..........................................196
Display
12.3-inch display................................ 306
Drive information ..................... 102, 109
Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range................... 258
Energy monitor.....................................127
LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist).........253
Multi-information display .....100, 108
Trip information ............................ 78, 92
Warning message.............................. 441
Do-it-yourself maintenance...............371
Door courtesy lights
Location..................................................327
Door lock
Doors .........................................................137
Smart access system with
push-button start .............................150
Wireless remote control ..................137
Doors...........................................................137
Automatic door locking
and unlocking system.................... 140
Door glasses ......................................... 175
Door lock................................................ 139
Open door warning buzzer............151
Open door warning light...............436
Outside rear view mirrors................ 171
Rear door child-protector.............. 140
583
Drive info 1/Drive info 2/
Drive info 3................................... 105, 116
Drive information......................102, 109
Resetting .......................................102, 109
Drive-Start Control................... 183, 207
Driver’s seat position memory..........160
Driving position memory.................. 161
Memory recall function ....................162
Power easy access system............ 160
Driving ........................................................182
Break-in tips.......................................... 183
Correct driving posture.................... 34
Driving mode select switch...........273
Procedures.............................................182
Winter drive tips ................................296
DRS (Dynamic Rear Steering)....... 289
Function..................................................289
Warning message...............................441
DVD player*
Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range
Function..................................................258
Warning message...............................441
Dynamic Rear Steering (DRS)....... 289
Function..................................................289
Warning message...............................441
*: Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA
SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
584
Alphabetical index
E
Eco drive mode..................................... 273
Eco Driving Indicator.............................85
Eco driving meter.................................... 92
EDR (Event data recorder)...................10
Electric Power Steering (EPS) .......289
Function ................................................. 289
Warning light .......................................435
Warning message.............................. 441
Electronic key ..........................................132
Battery-saving function.................... 152
If the electronic key does not
operate properly..............................501
Replacing the battery........................ 410
Emergency, in case of
If a warning buzzer sounds...........434
If a warning light turns on...............434
If a warning message
is displayed ......................................... 441
If the electronic key
does not operate properly .........501
If the engine will not start................497
If the parking brake
cannot be released....................... 499
If the vehicle battery is
discharged........................................ 504
If you have a flat tire ..............472, 483
If you think something
is wrong...............................................432
If your vehicle becomes stuck......515
If your vehicle has to be stopped
in an emergency .............................425
If your vehicle needs
to be towed .......................................426
If your vehicle overheats ...............509
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Emergency flashers .............................424
Emergency tire puncture repair
kit ............................................................. 483
Engine
Accessory mode ................................ 198
Compartment ..................................... 376
Engine switch ........................................197
Hood........................................................ 373
How to start the engine....................197
Identification number.......................520
Ignition switch
(engine switch....................................197
Overheating........................................ 509
Engine compartment cover..............379
Engine coolant ...................................... 386
Capacity.................................................525
Checking ...............................................386
Preparing and checking
before winter....................................296
Engine coolant temperature
gauge................................................ 86, 94
Engine immobilizer system..................72
Engine oil ...................................................381
Capacity................................................. 522
Checking ................................................ 381
Oil level warning message.............441
Oil pressure
warning message.............................441
Preparing and checking
before winter....................................296
Alphabetical index
Engine oil maintenance data ........... 366
Engine switch ...........................................197
Auto power off function................... 199
Changing the engine switch
modes ...................................................198
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an emergency..........425
Starting the engine ..............................197
EPS (Electric Power Steering) .......289
Function ................................................. 289
Warning light .......................................435
Warning message.............................. 441
Event data recorder (EDR)...................10
Expert mode........................................... 292
F
First-aid kit storage net ......................335
Flat tire
Vehicles with spare tire .................. 472
Vehicles without spare tire .......... 483
Floor mats................................................... 32
Fluid
Automatic transmission ..................526
Brake........................................................527
Washer ...................................................392
Footwell light .......................................... 327
Front passenger occupant
classification system............................ 52
Front personal lights............................328
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
585
Front seats.................................................158
Adjustment............................................. 158
Cleaning................................................. 362
Correct driving posture.................... 34
Driving position memory................ 160
Head restraints .....................................165
Power easy access system............ 160
Seat heaters.......................................... 323
Seat position memory...................... 160
Seat ventilators.................................... 323
Front side marker lights....................... 216
Light switch.............................................216
Replacing light bulbs .......................420
Welcome light illumination
control................................................... 138
Front turn signal lights..........................210
Replacing light bulbs ............ 419, 420
Turn signal lever...................................210
Wattage ...................................................531
Fuel
Capacity...................................................521
Fuel gauge ...................................... 87, 94
Fuel pump shut off system ............ 433
Information............................................532
Type............................................................521
Warning light.......................................436
Warning messages ............................441
Fuel consumption
Average fuel
consumption............................102, 109
Average fuel consumption
after refueling ..........................102, 109
Current fuel consumption....102, 109
586
Alphabetical index
Fuel filler door........................................ 228
When the fuel filler door
cannot be opened ........................ 230
Fuel pump shut off system................. 433
Fuses ............................................................412
G
Garage door opener..........................345
Gauges................................................86, 92
Glove box..................................................331
Glove box light........................................331
H
Hands-free system
(for cellular phone)*
HD Radio® system*
Head restraints........................................165
Headlights .................................................216
Adaptive Front-lighting
System (AFS) .....................................217
Automatic High Beam system..... 219
Headlight leveling
warning message ............................ 441
Light switch ............................................ 216
Replacing light bulbs........................420
Headlights aim............................. 416, 573
Head-up display..................................... 120
Heated steering wheel....................... 322
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Heaters
Air conditioning system ................ 308
Heated steering wheel ................... 322
Seat heaters.......................................... 323
Outside rear view mirrors ..............314
Hill-start assist control ....................... 288
Hood ..........................................................373
Open ....................................................... 373
Warning message...............................441
Hooks
Cargo hooks ....................................... 334
Coat hooks........................................... 344
Luggage hook..................................... 334
Retaining hooks (floor mat)..............32
Horn.............................................................168
I
I/M test ..................................................... 370
Identification.............................................519
Engine .....................................................520
Vehicle......................................................519
Ignition switch (engine switch) ......... 197
Auto power off function ...................199
Changing the engine switch
modes................................................... 198
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an emergency.......... 425
Starting the engine............................. 198
Illuminated entry system ................... 329
Immobilizer system .................................72
Indicators......................................................81
Alphabetical index
Initialization
Items to initialize.................................560
Maintenance........................................ 366
Moon roof ...............................................179
Power windows....................................176
Tire pressure
warning system............................... 395
Initiators (tire pressure
warning system).................................. 401
Inside door handle lights ................... 327
Inside rear view mirror.........................169
Instrument panel light control ....89, 97
Interior lights........................................... 327
Intuitive parking assist*
Function*
Warning message.............................. 441
J
Jack
Positioning a floor jack....................374
Vehicle-equipped
jack............................................ 473, 485
Jack handle ..................................473, 485
Jam protection function
Moon roof ...............................................179
Power trunk opener
and closer............................................ 145
Power windows................................... 175
587
K
Keyless entry............................................150
Smart access system
with push-button start................... 150
Wireless remote control..................137
Keys .............................................................132
Battery-saving function ....................152
Electronic key........................................132
Engine switch ........................................197
If the electronic key
does not operate properly......... 501
If you lose your keys................ 134, 135
Key number plate................................132
Keyless entry............................... 137, 150
Mechanical key.....................................133
Engine switch ........................................197
Replacing the battery ........................410
Warning buzzer.................................... 151
Wireless remote control key.........137
Knee airbags ............................................... 41
*: Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA
SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
588
Alphabetical index
L
Language (multi-information
display)....................................... 546, 548
LATCH anchors ...................................... 64
LDH (Lexus Dynamic
Handling system) ..............................289
Lever
Auxiliary catch lever .........................373
Hood lock release lever.................373
Internal trunk release lever............. 146
Shift lever................................................202
Turn signal lever .................................. 210
Wiper lever...........................................223
Lexus Dynamic Handling
system (LDH)......................................289
Lexus Enform*
Lexus Enform Safety Connect........ 352
Lexus parking assist monitor*
Lexus Safety System+......................... 232
Automatic High Beam ..................... 219
Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range................... 258
LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist).........249
PCS (Pre-Collision System)....... 238
License plate lights.................................216
Light switch ............................................ 216
Replacing light bulbs........................420
Welcome light
illumination control .........................138
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Light bulbs
Replacing.................................................419
Wattage ...................................................531
Lights
Automatic High Beam system .....219
Headlight switch ..................................216
Illuminated entry system................. 329
Interior light...........................................328
Interior lights list...................................327
Personal lights.....................................328
Replacing light bulbs ............ 419, 420
Trunk light................................................145
Turn signal lever...................................210
Vanity lights..........................................338
Wattage ...................................................531
Welcome light illumination
control................................................... 138
LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) .............249
Operation..............................................253
Warning messages ............................441
Lock steering column...........................199
Low profile tire ...................................... 396
Luggage hook ....................................... 334
Luggage security system ....................145
Alphabetical index
M
Main display............................................306
Maintenance
Do-it-yourself maintenance............371
General maintenance .....................367
Maintenance data...............................518
Maintenance requirements.......... 365
Malfunction indicator lamp .............. 434
Master warning light ........................... 436
Meter....................................................86, 92
Head-up display.................................. 120
Indicators.................................................... 81
Instrument panel light
control............................................89, 97
Meters................................................86, 92
Multi-information display .....100, 108
Warning lights ....................................... 80
Micro dust and pollen filter ................314
Mirrors
Inside rear view mirror..................... 169
Outside rear view mirror
defoggers............................................ 314
Outside rear view mirrors................ 171
Vanity mirrors..................................... 338
Moon roof..................................................178
Door lock linked
moon roof operation......................179
Jam protection function....................179
Operation............................................... 178
Warning message.............................. 441
MP3 disc*
589
Multi-information display.........100, 108
Boost meter/oil temperature
gauge/oil pressure gauge.......... 103
Drive information......................102, 109
Dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range ...................258
“F” content.................................................. 111
G-force ...........................................103, 114
Lap timer..................................................... 111
LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist)......... 249
Torque distribution ...............................113
N
Navigation system*
Noise from under vehicle........................8
O
Odometer.......................................... 87, 94
Oil
Engine oil ............................................... 522
Front differential oil ...........................526
Rear differential oil ............................ 527
Opener
Fuel filler door......................................228
Hood........................................................ 373
Trunk..........................................................143
*: Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA
SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
590
Alphabetical index
Outer foot lights
Outer foot lights .................................327
Replacing light bulbs........................420
Wattage................................................... 531
Outside rear view mirrors ................... 171
Adjusting and folding.......................... 171
Blind Spot Monitor............................278
Linked mirror function
when reversing..................................173
Mirror position memory..................160
Outside rear view
mirror defoggers............................. 314
Outside temperature display .....87, 94
Overheating, Engine ..........................509
P
Paddle shift switches...........................204
Parking assist sensors
(intuitive parking assist)*
Parking brake............................................ 211
If the parking brake
cannot be released....................... 499
Operation................................................. 211
Parking brake engaged
warning buzzer ................................ 441
Parking brake engaged
warning message ............................ 441
Parking lights............................................216
Light switch ............................................ 216
Replacing light bulbs........................420
Welcome light
illumination control .........................138
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
PCS (Pre-Collision System)............ 238
Function..................................................238
Warning light.......................................435
Warning message...............................441
Personal lights ....................................... 328
Power easy access system.................160
Pop-up display ............................... 105, 117
Power outlets......................................... 340
Power steering (Electric Power
Steering system)................................ 289
Warning light.......................................435
Warning message...............................441
Power trunk opener and closer.......143
Power windows....................................... 175
Door lock linked
window operation ...........................176
Jam protection function....................175
Operation................................................175
Window lock switch ..........................175
Pre-Collision System (PCS)............ 238
Function..................................................238
Warning light.......................................435
Warning message...............................441
Alphabetical index
R
Radar cruise control (dynamic
radar cruise control with
full-speed range) ...............................258
Radiator....................................................388
Radio*
RBDS (Radio Broadcast
Data Systems)*
Rear air conditioning system .............319
Rear door sunshades............................341
Rear personal lights.............................328
Rear side marker lights ........................216
Light switch ............................................ 216
Replacing light bulbs........................420
Welcome light
illumination control .........................138
Rear seat heaters.................................. 323
Rear sunshade .........................................341
Operation............................................... 341
Reverse operation feature.............342
591
Rear turn signal lights...........................210
Replacing light bulbs .......................420
Turn signal lever...................................210
Rear view mirror
Inside rear view mirror......................169
Outside rear view mirrors ................171
Rear view monitor system*
Rear window defoggers......................314
Refueling.................................................. 228
Capacity...................................................521
Fuel types.................................................521
Opening the fuel tank cap............ 229
When the fuel filler door
cannot be opened.........................230
Remote Touch* .................................... 302
Replacing
Electronic key battery .......................410
Fuses ..........................................................412
Light bulbs...............................................418
Tires...........................................................472
Rev indicator.....................................88, 95
Rev peak .............................................88, 96
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners .................................. 562
Resetting the message indicating
maintenance is required ................ 366
*: Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA
SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
592
Alphabetical index
S
Seat belts..................................................... 36
Adjusting the seat belt........................36
Automatic Locking Retractor......... 37
Child restraint system
installation..............................................65
Cleaning and maintaining
the seat belt .......................................363
Emergency Locking
Retractor (ELR).................................. 37
How to wear your seat belt .............36
How your child should wear
the seat belt ..........................................38
Pregnant women, proper
seat belt use..........................................39
Reminder light and buzzer ...........436
Seat belt extender.................................38
Seat belt pretensioners ...................... 37
SRS warning light...............................434
Seat heaters............................................ 323
Seat position memory.......................... 160
Seat ventilators...................................... 323
Seating capacity......................................194
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Seats ............................................................158
Adjustment............................................. 158
Adjustment precautions...................159
Child seats/child restraint
system installation ............................. 63
Cleaning................................................. 362
Driving position memory................ 160
Head restraints .....................................165
Power easy access system............ 160
Properly sitting in the seat................ 34
Seat heaters.......................................... 323
Seat position memory...................... 160
Seat ventilators.................................... 323
Sensor
Automatic headlight system ..........218
Inside rear view mirror......................170
Intuitive parking assist*
LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist)......... 249
Radar sensor............................234, 280
Rain-sensing windshield
wipers................................................... 226
Service reminder indicators ................78
Alphabetical index
S-FLOW mode .....................................309
Shift lever ................................................. 202
Automatic transmission ..................202
If the shift lever
cannot be shifted from P ........... 208
Shift lever light ....................................... 327
Shift lock system.................................... 207
Side airbags ............................................... 42
Side display .............................................306
Side marker lights...................................216
Light switch ............................................ 216
Replacing light bulbs........................420
Welcome light illumination
control...................................................138
Side mirrors ............................................... 171
Adjusting and folding.......................... 171
BSM (Blind spot monitor).............278
Linked mirror function
when reversing..................................173
Mirror position memory..................160
Side turn signal lights ........................... 210
Replacing light bulbs........................420
Turn signal lever .................................. 210
Smart access system
with push-button start ...................... 150
Antenna location.................................150
Entry functions.......................................137
Starting the engine ..............................197
Warning message.............................. 441
Snow mode .............................................203
Snow tires ................................................300
593
Spare tire ..................................................472
Inflation pressure................................528
Storage location................................. 473
Spark plug ............................................... 525
Specifications...........................................518
Speed indicator........................................ 95
Speedometer.................................... 87, 94
Sport mode..............................................273
Steering lock ............................................199
Column lock release .........................199
Steering lock system
warning message...........................470
Steering wheel ........................................168
Adjustment............................................. 168
Audio switches*
Heated steering wheel ................... 322
Power easy access system............ 160
Steering wheel
position memory ............................. 160
Stop lights
Replacing light bulbs .......................420
Storage feature..................................... 330
Storage precautions ........................... 330
Stuck
If the vehicle becomes stuck......... 515
Sun shade
Rear ............................................................341
Rear door ................................................341
Roof ............................................................179
Sun visors................................................. 338
*: Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA
SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
594
Alphabetical index
Switches
ASC (Active Sound Control)
switch..................................................... 215
Audio remote control switches*
Automatic High Beam switch ...... 219
Brake Hold..............................................213
Cruise control
switch....................................... 258, 270
Door lock switches ............................ 139
Driving mode select switch ..........273
Driving position memory
switches................................................160
Emergency flashers switch ...........424
Engine switch.........................................197
Garage door opener
switches...............................................345
Heated steering wheel
switch....................................................322
HUD (Head-up display)
switches................................................ 120
Ignition switch ........................................197
Intuitive parking assist*
Light switch ............................................ 216
LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist)
switch....................................................253
Meter control switches ...........101, 109
Moon roof switches........................... 178
Outside rear view mirror
switches.................................................. 171
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Paddle shift switches........................204
Parking brake switches ......................211
Power door lock switch...................139
Power window switches..................175
Rear sunshade switch .......................341
Rear window and outside
rear view mirror defoggers
switch .....................................................314
Seat heater switches ........................ 323
Seat ventilator switches.................. 323
Snow mode switch ...........................203
“SOS” button .......................................352
Talk switch*
Telephone switches*
Tilt and telescopic
steering control switch................. 168
Tire pressure warning reset
switch ...................................................395
Trunk closer switch.............................144
Trunk opener switch..........................143
Trunk opener main switch ..............145
TVD (Torque Vectoring
Differential) switch.........................286
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
switch ................................................... 264
VSC OFF switch...............................290
Window lock switch ..........................175
Windshield wipers
and washer switch......................... 223
Alphabetical index
T
Tachometer .......................................87, 94
Variable red zone................................. 97
Tail lights.....................................................216
Light switch ............................................ 216
Replacing light bulbs........................420
Welcome light illumination
control...................................................138
Talk switch*
Telephone switches*
Theft deterrent system
Alarm........................................................... 74
Engine immobilizer system.............. 72
Tire inflation pressure.........................528
Maintenance data............................. 528
Tire inflation pressure display
function................................................394
Warning light .......................................436
Warning message.............................. 441
Tire information.....................................535
Glossary................................................ 540
Size............................................................537
Tire identification number..............537
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading.............................................. 539
Tire pressure warning system ......... 394
Function ..................................................394
Initializing............................................... 395
Installing tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters................394
Registering ID codes ...................... 396
Warning light .......................................436
Warning message.............................. 441
595
Tires ........................................................... 393
Chains.....................................................298
Checking ...............................................393
Emergency tire puncture
repair kit..............................................483
If you have a flat tire.............. 472, 483
Inflation pressure................................528
Information............................................535
Replacing................................................472
Rotating tires........................................394
Size ...........................................................528
Snow tires............................................. 300
Spare tire.................................................472
Tire inflation pressure display
function................................................394
Tire pressure warning system.....394
Warning light.......................................436
Warning message...............................441
Tools ...........................................................473
Top tether strap ....................................... 68
Torque Vectoring Differential
(TVD)..................................................... 286
Total load capacity.................................194
Towing
Dinghy towing.......................................196
Emergency towing ........................... 426
Towing eyelet ......................................428
Trailer towing.........................................195
TRAC (Traction Control)
Function..................................................288
TRAC OFF switch............................290
*: Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA
SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
596
Alphabetical index
Transmission........................................... 202
Automatic transmission ..................202
Driving mode select switch ..........273
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P .................................. 208
M mode ................................................. 205
Paddle shift switches ........................204
Trip meters .........................................87, 94
Trunk............................................................143
Internal trunk release lever............. 146
Jam protection function................... 145
Luggage security system................ 145
Open trunk warning message..... 441
Power trunk opener
and closer............................................ 143
Smart access system
with push-button start ................... 143
Trunk closer switch............................ 144
Trunk easy closer................................ 145
Trunk features......................................334
Trunk grip ............................................... 144
Trunk light ............................................... 145
Trunk opener main switch.............. 145
Trunk opener switch ......................... 143
Trunk storage extension.................343
Wireless remote control ................. 144
Trunk light..................................................145
Trunk light ............................................... 145
Wattage................................................... 531
Turn signal lights .................................... 210
Replacing light bulbs.............419, 420
Turn signal lever .................................. 210
Wattage................................................... 531
TVD (Torque Vectoring
Differential)..........................................286
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
U
USB port*
V
Vanity lights ............................................ 338
Vanity lights..........................................338
Wattage ...................................................531
Vanity mirrors............................................338
Vanity lights..........................................338
Variable Gear Ratio Steering
(VGRS)................................................. 289
Function..................................................289
Warning message...............................441
VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics
Integrated Management).............. 289
Vehicle data recordings...........................9
Vehicle Dynamics Integrated
Management (VDIM)..................... 289
Vehicle identification number ..........519
Vehicle Stability Control
(VSC)..................................................... 288
Ventilators (seat ventilators) ........... 323
VGRS (Variable Gear Ratio
Steering)............................................... 289
Function..................................................289
Warning message...............................441
Voice command system*
VSC
(Vehicle Stability Control)............ 288
Alphabetical index
W
Warning buzzers
Approach warning............................265
Brake system........................................434
Downshifting ........................................207
Intuitive parking assist*
Key reminder ...................................... 469
Open door............................................443
Open moon roof .............................. 456
Open hood...........................................443
Open trunk ...........................................443
Open window .................................... 456
Seat belt reminder.............................436
Warning lights ..........................................80
ABS...........................................................434
AFS OFF indicator............................435
Brake system............................434, 436
Charging system................................434
Electric power steering...................435
Low fuel level .......................................436
Malfunction indicator lamp...........434
Master warning light.........................436
Open door............................................436
Parking brake indicator ..................436
Pre-collision system..........................435
Seat belt reminder light...................436
Slip indicator.........................................435
SRS............................................................434
Tire pressure ........................................436
597
Warning messages................................ 441
Warning reflector storage belt .......337
Washer......................................................223
Checking ............................................... 392
Low washer fluid
warning message.............................441
Preparing and checking
before winter....................................296
Switch ...................................................... 223
Washing and waxing .......................... 358
Weight
Cargo capacity.....................................194
Load limits ...............................................194
Weight ..................................................... 518
Welcome light illumination
control .....................................................138
Wheels
Replacing...............................................406
Size ...........................................................528
Window glasses...................................... 175
Window lock switch.............................. 175
Windows.................................................... 175
Power windows....................................175
Rear window defogger ....................314
Washer................................................... 223
Windshield wiper de-icer...................314
Windshield wipers................................223
Position ...................................................299
Rain-sensing windshield
wipers................................................... 223
*: Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA
SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
598
Alphabetical index
Winter driving tips................................ 296
Wireless remote control key.............144
Battery-Saving Function.................. 152
Locking/Unlocking.............................132
Replacing the battery........................ 410
WMA disc*
X
XM® Satellite Radio*
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Alphabetical index
599
*: Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA
SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
600
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Auxiliary catch lever
Trunk opener
Fuel filler door
P. 373
P. 143
P. 229
Hood lock release lever
Tire inflation pressure
P. 373
P. 528
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)
17.5 gal. (66.3 L, 14.6 Imp.gal.)
Fuel type
Unleaded gasoline only
P. 521
Cold tire inflation
pressure
P. 528
Engine oil capacity
(Drain and refill —
reference)
P. 522
Engine oil type
P. 522
GS350_300_GS F_OM_OM30G34U_(U)
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement